Home

Programming Systems User Manual - FTP Site

1. ABEL tm Version 2 00b JEDEC file for P20R8 Header f comment area Large Memory Version everything Created on 09 Mar 87 04 45 PM preceeding 8 bit barrel shifter first is EngineerI Data I O Corp Redmond WA 10 Jan 1986 ignored QP24 QF2560 10000 11011111111111111111111111111011101110104 ud Number e ABB 1101111111111111111111111011111110111001 1101111111111111111110111111111110110110 1101111111111111101111111111111110110101 1101111111111011111111111111111101111010 Fuse Address 0000 1101111110111111111111111111111101111001 1001101111111111111111111111111101110110 1001111111111111111111111111111101110101 Fuse States 1001111111111111111111111111101101110101 O intact 1701111111111111111111111111101110111010 ToO 1101111111111111111111111011111110111001 1101111111111111111110117 7711110110 11011111111111111017 01 4 MAUI IT OLIN et PT ye ae lee 1111111111101111 10v 1111111111111110111011c 1001111111111111111111111111111101110101 1001111111111111111111111111101101110101 V0001 C1000000000NO0HLLLLLLL1N V0002 C1000000000N01LHLLLLLLIN V0003 C1000000001NO0LLHLLLLL1N V0004 C1000000001NO1LLLHLLLL1N V0005 C1000000010NO0LLLLHLLL1N V0006 C1000000010NO1LLLLLHLL1N V0007 C1000000011NO0LLLLLLHL1N V0008 C1000000011NO1LLLLLLLH1N V0009 C0111111100NOO0LHHHHHHHlN V0010 CO111111100NO1HLHHHHHHlN V0011 CO111111
2. FORMAT 03 OR 07 D B11111111F B11111111F saga S B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F B11111111F LEGEND D Start Code nonprintable STX CTRL B is the optional Start Code o Characters such as spaces carriage returns and line feeds may appear between bytes 3 End Code nonprintable ETX CTRL C 0074 2 Data can also be expressed in 4 bit words The programmer generates the 4 bit format on upload if the data word width is 4 bits You can insert any other character such as carriage returns or line feeds between an F and the next B 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 3 Translation Formats The start code is a nonprintable STX a CTRL B same as a hex 02 The end code is a nonprintable ETX a CTRL C same as a hex 03 Note Data without a start or end code may be input to or output from the programmer by use of alternate data translation format codes These are ASCII BNPF 05 ASCII BHLF 06 ASCII B10F 07 A single data byte can be aborted if the programmer receives an E character between B and F characters Data will continue to be stored in sequential RAM addresses Data is output in 4 byte lines with a space between bytes
3. End of File Record Load Address Checksum LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return with optional line feed and nulls determined by null count 0089 4 Each record is composed of a series of small fields each initiated by a tag character The programmer recognizes and acknowledges the following tag characters 0 or K followed by a file header 7 followed by a checksum which the programmer acknowledges 8 followed by a checksum which the programmer ignores 9 followed by a load address B followed by 4 data characters F denotes the end of a data record followed by 2 data characters 5 26 3980 3900 2900 User Manual EE EE LoT HB gie quite The start of file record begins with a tag character and a 12 character file header The first four characters are the byte count of the data bytes the remaining file header characters are the name of the file and may be any ASCII characters in hex notation Next come interspersed address fields and data fields each with tag characters If any data fields appear before the first address field in the file the first of those data fields is assigned to address 0000 Address fields may be expressed for any data byte but none are required The record ends with a checksum field initiated by the tag character 7 or 8 a 4 character checksum and the tag character F The checksum is the two s complement of the sum of the 8 bit ASCII valu
4. Does the algorithm appear on the standard device list No Yes More Commands Select Device Configure System 1 Keep Current Keep Current Replace Restore 1 Gather Information Knowing the following information about the devices you will be programming will enable you to find the correct algorithm once you are connected m Manufacturer example AMD Device name example 27c1024 Package type example 48 pin PLCC Current version of the programmer software example 5 5 C 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Keep Current Subscription 2 Connect to Keep Current Using the BBS Use the following procedure to log on to the Keep Current BBS 1 Modem Call 425 882 3211 Internet Using telnet go to bbs data io com 2 If this is the first time you have called when the logon screen appears type new at the prompt to create a new account and provide the requested information Note Write down your user name and password for future reference This is your personal BBS account and should not be shared 3 Press L to go to the Library menu 4 Press S to select the Keep Current Library 5 Press F to search for algorithms Using the Web Go to the Data I O Web Site at www data io com Click on the Keep Current image from the Home Page or from the Programmer Device Support page 3 Find Device Algorithm When you reach the Keep Current Library select the correct algorithm
5. GROUND 9 J CONNECTOR POWER REMOTE TERMINAL SWITCH PORT PORT AC RECEPTACLE 1018 3 Power Switch Turns power on and off AC Receptacle Connects the programmer to ac power Remote Port Connects the programmer to equipment such as a PC workstation terminal or file server Terminal Port Connects the programmer to equipment such as a PC workstation terminal or file server Ground Connector Connector for an antistatic wrist strap Programmer Disks 1 4 The Boot Files disk and the Algorithm System disks are inserted in the programmer s disk drive and are configured to work with one specific programmer Do not try to use these disks with a different programmer After setting up the programmer make backup copies of the Boot disk and Algorithm System disks using disks formatted on the programmer Use the copies during daily operation Boot Files Disk The Boot Files disk contains system software and configuration files used to boot up the programmer The 3980 can be booted from the MSM hard drive Algorithm System Disks Algorithm System disks contain the system software and programming algorithms for the currently supported devices Unless your algorithm files are stored on the 3980 hard drive or RAM Device Selection is enabled one of the Algorithm System disks must be installed in the programmer disk drive each time you select a device You will be prompted for the specific disk to insert 3980 3900
6. t NN GHiM ER DOT 0538 4 5 Insert the device into the open MatchBook 6 Close the MatchBook and press the retaining latch forward with your thumb until the latch snaps into place as shown in Figure 2 11 CAUTION Do not place excessive force on the top of the MatchBook as this may cause premature wear on the conductive pad 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 21 Inserting an SOIC Device into a MatchBook Use the following procedure to insert an SOIC device into the SOIC MatchBook 1 Install the SOIC Base into the programmer see page 2 11 2 Select the appropriate MatchBook for the device you will be using and install it in the SOIC Base see page 2 20 3 Position the SOIC device so that pin 1 is up and to the right as you view it from the top Insert the SOIC device into the open MatchBook so that the device is flush against the left side of the MatchBook Make sure the device is positioned between the six alignment fingers and not on top of them Note The unused portion of the socket will be on the right as you view it from the top The small round dots along the top of the opening as shown in Figure 2 13 indicate the location of pin 1 for the various sizes of SOIC devices the SOIC MatchBook will accept Finally close the MatchBook and press the retaining latch forward with your thumb until the latch snaps into place as shown in Figure 2 11 Figure 2 13 Inserting an SOIC Device 2 22 LEFT JUSTI
7. Edit Address Offset Specifies the address you want assigned to the first byte of data in user memory Using the address offset can save much calculation time on files written on a host system and then downloaded to the programmer For example if your host system data file was written using a begin address of 1000H you could specify an offset of 1000H Edit data would then be displayed on the programmer s screen beginning with address 1000H Edit Begin Address Specifies the first address you wish to edit Enter the 1 to 6 digit hex address This address must be equal to or greater than the edit address offset The edit address offset value subtracted from the edit begin address value cannot be greater than the user RAM size 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 49 Commands Memory Editor Commands Only certain keyboard commands may be used in the memory editor The allowed commands are listed in the following table Jump to CTRL B Moves the cursor to a specific memory address When address this command is selected the cursor moves to the Jump to Address field Enter the address you want to jump to and press ENTER Delete byte CTRL D Deletes the entire byte with 8 bit data and deletes the entire word with 16 bit data All data after the current character position are moved one address position down An FF is inserted at the end of RAM If a disk file is used the file gets smaller Exchange CTRL E Allows you to search for a certain pa
8. Texas Instruments SDSMAC Format 320 Code 04 Data files in the SDSMAC 320 format consist of a start of file record data records and an end of file record See Figure 5 2 The format is used for Texas Instruments 320 line of processors It is very similar to format 90 the only difference is that the address fields represent 16 bit data words rather than bytes Figure 5 2 TI SDSMAC Format example Filename Word Count r Tag Character Tag Character r Checksum r Tag Character Tag Characters 0028 TEDCFF el enr 0000BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F400F O 0008BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3F8F 0010BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3FFE 0018BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3F7F 0020BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3FEE L LJ Data Records 40 Qo oO o i0 C End of File Record _ Load Address Checksum LEGEND Nonprinting Carriage Return with optional line feed and nulls determined by null count 0429 2 Each record is composed of a series of small fields each initiated by a tag character The programmer recognizes and acknowledges the following tag characters 0 or K followed by a file header 7 followed by a checksum which the programmer acknowledges 8 followed by a checksum which the programmer ignores 9 followed by a load address which repr
9. printable character ASCII 20 hex 7E hex control character ASCII 00 hex 1F hex ASCII 7F hex STX ASCII 02 hex ETX lt ASCII 03 hex carriage return ASCII 0D hex line feed 2 ASCII 0A hex space ASCII 20 hex lt valid character gt lt printable character gt lt carriage return gt lt line feed gt field character ASCII 20 hex 29 hex ASCII 2B hex 7E hex carriage return line feed 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats The Design Specification Field design spec field character The first field sent in a JEDEC transmission is the design specification Both the full and kernel JEDEC formats accept the design specification field This field is mandatory and does not have an identifier such as an asterisk signaling its beginning The design specification field consists of general device information It could for example consist of the following information your name your company s name the date the device name and manufacturer design revision level etc This field is terminated by an asterisk character Examine the sample transmission shown on the next page of this description the first three lines of the file comprise the design specification field The programmer ignores the contents of this field for downloads and places Data I O in this field for u
10. 4 39 Edit Data 4 45 File Operations 4 53 Job File 4 58 Remote Control 4 59 Self test 4 60 Transfer Save 4 31 Terminal Type 4 31 Programmer ID 4 32 Interface 4 30 View 4 32 Replace Restore 4 32 Delete 4 33 Keep Current 4 52 Custom Menu Algs 4 34 Mass Storage 4 38 Sumcteck Display 4 39 Corpare Eec D 4 41 T Blank Check 4 42 Etectonio Erase 4 42 Underverbiow 4 43 Device Configure 4 44 Logic EditLogic _ 45 T Vector Et 446 Fil Fuse Map 48 Glear Vectors 48 Download Data 4 67 Upload Data 4 62 Compare Data 4 64 Data 4 61 Yield Tally 4 69 Format Select 465 Input From Disk 4 65 Output To Disk 4 66 Serial Output 4 67 Purge 4 34 11 AR Create 4 35 Add 4 36 4 37 View Delete 4 37 P Update 4 38 Memory Edit Memory 4 49 Complement 4 51 4 52 Data Copy Fill Memory 4 52 Swap Data 4 52 0542 8 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Factory Default Settings Commands The programmer s system parameters are initialized at the factory To restore these factory defaults at any time go to the More Commands Configure System Restore System Parameters menu type 0 then press ENTER The po
11. isses eo UR RR RR RR RA RR a 3 10 4 Selecting a Keep Current Algorithm 2 2 000 002 eee 3 12 5 Loading Data from a Device 1 2 2 ce ee 3 15 6 Loading Data from Disk 000 llle 3 18 7 Selecting a Translation Format llle 3220 8 Loading Data from a PC Using Hilerm 0000055 3 21 9 Loading Data from a Host ssaa aaa aa es 3 23 10 Editing Data 22004420886 bo ead ee Rae ee d A bur Ron RD e Er aed 3 26 11 Programming a Memory Device lens 3 28 12 Verifying a Device scu hos En e RR a ee RR 3 30 Outline of the Programming Operation Select the manufacturer and part number of the device 1 Select Device you will be using so the programmer can perform Device Manufacturer amp device operations with the appropriate programming Device Part Number algorithm 2 Load Device Data The Load Data operation moves device data from a master device hard drive 3980 floppy disk drive or Device Data network into programmer RAM Programmer RAM 3 Program Device The Program Device operation transfers the device data in RAM into the device in the socket using the device s Programmer RAM programming algorithm Device in Socket The verify operation included with programming compares the data in a programmed device to the data 4 Verify Device Datain Datain in programmer RAM Additional verify operations Device RAM provide information
12. m iB manner in 4 4 e gt Second Byte groups of 8 bit e e 0 L e e 0o e e 9 06 Data bytes eevee bytes e e 0 e e ONE DATA oe ee RECORD ee e oe e e 0 e e 0 e e o o I Address where following data byte is to be stored I BYTE COUNT number of 8 bit data bytes 4 WORD COUNT number of 16 bit words in record except checksum and itself amp CHECKSUM modulo 256 sum of all bytes in the record except the first byte TRANSFER ADDRESS for microprocessor program counter START OF FILE R CORD DATA WIDTH BASE see text DATA BUS WIDTH see text 8 WORD COUNT number of 16 bit words in the record always 04 in Start of File record Note This format is binary Therefore no ASCII control characters or carriage returns and line feeds are allowed 0088 2 Data files begin with a Start of file record which includes the Data Bus Width Data Width Base Transfer Address and a checksum of the bytes in the record The Data Bus Width represents the width of the target system s bus in bits The Data Width Base represents the smallest addressable entity used by the target microprocessor 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 25 Translation Formats The Data Bus Width and Data Width Base are not used by the 2900 3900 during download During upload the Data Bus Width will be set to the current Data Word Width and the Data Width Base will be
13. Accessing Device specific Online Information After you select a device if the Display Device Footnote feature is enabled the default any online device specific information for that device is displayed You can enable Display Device Footnote in the More Commands Configure System Edit Programming Parameters screen If the Display Device Footnote is disabled a message prompts you to press F3 or to display any available device specific information Press CTRL N to view the next screen press CTRL P to view the previous screen Exiting Help Review To exit a Help screen including the device footnote screen press either F1 to return to the Main Menu or F2 to return to the screen from which you entered Help In this Session you learned how to move through the programmer s interface To select menu items either press the first letter of the command or move the cursor to the command then press ENTER To return to the Main Menu press F1 To access previous screens press F2 To access online Help press either F3 or 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 3 Selecting a Device This Session describes how to select the manufacturer and part number of the device you are using You should have completed Session 2 which introduces you to the programmer s interface If you do not have an AMD 27256 the device used for this Session substitute the manufacturer and part number of the device you want to use T
14. FORMAT 30 OR 35 1 FORMAT 31 OR 36 1 FORMAT 32 D FORMAT 37 FORMAT 50 OR 55 1 FORMAT 51 OR 56 1 FORMAT 52 FORMAT 53 OR 58 1 FORMAT 57 5 14 Optional Octal Address Field Typical EE A000000 ds Octal Data Byte Typical 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 397 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 55007760 Execute Character Optional Octal Sumcheck Field Typical A000000 371531153115311 311 3118 311 31153115311531153115 311 311 3 1183118 4 S007760 A000000 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 S007760 A000000 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 3 9007760 D 1 A0000 BR PE EB FF ER EE EE BB FER EF EB EP ER BE BE FEE SSOFFO Optional Hex Address Field Optional Hex Sumcheck Field A0000 FFSFFZFFSFFSFFZFFSFFZFFZFFSFFSFFSFFSFFZFFZFFSFFS 4 SSOFFO A0000 FF FF FF PF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FFE FF 4 SSOFFO A0000 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF EF SSOFFO A0000 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FE FF 3 SSOFFO LEGEND a Start Code is nonprintable STX CTRL B optionally SOH CTRL A 2 Start Code is nonprintable SOM CTRL R 8 End Code is nonprintable EOM CTRL T 4 End Code is nonprintable ETX CTRL C 0078 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Although each data byte has an
15. Note You may want to contact the device manufacturer to determine if the programming specifications for the device have changed If they have please notify Data I O Customer Support Improper algorithm applied by programmer due to possible flaw in programmer software If this error occurs on devices spanning old and recent date codes it may indicate an algorithm related problem in your programmer software Workaround On the programmer s Device List find the earliest version of programmer software that supports your device boot your programmer with this version and repeat the operation If the operation is successful you ve found a temporary workaround Note Call Data I O Customer Support and report your findings Additional Information A device programming error is reported when a repeated attempt to program a particular cell or fuse has failed This error may be caused by a faulty device or an improper programming algorithm 6 14 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages Invalid Device ID on Logic Device Probable Cause Solution Improper device selected Make sure the device selection matches the manufacturer and part number of your device as precisely as possible If it doesn t select the proper characteristics and perform the operation again Note Choosing the wrong manufacturer and or part number via the Select device option from the Main Menu causes the programmer to expect an electronic ID that d
16. saving edits 4 48 Editing data session 3 25 EE Bulk Erase 4 42 default setting 4 3 Electrical shock avoiding 2 13 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Electromagnetic Interference EMI 1 7 minimizing 2 4 2 5 2 6 Electronic ID verify error on memory device error message 6 16 Electronically Erase Device 4 42 Electrostatic discharge ESD 1 6 2 13 A 1 Enable CTS DTR Edit Serial Port Configuration 4 26 Enable Terminal Beeps Edit Interface Parameters 4 30 Enable Yield Tally Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Program Logic Device 4 11 Program Memory Device 4 14 Enhanced security fuse capability 4 14 Erase EE Device Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Program Memory Device 4 14 ESD precautions A 1 Extended algorithm selecting 4 7 Extended CRC Commands list B 7 External features 1 3 F Factory default settings 4 3 Features back panel 1 4 front panel 1 3 File Menu 3 17 File Operations 4 53 Filename Compare Data 4 64 default setting 4 3 Download Data 4 61 Edit Fuse Map 4 45 Edit Memory 4 49 Edit Test Vectors 4 46 Input from Disk 4 66 Load File 4 54 Output Logic Data 4 68 Output Memory Data 4 68 Output to Disk 4 67 Save File 4 55 Sumcheck Logic Device 4 39 Upload Data 4 63 Verify Logic Device 4 15 wildcards 4 56 Fill Data Index 3 Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Fill Memory 4 52 Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Fill Programmer Fuse Map 4 48 Fill Programmer Memory 4
17. Algorithm Type D E K Algorithm Media F M only on 3980 Destination Disk Custom Menu Algorithm Disk where D is default algorithms E is extended algorithms K is Keep Current algorithms F is floppy disk and M is Mass Storage Module 3980 only Select the algorithm media and algorithm source that matches the first algorithm you want to add to the Custom Menu You are not limited by the algorithm type you choose Your Custom Menu can contain any combination of default extended and Keep Current algorithms In the Custom Menu Algorithm Disk field select the disk drive where the Custom Menu algorithm files will be created If prompted insert the Algorithm System disk that contains the algorithms from which you want to choose The programmer prompts you for the correct disk to insert when it is needed Press ENTER to continue Follow the directions on the screen CAUTION This operation uses RAM as a temporary storage buffer and alters the contents of RAM If you get the message Need to clear user RAM file s prior to operation there is not enough available RAM to perform the operation To clear the RAM file s and continue the operation press ENTER If you do not want RAM files cleared cancel the operation by pressing F2 or if this doesn t work press CTRL Z When the programmer is ready to write the Custom Menu CM algorithm list to a disk the following message is displayed Insert Custom Menu algorithm disk I
18. Find the KEEP CURRENT entry enter the number next to it then press ENTER The Keep Current Part List screen is displayed see Figure 3 8 Note The Device Type filter has no effect on the devices displayed when you select Keep Current devices 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 11 Getting Started Figure 3 8 Keep Current Part Number Selection Screen FILENAME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REU X XX Y vv Z Z MANUFACTURER PART 1 0 FORMAT EN KEEP CURRENT PART LIST Page 1 Call Keep Current BBS at 1 206 881 3465 for latest KEEP CURRENT part list Manufacturer Part Alg Rev File name 1 AMD CEZ2U1 UES PLCC 3 7a A AMD KC1 CZ AMD 18Z2B8EG8 FN 3 Tb A AMD KCZ 3 AMD 16R4H 15 3 7a A 16R4H 15 KC3 4 ALT 910T PLCC 3 Tb B 910T KC1 5 EXEL 46C15 3 Ta B 46C15 KC1 Select Part 1 N Next page P First page F1 Main menu F2 Prev menu F3 or Help If you see the Keep Current Part List continue with the next section Select the Keep Current Algorithm If you do not see the Keep Current Part List you may be viewing a screen describing Keep Current service The programmer cannot display the Keep Current Part List screen if you do not have any Keep Current algorithms If you downloaded Keep Current algorithms make sure the disk with the algorithms is in the programmer disk drive After you insert the disk with the Keep Current algorithms press F1 and restart this Session Select the Keep Current Alg
19. Guidelines for Constructing a Job File Because a job file does not stop until the entire file is played back job files should not include Quick Copy commands or operations requiring a disk or base to be inserted or removed The first command in a job file should be F1 so that it always starts from the Main Menu preventing runaway job files Note A job file can be used only with the version of software it was created with If you update your software recreate any job file created using a previous version Recording a Job File 4 58 To record a Job file follow these steps 1 Press Esc CTRL J to start recording the job file Each keystroke entered from now on is stored in the Job file 2 Press F1 as the first command in your Job file Although this is not necessary it helps prevent runaway Job files 3 Enter all the parameters you want recorded For example you may want to select a device then choose its programming parameters by using the Edit Programming Parameters command 4 After you enter the keystrokes you want to store in the job file press Esc CTRL J to stop recording the job file The Job File screen is displayed 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands 5 Select a file number for the newly created job file For example to make this job file number five on the Job Files screen press 5 ENTER If you select a file number already in use the programmer prompts you to press ENTER to overwrite the
20. In Transparent mode you can communicate with a host computer connected to one of the programmer ports This mode causes the terminal connected to the other programmer port to act as if it were connected directly to the host computer Use this mode to establish communication with the host such as logging in and running commands To enter and exit this mode type Esc CTRL T from the terminal Transparent mode does not support binary data transfers this can be done via the Upload and Download commands using one of the binary data formats See page 2 6 for more information In Transparent mode all key strokes entered on the terminal are passed directly to the host with one exception The Esc character omitted since it is part of the Exit Transparent Mode command To send an Esc character to the host enter two consecutive Esc characters the second one is passed to the host or if Esc is followed by some character other than a CTRL T the escape and the character are sent to the host 4 70 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 Translation Formats Introduction When a data file which contains information to be programmed into a device is created it is stored in a specific data translation format When the data file is transferred to a programmer it must be set to handle the appropriate translation format During download the programmer translates the formatted data and stores it in user memory as a binary image file The following tran
21. More Commands Transfer Data Output to Disk The Output To Disk command saves data from a disk file or from RAM to another disk file The data in the newly created disk file can be stored in any of the supported translation formats So you could save an existing data file in another translation format This command is similar to Upload Data except that the formatted data is sent to a disk file rather than a port Follow these steps to output data in a translation format and store it on a disk 1 Use the View Directory command on the File Menu to make sure there is enough space on the disk in the drive to hold the file you are writing 2 Specify the settings for the parameters listed below 3 Press ENTER to start this command The programmer displays Data transfer complete after the file is output to the disk 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands The following parameters are available Source R D Select the Source for the disk file data Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D disk Filename Specifies the name of the disk file from which the data are taken This option appears only if Disk is selected as the Source The filename parameter must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27256 dat Output Filename Specifies the name of the disk file you want the formatted data sent to The filename must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27256 hex I O Translation Format Specifies the translation format for
22. PROGRAMMER DIP BASE UTILITY DISKS DISK BOOT FILES ALGORITHM SYSTEM FILES DEVICE LIST USER MANUAL ne lt a POWER CORD re Note You may also have received additional equipment Options are described on page 1 8 1 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Introduction External Features Front Panel The front panel features are shown in Figure 1 2 Figure 1 2 Front Panel Features POWER LED n TERMINAL LED NS REMOTE LED Y POWER SELF TEST CE TERMINAL AN REMOTE di om SELF TEST O 5 BASE OPENING A c ro Power LED When this lamp is lit the power is on 6 DISK DRIVE 1019 1 Terminal LED When this lamp is lit equipment is connected properly to the Terminal port Remote LED When this lamp is lit equipment is connected properly to the Remote port Self Test LED When this lamp is lit the programmer is performing a self test Base Opening Insert the Base here Disk Drive Insert the programmer disks Boot and Algorithm System disks here Note Insert the Device List Disk in the PC disk drive not in the programmer disk drive 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 1 3 Introduction Back Panel The features on the back panel are shown in Figure 1 3 Figure 1 3 Back Panel Features Disks e C 7
23. Yield Tally More Commands Yield Tally Yield Tally Output The Yield Tally command allows you to maintain programming information on devices that have been programmed which is useful in a manufacturing environment where device yield statistics must be kept Yield statistics are maintained on the last 16 device types programmed When you run Yield Tally on the 17th device the statistics for the oldest device are dropped The yield tally record uses the manufacturer name and part number as the device name The yield data is stored on the Algorithm System disk or the 3980 hard drive in the ytally ytl file If the file does not exist enabling the Yield Tally option creates a blank copy of this file on the disk Note To upload the yield statistics in CRC mode use command 43 The CRC command 46 clears the yield tally statistics See Appendix B Space is allocated on the Algorithm System disk for the Yield Tally data files When the Yield Tally function is run and the Algorithm System disk is not in the disk drive the error message FILE ERROR Cannot access yield data is displayed on the terminal In CRC mode the programmer responds with error code 9A if the Algorithm System disk cannot be found Yield Total The Yield Total includes only those devices with the following error conditions illegal bit misverify device not programmable and structured test failure Examples of these conditions are Continuity Check and Electronic ID Err
24. l O Translation Format See Translation Formats Illegal Bit An illegal bit occurs when a device contains a programmed location and the data file specifies that the location should be unprogrammed Illegal Bit Check A test that determines whether or not a socketed device contains any illegal bits Instrument Control Code A 1 digit number that signals or controls data transfers It also implements a form of remote control that provides peripherals with flow control beyond that provided by software handshaking JEDEC Joint Electron Design Engineering Committee a committee of programmer and semiconductor manufacturers that provides common standards for programmable issues Examples include acceptable test characters for PLDs and standard data transfer programming formats for PLDs JEDEC Standard 3A The standard PLD data translation format as defined by JEDEC for PLD design software to communicate with PLD programmers It defines the states of all fuses in the device the fusemap and may include test vectors for DEVICE testing JEDEC I O Translate DIP LCC Vectors A feature on the programmer that translates test vectors for a device from its DIP package to its PLCC LCC package allowing for the different pinouts of the two package types JLCC An acronym for J style Leadless Chip or Ceramic Carrier a type of device package A device with hooked leads that are open at one end leads are usually on all four sides Job
25. m Next Operation Begins At This read only parameter shows where in user memory the next data byte will be loaded This value is calculated from the Data Word Width Device Block Size Memory Begin Address device width and next set member parameters Optional Parameters The Non default Parameters screen which contains the preceding parameters and any default parameters that were changed is displayed as the default The more complex All Parameters screen displays the following additional parameters To toggle between the two screens press F4 m Memory Begin Address Specifies the beginning RAM address in hex where the first byte of data is loaded from a device If you selected a 16 bit device the Memory Begin Address must be an even address The default address is O B Device Begin Address Specifies the first hex master device address that will be loaded The default value is O WB Device Block Size Specifies the size in hex of device data used in device operations After you select a device the Device Block Size is set automatically to the device size and normally does not need to be changed Also Device Block Size is set to a smaller value if the Device Begin Address is nonzero This parameter can be changed if desired Entering a zero sets the Device Block Size equal to the device size 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 9 Commands WB Set Auto increment This option used in serial set mode directs the programmer to the ne
26. next set member parameters 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Note Items with an asterisk are visible on the screen only if the selected device supports the feature Program Security Fuse Y N Enables or disables the programming of the security fuse s To program the security fuse s set this parameter to Y and set the Security Fuse Data parameter s to 1 This parameter defaults to N which disables programming of the security fuse s Program Signature Available on only a few devices the program signature is a user definable field that allows the user to program data into the program signature array Software Data Protection Y N When enabled prevents writing to a device Optional Parameters The Non default Parameters screen which contains the preceding parameters and any default parameters that were changed is displayed as the default The more complex All Parameters screen displays the following additional parameters To toggle between the two screens press F4 Memory Begin Address Specifies the beginning RAM address in hex of the first byte of data to be programmed The Memory Begin Address must be an even address if you have selected a 16 bit device The default address is O Device Begin Address Specifies the first hex device address to be programmed The default is O Device Block Size Specifies the size in hex of device data used in device operations At device selection Device Block Size is au
27. of the data block to be output Enter the number of bytes to output Entering zero sets the User Data Size to the total number of bytes in the programmer User RAM or the size of the source disk file if the disk is used as the source Output Logic Data to Serial Port More Commands Transfer Data Serial Output Output Logic Data If you selected a logic device the Output Logic Data to Serial Port screen is displayed Enter the parameters you want to use then press ENTER to begin the transfer The parameters for this screen are described below Source R D Specifies the source for the data Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D Disk Filename Specifies the disk file to use as the data source This field appears only if you specify Disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions An example of a valid filename is 1618 dat Destination R T Specifies the destination for the data Press SPACE to toggle between R Remote port and T Terminal port Number Of Lines Between Form Feeds Specifies the number of printed text lines you wish to have per page The default is O no form feed Starting Vector Number Specifies the first vector to be output The default is 1 which causes the vector listing to start at the first vector Number Of Vectors Specifies the total number of vectors you wish to output The default is 0 which causes no vectors to be output 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands
28. the byte count give the address of the first data byte Each data byte is represented by 2 hexadecimal digits the number of data bytes in each record must equal the byte count Following the data bytes of each record is the checksum the two s complement in binary of the preceding bytes including the byte count address record type and data bytes expressed in hex Figure 5 11 Intel Intellec 8 MDS Format example Start Character 1 Address r Checksum 2 Hex Characters 1 Byte of record lx all L1 1 10000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO0Q 10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO 10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO Data 10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDO Records 10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCO 000000 O1FF End of File Record L IL Byte Count Transmission Sumcheck O Record Type LEGEND Nonprinting Carriage Return line feed and nulls determined by null count 0083 3 The end of file record consists of the colon start character the byte count equal to 00 the address the record type equal to 01 and the checksum of the record Signetics Absolute Object Format Code 85 Figure 5 12 shows the specifications of Signetics format files The data in each record are sandwiched between a 9 character prefix and a 2 character suffix Figure 5 12 An Example Start Character 4 Fy 00001020FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
29. you enroll in the Keep Current Subscription Service 2 In June Cruft Technologies announces a new device the Cruft 1263 3 A week later Data I O announces support for the Cruft 1263 and places a Keep Current algorithm for the Cruft 1263 on the Keep Current BBS and the Data I O Web page 4 The next day you connect to the Keep Current Library via the BBS or the Web page and download the new algorithm for the Cruft 1263 5 In August Data I O releases version X 5 system software complete with the new algorithm for the Cruft 1263 6 You update your programmer to version X 5 system software The algorithm for the Cruft 1263 is part of the system software 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Glossary Action Symbol Found in the upper left corner of the screen the action symbol rotates to indicate that the programmer is performing an operation Address A coded instruction designating the location of data or program segments in storage Address Offset A value subtracted from addresses during input translation then added to addresses during output translation Algorithm The software file containing information a sequence of voltage or current waveforms to program a specific device All Parameters The All Parameters screen displays all applicable parameters on a parameter entry screen Approval Indication that a device manufacturer has tested an algorithm to support a specific device on a programmer The level
30. 1111101111 0000000000 0000000000 0000 lt EXT gt 0000 0091 2 Extended Tektronix Hexadecimal Format Code 94 The Extended Tektronix Hexadecimal format has three types of records data symbol and termination records The data record contains the object code Information about a program section is contained in the symbol record the programmer ignores symbol records and the termination record signifies the end of a module The data record see sample below contains a header field a load address and the object code Figure 5 20 lists the information contained in the header field Figure 5 20 An Example of Tektronix Extended Format BLOCK LENGTH 15H 21 HEADER CHARACTER 3980 3900 2900 User Manual f 15 r SUMCHECK 1CH 1 5 6 3 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 r OBJECT CODE 6 BYTES T 1 T 1 61C310020202020202 J LOAD ADDRESS 100 H BLOCK TYPE 6 DATA 0092 2 5 37 Translation Formats No of ASCII Item Characters Description 9o 1 Signifies that the record is the Extended Tek Hex format Block length 2 Number of characters in the record minus the 9o Block type 1 6 data record 3 symbol record ignored by the programmer 8 termination record Checksum 2 A 2 digit hex sum modulo 256 of all the values in the record except the 9o and the checksum Character Values for Checksum Computation The number of fields in the file will vary depending on whether a data
31. 165 22U10 108 PLC 29 2716 c4 ZURP10 C17 ZZU1078 B 15 C30 Z2716B 5 2 RP4 185 22U10 78 LCC 31 27256 6 ZURP6G C195 ZZU10 B LCC 325 2732 C7 ZURP8B 2805 22U108 15 LCC 33 27328 c8 ZUXRP10 CZ150 ZZU107R PLCC 34 ZT3Z2B 9 Z XRP4 22 22U108 B PLCC 35 27512 C105 Z XRP6 C23 22U10 15 PLC 36 2764 115 ZOXRP8 245 22XP10 37 2764 LCC 12 ZZIP6 255 2388 38 Z764A 13 22P18 26 27128 39 2764APC Select Part N Next page P Prev page Return Load Algorithm F1 Main Menu F2 Prev menu F3 or Help Select a Device Part Number Selecting a device part number is similar to selecting a device manufacturer find the item in the menu and enter the number beside the item The part numbers are arranged alphanumerically If you do not find the 27256 number on this screen you may need to view the next screen to view more supported devices for this manufacturer Page through the screens and find 27256 Type the number enclosed in parentheses for example in Figure 3 6 you would type 31 then press ENTER The programmer loads the algorithm for the device you selected in this case an AMD 27256 The action symbol located at the left end of the message bar at the top of the screen rotates while the programmer loads the algorithm Accessing Device specific Online Information Review Some devices have information relating to their use and programming When you select a device that has footnotes or other device spe
32. 2900 User Manual Introduction PC Disks The Utility Disk and the Device List Disk are inserted in the floppy disk drive on your PC Utility Disk The Utility Disk contains HiTerm software for your PC For more information see the manual doc file on the Utility Disk Device List Disk The Device List Disk lists supported devices and includes related information You can generate custom device lists to be printed or saved to a file The data in the Device List is formatted to make it easy to import into a database or spreadsheet The Device List Disk includes search features to make it easy to find your devices To search for a device follow these steps 1 Type F at the beginning of the file Notice that the command line changes to FIND 2 Type the name of the device you are searching for For example type the name of the manufacturer of the device 3 Press ENTER to begin the search The software searches for the first occurrence of the string of characters you typed Press F2 to highlight the line if it is the device you are looking for Press F3 to search for the next occurrence of the string 4 Type F and a new string of characters to begin another search that begins from the current page When you find the correct device press F2 to display the information about that device including manufacturer part name programmer menu name number of pins package type and footnotes if any Press the Right Arrow key to
33. 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Figure 5 24 Close up of Intel OMF286 Format INTEL OMF286 FORMAT CODE 98 File Header A2 or 06 and 02 Data File Module ooo Checksum Bold boxes indicate that the information inside is not used 4 bytes 8 bytes 8 bytes 41 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes Total Space Date Time Module Creator GDT Limit GDT Base IDT Limit IDT Base TSS Selector Data File Header 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes ABSTXT DEBTXT Last Next Reserved Location Partition Reserved B Table of Contents f y 3 bytes 2 bytes Data File Header 75 bytes Real Address Length Text T Section 1 byte Partition TN Table of Contents 20 bytes Section Section Section 0432 2 a the programmer however some characters must occupy those spaces 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 43 Translation Formats Intel Hex 32 Code 99 Figure 5 25 5 44 The Intel 32 bit Hexadecimal Object file record format has a 9 character 4 field prefix that defines the start of record byte count load address and record type and a 2 character checksum suffix Figure 5 25 illustrates the sample records of this format Intel Hex 32 Format example dress Offset Address Start Character Ad ij 1 j 020000020000FC l Extended Segment Address Record 020000
34. 4 53 View Files Keep Current 4 32 Voltage acceptable range 1 6 Y Yield Tally 4 69 default setting 4 3 erasing statistics 4 69 statistics kept 4 69 Index 9 Index 10 3980 3900 2900 User Manual
35. 52 Fill Variable Fill Memory 4 52 For Member X of Y Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Format Disk 4 57 Format list 5 1 From Memory Address Move Data 4 52 Front panel features 1 3 Functional specifications 1 6 G Generic PLD and cross programming 4 6 Ground connector 1 4 2 13 H Halting an operation in CRC B 4 Hardware handshaking 5 2 Help online 3 7 High Speed Download Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 High Speed Logic Drivers default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 24 High speed download benefits 2 17 powerup defaults 2 18 setting up 2 17 HiTerm 1 5 capabilities 2 4 high speed download 2 4 2 17 installing 2 4 Humidity 1 6 j I O Address Offset Compare Data 4 65 default setting 4 3 Download Data 4 62 Edit Communication Parameters 4 26 Input from Disk 4 62 4 66 Index 4 Output to Disk 4 67 Upload Data 4 63 I O Timeout default setting 4 3 Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 I O timeout error error message 6 18 I O Translation Format Compare Data 4 64 Download Data 4 61 Edit Communication Parameters 4 26 Input from Disk 4 66 Output to Disk 4 67 Upload Data 4 63 Illegal Bit Check 4 41 default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 logic devices 4 41 memory device 4 42 Program Logic Device 4 11 Program Memory Device 4 14 Illegal bit error error message 6 17 Incompatible user data file for device selected error message 6 20
36. Algorithms are arranged by programmer and system software version Keep Current filenames are represented as follows xVVddddd exe Programmer Type Data I O Device Support Number e Version Number with which this algorithm works s 3900 a AutoSite PM2500 Each Keep Current algorithm is designed to work with a particular version of system software Only algorithms that are compatible with the installed version of system software are displayed on the programmer s Keep Current Part List screen A Keep Current algorithm and a version of your programmer s system software are compatible when the numbers to the left and immediate right of the decimal point match as shown in the following example Algorithm System Software Version Version Compatible 3 51 3 5 Yes 3 7 3 7 Yes 3 6 3 7 No Note Keep Current algorithms are valid for only one major release of software because they will be included with the next release of system software 3980 3900 2900 User Manual C 3 Keep Current Subscription 4 Download Algorithm Algorithms come in a self extracting file format Place the Keep Current file on a floppy disk that has been formatted on your programmer and then expand the file by running it The following files should be created File Name Description of File xVVddddd KCx Algorithm xVVddddd txt Instructions on use adapters sys System adapters devfnote sys Device notes Optional file Label
37. Connecting to a Terminal To connect the programmer to a terminal you need the following WB One of the following terminals or one that can emulate one of these terminal types refer to the manual that came with your terminal ANSI 3 64 compatible terminals DEC VT 100 compatible terminals Qume QVT 101 compatible terminals TELEVIDEO TVI 910 compatible terminals Wyse WY 30 compatible terminals W An unused RS 232C serial port on the terminal W 25 pin serial cable To build your own cable see page 2 8 To operate the programmer in transparent mode you must also have the following items W An unused RS 232C serial port on the host W 25 pin serial cable Transparent Mode The programmer s transparent mode allows it to be inline between the host computer such as a networked file server and a terminal eliminating the need for a switch box or a second link to the host and enabling you to communicate with the host and download directly from the host to the programmer The terminal connected to the programmer can control both the programmer and the remote host Terminal Workstation 0544 2 In Transparent mode the programmer passes all characters through its serial ports Terminal A and Remote B which can operate at different baud rates While operating the programmer from the terminal press Esc CTRL T to toggle the programmer between terminal mode and transparent mode 1 Connect the hardware To connect the progr
38. Format example leeren 5 21 5 14 Motorola EXORmacs Format example eae 5 22 5 15 Intel MCS 86 Hex Object example es 5 23 5 16 HP 64000 Absolute Format example lle 5 25 5 17 TI SDSMAC Format example leer 5 26 5 18 JEDEC Full Format example es 5 30 5 19 JEDEC Kernel Mode Format example 055 5 37 5 20 An Example of Tektronix Extended Format 5 37 5 21 Motorola S3 Format example es 5 39 5 22 Hewlett Packard 64000 Unix Format llle 5 41 5 23 Intel OMF286 Format example eren 5 42 5 24 Close up of Intel OMF286 Format 0 000 cee ees 5 43 5 25 Intel Hex 32 Format example 0 00 cee es 5 44 A 1 Removing the Rear Panel Screws llle A 2 A 2 Removing the Top Cover Screws llle A 3 A 3 Waveform Board 0 cc rn A 3 A 4 Test Points on the Connector Block 1 0 cee es A 4 3980 3900 2900 User Manual ix 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Preface The Preface describes how to contact Data I O for technical assistance repair and warranty services and Keep Current subscription service It also describes how to reach Data I O on the World Wide Web Data I O Customer Support United For technical assistance contact Data I O Customer Resource Center States Telephone 800 247 5700 Fax 425 869 2
39. Illegal Bit Check screen for logic devices appears To check a logic device for illegal bits follow these steps 1 Select and socket a logic device 2 Press ENTER The programmer begins the Illegal Bit Check The results are displayed in the message bar 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 41 Commands Memory Device Illegal Bit Check More Commands Device Checks Illegal Bit Check Illegal Bit Check Memory Device If you selected a memory device the Illegal Bit Check screen for memory devices appears To check a memory device for illegal bits follow these steps 1 Select and socket a memory device 2 Enter the parameters described below 3 Press ENTER and the programmer begins the Illegal Bit Check The results are displayed in the message bar The following parameters appear on this screen WB User Data Size Specifies the size of the data block to check for illegal bits which is usually equals the device size or a multiple of device size for checking illegal bits of a set Entering 0 resets it to the device size for RAM User Data Size works with Total Set Size to determine the number of bytes to check in a set WB Total Set Size The total number of parts in the set to check for illegal bits Data Word Width Sets the number of bits in the Data Word Width For 8 bit or larger devices the minimum word width equals the device width maximum is 64 For 4 bit devices the word width choices are 4 8 16 and 32 which should
40. Individual Sumcheck Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Input from Disk 4 65 Inserting devices DIP 2 19 LCC 2 21 PGA 2 23 PLCC 2 21 QFP 2 27 SDIP 2 28 SOIC 2 22 2 27 TSOP 2 26 Instrument Control Code Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Interface action symbol 3 5 areas of the screen 3 5 command window 3 5 controlling the cursor 3 6 dialog window 3 5 entering a parameter 3 16 message bar 3 5 online Help 3 7 reminder bar 3 5 status window 3 5 Interface parameters changing 4 30 Invalid device ID on logic device error message 6 15 3980 3900 2900 User Manual J JEDEC I O Translate DIP LCC Vectors Edit Communication Parameters 4 28 Job File 4 58 accessing from Main Menu 4 30 playing back 4 59 recording 3 7 4 58 system software update 4 58 4 59 tips on recording 4 58 K Keep Current 1 8 connecting to C 3 Delete File 4 33 downloading algorithm C 4 finding KC algorithm C 3 overview of procedure C 2 Purge File 4 34 Keep Current command 4 32 Replace restore 4 32 View Files 4 32 Keep Current Subscription Service 1 8 C 1 Key functions 3 7 L LEDs 2 14 definition of 1 3 Load Data File 4 53 Load data from a device session on 3 14 Load Device 4 8 logic devices 4 8 memory device 4 8 Load File 4 53 Loading Data from a device 3 14 Loading data from a device 4 8 from a disk session 3 17 from a host 3 22 from a PC 3 20 Logic Device Illega
41. LED goes out from TaskLink s main screen select Utilities select VT100 on Programmer Port Alt P then press Ctrl Z Press Ctrl R Select N then press Enter at the Do you want to select new terminal type prompt A screen with a T bar menu appears indicating that the PC is in Terminal mode Figure 2 1 Programmer Main Menu FILENAME FILE JED RAM AVAIL Z176KB REU Xx YOY MANUFACTURER TI PART Z2 L8A I 0 FORMAT JEDEC full MAIN MENU Quick copy Load device Program device Verify device More commands F1 Main menu F3 or 7T Help F4 Order information Press M More Commands C Configure System E Edit then C Communication Select User Menu Port Press the space bar to change the T to an R then press Enter Move the cable from Terminal A on the programmer s back panel to Remote B Press F2 If the cursor moves back to Communication on the left side of the T bar menu the operation was successful Press I Interface then Y to change the Power on CRC Mode to Yes Press F2 F2 S then Enter to save the parameters Press F1 M then R to return the programmer to Remote mode Press Alt F1 to return to TaskLink then press CtrI F1 to confirm that the programmer is communicating with the PC From the TaskLink main menu select Utilities then select Device List Update to update the TaskLink algorithm database so it matches the current version of the programmer algorithms 2900 3900
42. MatchBook l llle 2 20 2 12 Inserting a Device into the PLCC or LCC Base 2 21 2 13 Inserting an SOIC Device aasan aaa eee 2 22 2 14 Orienting a PGA Device in the PGA Base 2 23 2 15 High Profile PPI Adapter 0 0000 eee eee 2 25 2 16 Inserting a TSOP Device in a PPI Base eee ee 2 26 2 17 Inserting a QFP Device in a PPI Adapter 00000 2 27 2 18 Inserting an SOIC Device in a PPI Adapter 2 27 2 19 Inserting an SDIP device in a PPI Adapter 2 28 2 20 Conductive Pad llle 2 29 2 21 SPA Block and Base auauna aaa ee 2 30 S 1e Malm Meni 5 so se 2 ere e x Guts eS guste cata Pats aha ae REG E are eas 3 5 3 2 More Commands Menu Screen 00000 eee ee 3 6 3 3 Self test Screen wai ne hea ee RR RORCUR ee oe ee A RR Rd 3 6 3 4 Areas of the Help Screen 2 2 lees 3 7 3 5 Device Manufacturer Selection Screen 22000 202s 3 9 3 6 Part Number Selection Screen usasa aaa ee 3 10 3 7 Device Manufacturer Selection Screen 2 000000 3 11 3 8 Keep Current Part Number Selection Screen 0 0000 eee 3 12 3 9 Locking and Unlocking a Device 0 0000 eee 3 15 3 10 Load Memory Device Screen Non default Parameters 3 15 3 11 Load Memory Screen All Parameters elsn 3 16 3 12 File Menu leere rrr 3 17 3 13 Load File Dialog Screen saaana aaa 3 1
43. Menu FILENAME RAM AVAIL 2176KB REU XXX YYY MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 170 FORMAT 1 FILE MENU View directory Load file Save file Purge file Rename file Copy file Duplicate disk Format disk Fi Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or 7 Help 2 Place the Utility disk in the programmer drive Select the View Directory command and locate the sample bin file on the Utility disk The programmer displays only 28 files at one time Press CTRL N to see the next page of files 4 Select sample bin then press F2 to return to the File menu 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 17 Getting Started 5 Select Load File from the File menu The dialog window displays a directory of the files on the disk A screen similar to what you will see is shown in Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 Load File Dialog Screen Review FILENAME RAM AVAIL 2176KB REV XXX YYY MANUFACTURER AMD PART s 27256 170 FORMAT FILE MENU LOAD DATA FILE View directory A SAMPLE BIN 192 A 445952 bytes free Load file Save file Purge file Rename file Copy file Filename Duplicate disk Memory begin address Format disk N Next page P First page Return Execute Fi Main Menu FZ Preu menu F3 or 7 Help Note The Load File command loads a RAM Image Binary file from disk into RAM Do not use this command to load files from a PC or from a file server 6 Move the cursor to the Filename field type sample bin then press ENTER
44. Program Memory Device parameters supported by the selected device see Figure 3 20 When you perform more complicated operations such as programming only part of the device you will change some of the parameters on this screen 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 27 Getting Started To switch between the two screens press F4 For this Session you will be using the Non default screen Figure 3 20 Program Memory Device Screen All Parameters FILENAME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REU X XX Y YY Z Z MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 I 0 FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS I MAIN MENU PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICE all parameters Select device Source RAM i Set auto increment IN Quick copy Illegal bit chk M Data word width s Blank check M Load deuice Next deuice Compare elec ID d Enable yield tally NI Total set size 1 Verify device User data size Next operation begins at More commands Memory begin address Reject option C S a Device begin address 2 Verify passes 0 1 2 Device block size 8000 Return Execute F4 Select mode options F1 Main menu FZ Preu menu F3 or 7 Help During normal programming you usually need only the parameters on the Non default screen But if you want to do some more complicated programming operations you need to change some of the parameters on the All Parameters screen An example of a complicated programming operation would be if you wanted to program only part of a device For this Session you s
45. S30D00000010AA55AA55AA55AA55E6 S70500000000FA L B L IL JL IL MSB Start Character Checksum L Data Records Byte Count Address 0093 4 Motorola data files may begin with an optional sign on record initiated by the start characters S0 or S5 Data records start with an 8 or 10 character prefix and end with a 2 character suffix Each data record begins with the start characters S1 S2 or S3 S1 if the following address field has 4 characters S2 if it has 6 characters S3 if it has 8 characters The third and fourth characters represent the byte count which expresses the number of data address and checksum bytes in the record The address of the first data byte in the record is expressed by the last 4 characters of the prefix 6 characters for addresses above hexadecimal FFFF and 8 characters for addresses above hexadecimal FFFFFF Data bytes follow each represented by 2 hexadecimal characters The number of data bytes occurring must be 3 4 or 5 less than the byte count The suffix is a 2 character checksum the one s complement in binary of the preceding bytes in the record including the byte count address and data bytes The end of file record begins with an S8 or S9 start character Following the start characters are the byte count the address and a checksum The maximum record length is 250 data bytes 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 39 Translation Formats Hewlett Packard UNIX Format Code
46. Specifies the baud rate for both the Terminal and Remote ports Press SPACE to cycle through the baud rates supported by the programmer The programmer supports the following baud rates 50 75 110 134 5 150 200 300 600 1050 1200 1800 2000 2400 4800 7200 9600 and 19 2K baud and 115 2K baud with HiTerm Not every baud rate works on one port when certain baud rates are selected for the other port If you select incompatible baud rates the programmer beeps and displays WARNING Selection not compatible with other channel If one of the rates on the left is used for either port the corresponding rate on the right does not work on the other port 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 25 Commands 4 26 50 75 150 150 200 1050 7200 75 150 1800 2000 19 2K baud 19 2K baud 50 200 1050 7200 W Parity N O E Three options are available for the parity setting N No parity O Odd parity and E Even parity Press SPACE to cycle through the three values W Data Bits 7 8 Specifies the number of data bits the programmer recognizes during serial communication Press SPACE to toggle between the two values W Stop Bits 1 2 Specifies the number of stop bits between data bytes Two stop bits are generally used for baud rates of 110 or lower Press SPACE to toggle between the two values WB Enable CTS DTR Y N Enables or disables CTS DTR hardware handshaking Press SPACE to toggle between the two values Communication
47. To check that the pins spring up to their normal upright position push a base down on the SPA pins a few times Clean all surfaces of the Base using filtered compressed air and a lint free cloth dampened with DeoxIT if needed 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 10 What To Do Next Time Use the following procedure to run subsequent sessions if you suspect the programmer was moved or if the programmer has not been used for awhile 1 Check the power cords and cables between the programmer and the connected equipment 2 If you are controlling the programmer from a PC or workstation make sure it is on and that the terminal emulation software such as TaskLink or HiTerm is running If you are controlling the programmer from a terminal make sure it is on If you are using TaskLink select VT100 on Programmer Port from the Utilities menu 3 2900 3900 users Insert the Boot Disk in the programmer disk drive 3980 users to boot from the MSM hard drive make sure the programmer disk drive is empty Insert the Base into the programmer and lock it into place Turn on the programmer Verify the terminal type when the Power on screen is displayed Install a device Select a device operation See the tutorial sessions in Chapter 3 E Id e um m If prompted remove the currently installed disk and insert the disk that is requested Using the MSM 3980 To boot from the MSM hard drive ensure that the programmer disk drive is e
48. Use TaskLink 0000 ee eee 2 2 Connect to a PC and Use HiTerm 1 ess 2 4 Connect to a Host leen 2 5 Connect to a Terminal saasaa aaa aa es 2 6 2 Insert the Boot Disk 2900 3900 sasaaa aaa aa 2 10 3 Install th Base fst lus ee Ro VO esed eR ee 2 vus ns 2 11 4 Turn On the Programmer llle 2 13 5 Check Self test Results llle 2 14 6 Power on Screens viuo rx EGER UE GR SOR Bd ee RS Re RO Rod 2 16 7 Set Up High Speed Download optional les 2 17 8 Install a device es 2 19 9 Learn about preventive maintenance eee eee 2 29 10 Learn what to do next time lees 2 31 1 Choose Your Configuration and Connect the Equipment Choose the configuration you will use to control the programmer and follow the steps in the appropriate section to connect the equipment m Connect to an IBM compatible PC Terminal emulation software controls the PC which can be also be used to store data files Taskkink USers ix Y c o XC RO CY X ReESX C Wo X 3 x S pU a 2 2 Hilerm Bsers vue Xx Rx Ede xx X eR ae moy a e CA 2 4 Connect to a Host a minicomputer such as a Sun DEC or Apollo workstation You can use the workstation to control the programmer and to store data files llle 2 5 Connect to a Terminal a stand alone terminal such as the DEC VT 100 Qume VT 101 and the Wyse WY 30 40 70 family ofterminals eee es 2 6 3980
49. also when a new device type is selected Serial Vector Test Y N When enabled this test applies each vector s input states serially from pin one and through the remaining pins This test which is a diagnostic tool designed to help debug and classify test vector failures is designed to isolate test vectors that are sequence dependent Any sequence dependent vectors found should be broken into two or more vectors so they are sequence independent The JEDEC specification for test vectors requires that test vectors be sequence independent If sequencing between pins is important the test vector should be separated into two or more vectors to make them sequence independent This test helps isolate vectors that are sequence dependent and should be expanded This switch is available only for logic devices and is disabled on powerup It returns to N when parameters are restored or when another device is selected High Speed Logic Drivers Y N When enabled this feature increases the speed of the logic transitions between O to 1 and 1 to O of the test vector input states The speed of the logic transitions is increased by driving the O and 1 levels using the high speed logic drivers instead of a current limited driver The JEDEC specification for test vector O and 1 input states defines that these inputs be current limited so that the outputs of the device under test can overdrive the O or 1 level However current limited drivers have inher
50. and return to the previous menu If you are not satisfied with your edits and want to restore the current screen press CTRL U The programmer restores the current screen of data to the state it was in after the last save Note When you exit the Edit screen or move to another block all edits are saved When you save the edited file to RAM there is no way to recall the original data file In this Session you learned how to edit a data file stored in RAM To access the programmer s built in editor press M E E from the Main Menu Then from the Edit Programmer Memory screen select R to edit RAM Once you are in the editor you can edit data in either its hex representation or its ASCII representation Press TAB to toggle between the two modes The editor defaults to overtype mode but it can also operate in insert mode Press CTRL T to toggle between the two modes After editing a page of data you can restore the page to its original condition by pressing CTRL U 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 11 Programming a Memory Device This Session shows you how to use the programmer to program a memory device Before you go through this Session complete Session 2 If you do not have an AMD 27256 the device we are going to use for this Session go to the Select Device screen and select the device you are going to program The device you select might not have the same capabilities as the AMD 27256 For example th
51. between the static sensitive device its environment and you To do this work on an antistatic workmat wear an antistatic wrist strap and connect the strap to a grounding stud on the antistatic workmat WARNING To meet safety standards the antistatic wrist strap must contain a 1M o minimum to 10M o maximum isolating resistor If possible ground the programmer to the same antistatic workmat or connect the ground connector on the back panel to a grounding stud W Do not install or remove devices from a circuit that has power or signals applied to it m Maintain the relative humidity in your work area above 40 3980 3900 2900 User Manual A 1 Performance Verification Accessing Test Points This section describes how to disassemble your programmer so you can access the test points which are located inside the programmer CAUTION Disassembling the programmer may void the service warranty Proceed at your own risk CAUTION Many of the components in the programmer are static sensitive Observe standard handling precautions at all times Follow the steps below to check the calibration of your programmer 1 Ground yourself and the programmer as described on page A 1 2 Make sure the programmer is unplugged and that the power is off 3 Position the programmer as shown in Figure A 1 4 Using a 1 Phillips screwdriver remove the two rear panel screws shown in Figure A 1 Set the screws aside Figure A 1 Removing the Rea
52. by either the L field or the K field The character L begins the L field and is followed by the decimal number of the first fuse for which this field defines a state The first fuse number is followed by a list of binary values indicating the fuse states The information in the K field is the same as that of the L field except that the information is represented by hex characters instead of binary values This allows more compact representation of the fusemap data The character K begins the K field and is followed by the decimal number of the first fuse The fuse data follow the fuse number and are represented by hex characters Each bit of each hex character represents the state of one fuse so each hex character represents four fuses The most significant bit of the first hex character following the fuse number corresponds to the state of that fuse number The next most significant bit corresponds to the state of the next fuse number etc The least significant bit of the first hex character corresponds to the state of the fuse at the location specified by the fuse number plus three The K field supports download operations only The K field is not part of the JEDEC standard but is supported by Data I O for fast data transfer The L and K fields can be any length desired and any number of L or K fields can be specified If the state of a fuse is specified more than once the last state specified replaces all previous ones for that fuse The F fiel
53. bytes in the record The address of the first data byte in the record is expressed by the last 4 characters of the prefix 6 characters for addresses above hexadecimal FFFF Data bytes follow each represented by 2 hexadecimal characters The number of data bytes occurring must be 3 or 4 less than the byte count The suffix is a 2 character checksum the one s complement in binary of the preceding bytes in the record including the byte count address and data bytes The end of file record begins with an S9 start character Following the start characters are the byte count the address and a checksum The maximum record length is 250 data bytes 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Intel MCS 86 Hexadecimal Object Code 88 The Intel 16 bit Hexadecimal Object file record format has a 9 character 4 field prefix that defines the start of record byte count load address and record type and a 2 character checksum suffix Figure 5 15 shows a sample record of this format Figure 5 15 Intel MCS 86 Hex Object example Address r Offset Address Start Character pi Checksum r Checksum 020000020000FC _ Extended Record M 10000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF00 10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO 10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO Data 10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDO Records 10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCO 0 0 000 00 1EF End of
54. compared to a laser trimmed voltage reference Data I O recommends that you cycle power AND run a complete self test cycle at least once a day To ensure that your programmer continues to meet product performance specifications Data I O recommends that you return it to an authorized Data I O Service Center every twelve months for a complete performance evaluation 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 1 7 Introduction Options The following items are designed to complement the 2900 3900 and 3980 Programming Systems For more information or to order an item contact Data I O Customer Support as listed in the Preface Note Unless otherwise specified all options listed are available for all three programmers Keep Current Subscription Service Data I O offers a one year Keep Current Subscription Service to keep your programmer up to date with the latest features and new device support This subscription also incorporates device manufacturer recommended algorithm changes to existing device support to maintain optimum yields throughput and long term device reliability As a Keep Current subscriber you have immediate access to new and updated programming algorithms using the World Wide Web or Keep Current Express Bulletin Board Service before the algorithms are available in the update kit For more information see Appendix C TaskLink TaskLink Software which runs on an IBM compatible PC allows you to control your programmer fr
55. data into RAM For more information see page 4 8 Verify Logic Device Main Menu Verify Device Verify Logic Device To verify a logic device follow these steps 1 2 Select and socket a logic device Select Verify Device from the Main Menu The Verify Logic Device screen is displayed Specify the parameters you want then press ENTER to begin verifying When the verify operation is complete the programmer displays the following message OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxx The following parameters are available W Logic Verification A F V Specifies the type of logic verification to perform Press SPACE to step through the following three choices All A directs the programmer to perform both fuse verification and vector verification This setting is the default Fuse Verification F checks the fuse pattern programmed into the device with the pattern in the programmer s memory Vector Verification V functionally tests the device using structured test vectors stored in memory The programmer does not support vector testing for logic devices with more than 44 pins 2900 or 84 pins 3900 If you try to perform a vector test on a device with more than 44 2900 or 84 3900 pins the following message is displayed OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck hhhhhhhh Vector test not supported Verify Passes 0 1 2 Selects the number of times to test the device O do not to test the device 1 test the device once at
56. device and program that device data into a target device quickly and easily Note The manufacturer and device name must be the same for both the master and the target devices Before you use Quick Copy you must first select a device To use the Quick Copy command follow these steps 1 Select the device containing the data you are going to load see page 4 5 2 Select the Quick Copy command by pressing Q from the Main Menu The dialog window displays the Quick Copy screen The message bar displays Insert master device Hit return 3 Insert the master device and lock it into place 4 Press ENTER to load the master data into RAM When the data is loaded OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxxxxxx Hit return appears 5 Remove the master device then press ENTER The programmer displays Insert blank device Hit return 6 Insert the device to be programmed target device and lock it into place 7 Press ENTER to program the device 8 When the programming operation is complete the programmer displays OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxxxxxx Hit return 9 Remove the device The Quick Copy operation is complete 10 To program another device return to step 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 7 Commands Load Device The Load Device command allows you to copy data from a master device into RAM Depending on whether you select a logic or memory device either the Load Logic Device screen or the Load Memory Device screen will appear w
57. disk 3 28 files can be displayed at one time If your disk has more than 28 files they are displayed on the next page s Press CTRL N to advance to the next page of files Load File More Commands File Operations Load File This command loads a RAM Image Binary file from disk into RAM Do not use this command to load files from a PC or from a file server See the Download Data command for information on transferring files to the programmer from a PC or from a file server Note If your files contain data formatted in other than RAM Image Binary such as Intel Hex Format 836 use the Transfer Data Input From Disk command 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 53 Commands Save File 4 54 To load a file into the programmer s RAM follow these steps 1 2 Insert the disk containing the file you want to load into the disk drive When you select the Load File command the dialog window displays a directory of the disk in the disk drive If you do not see your file press F2 to return to the File Operations menu Insert the disk containing your file into the drive and return to the beginning of this step 28 files can be displayed at one time Press CTRL N to advance to the next page of files Specify the parameters described below Be sure to include a filename Press ENTER to begin loading Once the disk file is in RAM you may perform several operations on the file such as edit or program device See the appropriate sec
58. displayed in uppercase letters Below the menu name the available commands are displayed in upper and lowercase characters Communications Parameters The various settings that determine the I O characteristics of your equipment such as baud rate stop bits data bits and handshaking Compare Electronic ID A command that compares the electronic signature of the socketed device against the electronic signature specified in the currently selected algorithm Compensated Vector Test A device test that enables load compensation on PLD output pins under test during vector testing This may eliminate structured test errors when testing PLDs sensitive to output loading where many of the devices register transitions simultaneously Computer Remote Control CRC A command set that may be used to operate a programmer remotely These commands are usually the basis for external programmer drivers which may operate a programmer from a PC or other host See also Remote Mode Context sensitive Help Information that changes depending on the screen position With the programmer every time you move the cursor to a different field the information on the online help screen changes Continuity Check A device check that tests for open device pins before performing a device operation CRC An acronym for Computer Remote Control See also Remote Mode D 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Cross Programming A programming operation that allows a single gen
59. displays may look different if you are using a device other than an AMD 27256 Verify the Device Review 3 30 You are ready to verify the data programmed into the device To begin the verify press ENTER If the verify operation completes successfully the following message is displayed in the message bar OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxx represents is the 8 digit 4 digit for a logic device sumcheck of the data in the device When you select Verify Device from the Main Menu you see either the Non default screen or the All Parameters screen Press F4 to toggle between the two parameter entry screens After you enter the Verify parameters press ENTER to begin the verify operation When the programmer is finished verifying it displays the sumcheck of the data in the device 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 Commands This chapter describes the commands accessible from the programmer s menus The menu and command structure is shown in the Command Tree on page 4 2 Each command description includes the path to that command The commands are described on the following pages The Command Tree also shows page numbers Overwriting User RAM leer has 4 1 Factory Default Settings 0 000 ee 4 3 Select Device es 4 5 Cross Programming cres ea eea aie a ae R E o ORA E ae a S 4 6 Quick COPY s eae RU Gy a wae a a eee we Gems 4 7 Lodd DEVICES 2 018 aa a A Re A a e a a ea 4 8 Program De
60. during a load program or verify operation The contents of user RAM are not altered Swapping bytes is useful when you manipulate 16 and 32 bit data for a target system with a different architecture than the original For example Motorola 16 bit data files store the Most Significant Bytes MSB at even byte locations and Motorola 32 bit data files store the significant bytes in descending order with the MSB in every first byte byte 0 and the least significant in every fourth byte byte 3 Intel 16 bit data files store the MSB at odd byte locations and Intel 32 bit data files store MSB in ascending order with the most significant in the fourth byte 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 23 Commands 4 24 The default for this parameter is N which means the programmer maintains its RAM data and file data with the convention that the MSB of a 16 bit device resides in the odd byte of memory and the MSB of a 32 bit word resides in the first of each four bytes of memory When set to Y for a 16 bit device data is loaded programmed verified into user memory with the MSB at even addresses For 32 bit devices the significant bytes are placed in ascending order with the MSB placed in user memory in the fourth of each four bytes the fourth byte is swapped with the first byte and the third byte is swapped with the second byte Continuity Check Y N Checks for open device pins before programming a device This parameter is enabled by default and
61. enter the file description press ENTER The programmer displays Parameter Entered 5 To save the current system configuration to a configuration file press ENTER While the programmer is saving the configuration the action symbol rotates 6 When done the programmer displays System parameters saved Note If a device was selected it is saved as part of the configuration file Terminal Type More Commands Configure System Terminal Type Terminal Selection screen This command changes the current and default terminal types To change the current or default terminal type follow these steps 1 Configure your terminal to match one of the following terminal types If your terminal is not on the list refer to the manual supplied with the terminal to determine if it can emulate one of those on the list W ANSI 3 64 compatible terminals W DEC VT 100 compatible terminals m Qume QVT 101 compatible terminals m TELEVIDEO TVI 910 compatible terminals m Wyse WY 30 compatible terminal 2 Select the Serial I O Parameters screen from the More Commands Configure System Edit Serial I O menu and make note of the settings of the port you want to connect the new terminal to If the terminal s communications protocol does not match the port s change the settings of the new terminal to match the port s settings 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 31 Commands 3 Select the More Commands Configure System Terminal Type command The programmer displa
62. example with UNIX you would have a download command such as cat 27128 hex Transmit Pacing Transmit pacing provides a time delay between characters sent to the host by the programmer which affects data uploaded from the programmer as well as host commands sent by the programmer To eliminate errors during upload operations to a host use the transmit pacing delay feature which provides a character by character delay to prevent data overrun on the host This type of condition may exist even though hardware and or software handshaking is used on the host and the programmer This condition is most likely to occur on hosts that cannot accept incoming data fast enough at high baud rates Since the host may not explicitly report any error to determine if errors are occurring during an upload process transfer data to the host using the upload function with an I O format selected that uses checksums such as Format 87 Note the checksum reported by the programmer when the transfer is complete then transfer the same data back to the programmer as the programmer performs the compare data function Note the checksums If they don t match or if an error occurs use a transmit pacing delay 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 29 Commands Typical delay values are shown in the following table The transmit pacing value is specified in tenths of milliseconds delay For example a value of 12 represents 1 2 milliseconds delay The minimum delay possible ot
63. freon based products to clean the pad These substances will cause premature deterioration of the pad material Replacement Pad Kits To minimize downtime the Base was designed to allow you to replace pads quickly and easily Contact Customer Support to order replacement pad kits 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 29 SPA Block and Base The following messages during device operations could indicate dirt in the SPA block or Base adapter ID Error Continuity Error Base Adapter not Installed Device Insertion Error Overcurrent Error Base Adapter Relay Failure Follow these guidelines to prevent the accumulation of dirt When the programmer is not in use keep the SPA block covered with a Base When Bases are not in use store them in an uncontaminated area to keep them clean to prevent contamination of the SPA block Whenever you remove or replace a Base clean the SPA block with a brush At least once a week inspect the SPA block and Base for contamination of dirt or oil Clean them as described below Cleaning Procedure 1 Blow filtered compressed air across the SPA block see Figure 2 21 Figure 2 21 SPA Block and Base 2 30 BASE SPA BLOCK 2803 2 Mildly dampen a small section of a lint free cloth with a DeoxIT pen Data I O P N 570 5500 901 and gently rub the dampened cloth across all the pins on the SPA block Using a clean section of the lint free cloth gently wipe the surface again
64. handle toward the disk drive opening see Figure 2 5 Figure 2 5 Base Opening BASE OPENING Mi HANDLE e dnm DISK DRIVE 0995 1 CAUTION To prevent damage to the programmer do not poke a foreign object into the Base opening 2 Align the notches and holes on the Base with the notches and guide pins in the opening then insert the Base into the opening see Figure 2 6 which shows a DIP Base as an example Figure 2 6 Aligning the Base GUIDE PIN 1 of 4 0996 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 11 3 Squeeze the handles together to lock the Base in place CAUTION Do not use excessive force when compressing the handles Squeezing too hard on the handles could damage the programmer To remove a Base follow the steps below 1 Using even pressure move the handles apart by pushing the Base handle with your thumbs and the sliding handle with your forefingers see Figure 2 7 CAUTION Be sure to apply even pressure as you move the handles apart If you exert uneven pressure on the handles you could damage the sliding handle or cause a jam in the tracks Apply an even force to realign the handles 2 Lift the Base up and out of the programmer and store it in a safe place Figure 2 7 Removing a Base WITH HANDLES APART LIFT BASE OUT yo BASE 7 imd TOP VIEW 2 0997 2 2 12 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 Turn On the Programmer To turn on the programmer foll
65. hex PUNCH OFF character is a CTRL T or 14 hex General Notes Compatibility When translating data you may use any remote source that produces formats compatible with the descriptions listed in this section Formats with Limited Address Fields Some formats are not defined for use with address fields greater than 64K If you transfer a block greater than 64K the address fields that would be greater than 64K may wrap around and overwrite data transferred in previous data records Formats 70 through 86 and 90 may exhibit this characteristic Hardware Handshaking If compatible with the host interface hardware handshaking may be used by connecting the appropriate lines at the serial port interface Hardware handshake CTS DTR is enabled as the default If those signals aren t connected however the programming electronics communicates using software handshake XON XOFF The programmer always uses software handshake regardless of whether hardware handshake is enabled 5 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Leader Trailer During output of all formats except 89 HP 64000 a 50 character leader precedes the formatted data and a 50 character trailer follows This leader trailer consists of null characters If null count is set to FF hex the leader trailer is skipped To set the null count go to More Commands Configure Edit Communication Parameters or use the U command when using CRC Note Formats 10 11 and 89 do
66. in hex of the data block to move The programmer displays a warning message if the sum of the Block Size and either the From Memory or the To Memory Address values exceeds user memory size Fill Memory More Commands Edit Data Fill Memory The Fill Memory command fills a specified range with a 2 digit hex value To fill a block of memory follow these steps 1 Specify the parameters described below 2 Press ENTER to begin the Fill function The programmer displays Done when the operation is completed The parameters are described below m Memory Begin Address The memory address at which the fill operation begins Enter any 1 to 6 digit hex address The address cannot exceed the user RAM size m Block Size The number of bytes in hex that are filled Move the cursor to the block size window and enter the block size from 1 to 6 hex digits The block size added to the memory address cannot exceed the user memory size m Fill Variable The 2 digit hex data variable used to fill the specified block Enter a value between 00 and FF Swap Data More Commands Edit Memory Swap Data The Swap Data command performs either a byte swap or a nibble swap on the data in a specified block of User RAM To swap a block of memory follow these steps 1 Specify the parameters described below 2 Press ENTER to begin the Swap function The programmer displays Done when the swap is complete 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands
67. learn about then press either F3 or The Help screen is divided into four sections the key listing general Help context sensitive specific Help and the reminder bar A sample Help screen is shown in Figure 3 4 Figure 3 4 Areas of the Help Screen Key Listing General Help 34 Context sensitive Help HELP SCREEN System commands ENTER Execute command CTRL Z Abort ongoing operation Paging commands Misc commands CTRL P Display previous page ESC CTRL U Restart UTRL R Repaint current screen ESC CTRL T Enter exit transparent mode CTRL N Display next page ESC CTRL J Start Stop job recording This is the Main menu From this menu the Select Device Quick Copy Load Device Program Device Verify Device and More Commands menus can be selected To display a menu type the first letter of the desired menu or use To obtain move the cursor to the desired item the arrou keys to highlight the desired item and then press Enter additional information on other functions and press F3 The Select Device command allows you to select the manufacturer and part number for the device you want to program You must select a device prior to performing any Load Program or Verify operation A device type must also be selected before downloading a JEDEC file F1 Main menu FZ Prev menu Reminder Bar 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 7 Getting Started Key Listing The key listing provides
68. link cycles Notes Field Number of bits per word Number of control words at the end of each K field Number of Fuses in Device of K fields Number of macro cells in the data file Number of Device Package Pins Number of Hex ASCII words in each K field and each control word Maximum Number of Test Vectors Signature Analysis reserved for future use SpDE Checksum Signature Analysis reserved for future use Test Vectors reserved for future use Default Test Conditions reserved for future use End of Data ASCII Ctrl C 0x03 hex These fields are already defined as part of the JEDEC standard and will not be defined in this section 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 13 Translation Formats ASCII Octal and Hex Formats Codes 30 37 and 50 58 Each of these formats has a start and end code and similar address and checksum specifications Figure 5 6 illustrates 4 data bytes coded in each of the 9 ASCII Octal and Hexadecimal formats Data in these formats is organized into sequential bytes separated by the execute character space percent apostrophe or comma Characters immediately preceding the execute character are interpreted as data ASCII Octal and Hex formats can express 8 bit data by 3 octal or 2 hexadecimal characters Line feeds carriage returns and other characters may be included in the data stream as long as a data byte directly precedes each execute character Figure 5 6 ASCII Octal and Hex Formats example
69. load address x 2 I O address offset begin address During upload or output to disk operations the load address sent with each data record is calculated in the following manner Load address I O address offset 2 The Memory begin address I O address offset and User data size parameters represent bytes and must be even values for this format The upload record size must also be even for this format default is 16 Note If the data will be programmed into a 16 bit device to be used in a TMS320 processor based system the odd even byte swap switch must be enabled 5 Level BNPF Format Codes 08 or 09 Except for the start and end codes the same character set and specifications are used for the ASCII BNPF and 5 level BNPF formats Data for input to the programmer is punched on 5 hole Telex paper tapes to be read by any paper tape reader that has an adjustable tape guide The reader reads the tape as it would an 8 level tape recording the 5 holes that are on the tape as 5 bits of data The 3 most significant bits are recorded as if they were holes on an 8 level tape Tape generated from a telex machine using this format can be input directly to a serial paper tape reader interfaced to the programmer The programmer s software converts the resulting 8 bit codes into valid data for entry in RAM The start code for the format is a left parenthesis Figs K on a telex machine and the end code is a right parenthesis Figs L on a te
70. match the data bus word width in the target system for the device m Next Device Type the number next device in the set to check for illegal bits B Next Operation Begins At This field is read only and cannot be altered It appears only to inform you where at what hex address the next operation begins Blank Check More Commands Device Check Blank Check The Blank Check command checks a device to ensure that it is blank To blank check a device follow these steps 1 Select and socket a device 2 Press ENTER The programmer checks the device and responds with OPERATION FAILED Non blank device if the device is non blank or OPERATION COMPLETE if the device is blank Electronic Erase 4 42 More Commands Device Check Electronic Erase This command bulk erases an electronically erasable device It is not necessary to use this command for most electronically erasable devices since Electronic Erase is part of the normal programming cycle Before programming an electronically erasable device the programmer checks the device and displays a warning if the device if non blank If you enable the erasing of the device the programmer erases the device before programming the device 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands To erase a device follow these steps 1 2 Select and socket an electronically erasable device Press ENTER to erase the device When finished Done is displayed in the message bar If you tried to e
71. of Nulls Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Number of Vectors Output Logic Data 4 68 O Odd Even Byte Swap default setting 4 4 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Load Memory Device 4 10 Program Memory Device 4 14 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Online Help accessing 3 7 for system messages 3 8 general Help 3 8 key listing 3 8 Options 1 8 Output Filename Output to Disk 4 67 Output Logic Data 4 68 Output Memory Data 4 67 Output Record Size Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Output to Disk 4 66 P Package contents 1 2 Parameters entering 3 16 powerup defaults 4 3 setting 3 16 Parity Edit Serial Port Configuration 4 26 Part Number default setting 4 4 Partial or no transfer performed error message 6 19 PC disks 1 5 PC connecting to 2 2 Performance verification 1 7 A 1 Peripherals configuring 2 5 2 7 Physical specifications 1 6 Index 6 Pin 1 locating on QFP devices 2 27 on TSOP devices 2 26 Pin 1 locating on SDIP devices 2 28 SOIC devices 2 27 Power cord connecting 2 13 Power LED 1 3 Power On CRC Mode Edit Interface Parameters 4 30 Power On CRC mode default setting 4 4 Power requirements 1 6 Power switch 1 4 Powering up 2 13 2 31 Power on screen 2 16 Powerup LEDs 2 14 self test 2 14 Powerup defaults 2 18 changing 2 18 high speed download 2 18 restoring factory settings 4 19 Powerup User RAM Test Interface Parameters 4 30 PPI adapter 2 24 base 1
72. of an approval varies by device manufacturer but an approval usually indicates both yield and waveform analysis AutoBaud A special feature on the programmer that senses the baud rate of equipment connected to the programmer and sets the programmer s baud rate to match the equipment s baud rate AutoBaud is designed for equipment that cannot support baud rates as high as 9600 baud such as 1200 2400 baud modems Base The interface between the programmer and the device The Base routes the signals between the device and the Universal Pin Drivers inside the programmer Baud Rate A measure of data flow The number of signal elements per second based on the duration of the shortest element When each element carries one bit the baud rate is numerically equal to bits per second 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 1 BGA An acronym for Ball Grid Array a type of device package Usually a square device with one side populated with small solder balls as leads Blank Check A device check that checks a device for programmed bits If no programmed bits are found the device is considered blank Block Size The hexadecimal number of bytes to be transferred in a data transfer The beginning of the block is defined by a begin address The end of the block is the sum of the block size and the begin address minus one Byte Swap See Odd Even Byte Swap Command Window The left side of the screen At the top of the window is the menu name
73. online device specific information for the selected device is displayed If the information takes up more than one screen press CTRL N to view the next screen or CTRL P to view the previous screen To exit the screen press F1 or F2 If the Display Device Footnotes parameter in the More commands Configure system Edit Programming screen is set to N no device specific information is displayed If there is online device specific information for the selected device Hit F3 or to view device specific message is displayed To view the online information press F3 or The screen clears and the programmer displays the device specific information Note If only the footnote number appears in the message bar make sure the correct disk is inserted into the programmer s drive Footnote device specific information is also included in the Device List The device manufacturer and part number appears in the status window and the programmer displays only screens related to the type of device you selected For example if you choose a logic device you will see only screens that are required to load program edit and verify a logic device Also some devices support special functions such as the Program Signature and XNOR table If the device you select supports a particular function parameter entry fields associated with that function are displayed Quick Copy Main Menu Quick Copy The Quick Copy command allows you to load data from a master
74. or a termination block is sent Both data and termination blocks have a 6 character header and a 2 to 17 character address Character s Value decimal Character s Value decimal 0 9 0 9 period 38 A Z 10 35 underline 39 36 a z 40 65 37 The load address determines where the object code will be located This is a variable length number that may contain up to 17 characters The first number determines the address length with a zero signifying a length of 16 The remaining characters of the data record contain the object code 2 characters per byte When you copy data to the port or to RAM set the high order address if the low order is not at the default value 5 38 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Motorola 32 Bit Format Code 95 Figure 5 21 The Motorola 32 bit format closely resembles the Motorola EXORmacs format the main difference being the addition of the S3 and S7 start characters The S3 character is used to begin a record containing a 4 byte address The S7 character is a termination record for a block of S3 records The address field for an S7 record may optionally contain the 4 byte instruction address that identifies where control is to be passed and is ignored by the programmer Figure 5 21 shows a sample of the Motorola 32 bit format Motorola S3 Format example S00B00004441544120492F4FF3 Optional Sign On Record S31500000000AA55AA55AA5 5AA55AA5 5AA5 5AA55SAA55F2
75. overcurrent or programming error which may damage the devices 6 12 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages Device Over current Fault Probable Cause Solution Improper device selected Make sure the device selection matches the manufacturer and part number of your device as precisely as possible If it doesn t select the proper characteristics and perform the operation again Note Choosing a wrong manufacturer and or part number via the Select device option from the Main Menu causes the programmer to expect an electronic ID different from your device s ID Faulty device s Load the suspect device Main Menu Load If an overcurrent error occurs load new devices If other devices load with no errors a single device may be faulty If no errors occur during load operation try to program another device Main Menu Program Device If other devices program without error a single device may be faulty If other devices also produce overcurrent errors during load or program operations check the date code If failures occur only on devices with a particular date code while other parts are programmed or loaded successfully the problem is probably device related Note If the problem appears to be device related you may wish to notify the device manufacturer Possible bug in software associated with device tests If other devices produce overcurrent errors during load and program operations disable the Continuity ch
76. polarity For example the programmer returns an illegal bit error in the following situation data in RAM indicates a specific bit should be in an unprogrammed state while the corresponding bit in the device is in a programmed state This parameter is enabled by default m Blank Check Y N Enables or disables the blank check test A Blank Check test checks a device for programmed bits This parameter defaults to Y which enables the test m Compare Elec ID Y N Compares the electronic ID of the device against the electronic ID of the selected algorithm m Enable Yield Tally Y N When enabled directs the programmer to keep a running tally of the programming yields for the last sixteen types of devices programmed These totals show how many devices passed and failed and what specific errors if any have occurred This parameter defaults to N which disables the test A more complete description of this feature can be found in the Yield Tally section of this chapter WB Program Security Fuse Y N Enables or disables the programming of the security fuse To program the security fuse set this parameter to Y and set the Security Fuse Data parameter to 1 This parameter defaults to N which disables programming of the security fuse W Erase EE Device Y N Bulk erases the electronically erasable devices before the programmer attempts to program them B Odd Even Byte Swap Y N When enabled swaps data at memory address locations
77. programmer 0544 2 About Transparent Mode Transparent mode allows the programmer to be connected inline between your terminal and host computer eliminating the need for a switch box or a second link to the host and enabling you to download directly from the host to the programmer The host could be a networked file server such as a VAX or a Sun When set up properly the terminal connected to the programmer can control both the programmer and the remote host In Transparent mode the programmer passes all characters through its Terminal and Remote ports as if it weren t there The two serial ports on the programmer can even operate at different baud rates While operating the programmer from the terminal press Esc CTRL T to toggle the programmer between terminal mode and transparent mode The programmer remains in transparent mode until it receives another Esc CTRL T command which switches it back to terminal mode Preparing the File 3 22 Using your development tools create a small sample data file For the rest of this Session the sample data file will be referred to as sample dat If you give your sample data file a different name substitute that name where you see sample dat Also the rest of this Session assumes that your sample data file is stored in the Intel Intellec 8 MDS data translation format If your data file is in a different translation format use the Format Select command to select that format See
78. records consist of a header 8 bytes and the data bytes The first 2 bytes of the header indicate the size of the data record including the header minus one If the number of data bytes in the data record not including the header is odd one extra byte will be added to the data record to ensure that an even number of data bytes exist in the data record The maximum value for this field is OOFF hex The next two bytes indicate the number of actual data bytes in the record not including the header bytes and the extra byte if present The maximum value for this field is OOFA hex The 4 bytes that follow represent the destination address for the data in this record The rest of the bytes in the record are the data bytes This format has no end of file identifier 5 40 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats The record length during upload is not affected by the upload record size parameter in the Configure Edit Communication screen It is automatically set to transfer records using the maximum size 250 bytes except for the last record The size of the last record will be set according to the remaining number of data bytes Figure 5 22 Hewlett Packard 64000 Unix Format Processor Information Record Byte Count 7 Data Width Transfer n ad Address MS Number of bytes in Data Bus Transfer the following record Header Width Address LS including header m 80 04 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Load Ad
79. remote computer send the Z ENTER command If you exit remote mode using the Z ENTER command the programmer s parameters are set to what they were before you entered remote mode If you exit using CTRL Z the programmer s parameters are NOT changed Suspending CRC Mode CRC Mode can be suspended temporarily to allow you to go into terminal mode to view or change parameter settings or the device data in memory If the User Menu Port is set to T Terminal port press CTRL Z to suspend CRC Mode If you are controlling the programmer from the Remote port send the 49 command 3980 3900 2900 User Manual B 3 Computer Remote Control Halting CRC Operations To halt any command or any ongoing CRC operation use one of the following commands from the Remote port Neither of the following two commands requires an ENTER Both commands are immediate and both terminate any preceding command operation ASCII Hex Command Code Description Esc 1B Causes the programmer to unconditionally halt all operations except a binary transfer BREAK n a Causes the programmer to unconditionally halt any operation in progress This includes all data communications transfers The data line must be held in the spacing condition for 110 ms to 700 ms CRC Default Settings When CRC mode is entered certain defaults are set prior to the programmer s accepting any commands The default settings are outlined below Description Setting Upload download por
80. select the Edit Data command the programmer displays a menu corresponding to the type of device that is currently selected There are separate editors for memory and logic devices For logic devices there is a fuse map and test vector editor For memory devices there is a memory editor Edit Logic Menu The Edit Logic menu appears if you selected a logic device This menu contains the Edit Logic Vector Edit Fill Fuse Map and Clear Vectors commands Edit Fuse Map More Commands Edit Data Edit Logic Edit Fuse Map The Edit Fuse Map is the data editor for logic devices To edit fuse data follow these steps 1 Enter the parameters described below then press ENTER The screen displays the fuse map data 2 If the data source does not have proper fuse data a message indicates that the file is not initialized Press C to initialize the fuse map to an unprogrammed blank state 3 You can enter either data or commands as you edit To edit the fuse map data move the cursor to the fuse you want to change Press SPACE to toggle the fuse to the desired state The fuse editor commands are described below Note In general any paging command or an exit command causes all currently displayed data to be written to the data source The options and commands for the editor are described below WB Source R D Specifies the source of the data to be edited Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D disk WB Filename Specifies the n
81. supported by the selected device see Figure 3 22 When you perform more complicated operations such as verifying only part of the device you will change some of the parameters on this screen 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 29 Getting Started To switch between the two screens press F4 For this Session you will be using the Non default screen Figure 3 22 Verify Memory Device Screen All Parameters FILENAME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REU X XX YYY Z Z MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 170 FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS MAIN MENU UERIFY MEMORY DEUICE Call parameters Select device Source CRAM Set auto increment IN Quick copy Compare elec ID M Data word width Load device Next device Program device Total set size User data size 82808 Next operation begins at More commands Memory begin address Device begin address Ooo ia mu Verify passes 1 2 Device block size 80008 Return Execute F4 Select mode options Fi Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or 7 Help If you just completed Session 11 Program a Memory Device you probably do not need to set any parameters Your parameters should match those in Figure 3 21 User data size defaults to the size of the selected device but if you already performed an operation on the device as you did in this Session the programmer sets this value along with Block Size and Begin Address to the parameters specified in the previous device operation Note Remember that the
82. the correct pins The clock signal should read as follows Minimum Nominal Maximum 7 999 MHz 8 000 MHz 8 001 MHz Checking the Reference Voltages 3 Check the 10 voltage reference by placing one probe of your digital multimeter on pin 78 10V of the 78 pin connector Place the other probe on pin 1 ground Both pin locations are shown Figure A 4 WARNING Make sure the probes are on the correct connector pins 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Performance Verification The 10V signal should read as follows Minimum Nominal Maximum 9 990V 10 000V 10 010V 4 Check the 15 volt supply by placing one probe of your digital multimeter on pin 24 15V of the 78 pin connector Place the other probe on pin 1 ground Both pin locations are shown in Figure A 4 WARNING Make sure the probes are on the correct connector pins The 15V signal should read as follows Minimum Nominal Maximum 14 25V 15 00V 15 75V You are now finished checking the calibration of your programmer If the reference voltages and master clock match the listed specifications your programmer is operating within factory specifications Reassembling the Programmer Follow the steps below to reassemble your programmer 1 Set the top cover back onto the programmer 2 Using a 1 Phillips screwdriver replace the two or three screws you removed from the rear panel in step 4 See Figure A 1 for the location of the screw holes 3 Using
83. the data A complete listing of the formats is given in the Translation Formats chapter of this manual I O Address Offset Enter the desired beginning address of the disk file This field appears only if a non JEDEC format has been selected The programmer adds this value to the address of the data in memory relative to the Memory Begin Address of 0 and outputs the sum as the I O address Entering FFFFFFFF sets the I O Address Offset to 0 Memory Begin Address Specifies the first address in hex from which the first byte of data is retrieved to write to the disk output file If the source is RAM it is a beginning RAM address If the source is Disk it is a beginning disk file address The default address is O This field appears only if a non JEDEC format has been selected User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block to be output with translation to the output file from the source Enter the number of bytes to output Entering zero sets User Data Size to the total number of hex bytes in the programmer User RAM or the size of the source disk file if disk is used as source This field appears only if a non JEDEC format has been selected Serial Output More Commands Transfer Data Serial Output Use the Serial Output command to send data from the programmer to a serial device such as a printer Use this command to obtain a quick copy of programming or other device related data Serial Output does
84. the device manufacturer s nominal Vcc 2 verify the device at the device manufacturer s recommended high and low Vcc levels This setting is the default 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 15 Commands Verify Memory Device Main Menu Verify Device Verify Memory Device To verify a memory device follow these steps 1 2 Select and socket a memory device Select Verify Device from the Main Menu The Verify Memory Device screen is displayed Specify the parameters you want then press ENTER to begin verifying When the verify operation is complete the programmer displays the following message OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxxxxxx The following parameters can be specified in the Verify Memory Device screen Data Word Width Sets the word width of the data to be verified For 8 bit or larger devices the minimum word width is equal to the device word width and the maximum is 64 For 4 bit devices your word width choices are 4 8 16 and 32 This value should match the data bus word width in the target system for the device being programmed Next Device Designates the next device in the set For example if you are using 8 bit devices and have specified a word width of 16 bits on the Verify Memory Device screen then two devices are required to verify each 16 bit word Typing 1 for the next set member directs the programmer to verify the first device in the set with even numbered addresses of the memory block Typing
85. the disk Keep Current and specify the version number to avoid mismatched software version numbers if you use the disk again You can also create these files in a sub directory and transfer the files to a disk using your programmer in terminal mode Use the More Commands Transfer Download screen select format 16 Absolute Binary and select Disk as the destination 5 Use Algorithm C 4 Before you use a Keep Current algorithm determine whether or not it appears on the programmer s standard device list and follow the appropriate directions W On Standard List If the algorithm is listed in the standard device list in terminal mode use More Commands Configure System Keep Current Replace Restore to add the Keep Current algorithm to the device list ensuring that the latest algorithm is available to all programmer users Use this algorithm as you do a regular algorithm Refer to your programmer User Manual for instructions mW Not on Standard List If the algorithm is not listed in the standard device list in terminal mode use Select Device 1 Keep Current The algorithm can be selected from the Select Device menu but it cannot be added to the device list Use this algorithm as you do a regular algorithm Refer to your programmer User Manual for instructions Sample Keep Current Scenario The following example illustrates a typical Keep Current scenario 1 In May you update your system software to version X 4 At the same time
86. the first data byte The address is followed by a byte count which represents the number of data bytes in the record and by a checksum of the address and byte count Data bytes follow represented by pairs of hexadecimal characters Succeeding the data bytes is their checksum an 8 bit sum modulo 256 of the 4 bit hexadecimal values of the digits making up the data bytes All records are followed by a carriage return Tektronix Hex Format example Start Character Address Field Inm l 00001001FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE0O 00101002FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO 00201003FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO Data 00301004FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO Records 00401005FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO 00000000 End of File Record ae l IL Checksum of Transfer Address Checksum of Address Data Bytes and Byte Count Byte Count 00 in End of File Record LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return line feeds and nulls determined by null count 0085 3 Data are output from the programmer starting at the first RAM address and continuing until the number of bytes in the specified block has been transmitted The programmer divides output data into records prefaced by a start character and an address field for the first byte in the record The end of file record consists of a start character slash followed by the transfer address the byte count equal to 00 an
87. the vector highlighted by the cursor Exits vector editor and returns to the previous screen More Commands Edit Data Fill Fuse Map This command enables you to fill the fuse map with a variable which may be useful if you have loaded a fuse map into memory and you want to clear the fuse map from memory You can also automatically perform this operation as part of a download operation by either using the F field in a JEDEC file or by enabling the Fill Memory option on the Communication Parameters screen To fill the fuse map with a variable follow these steps 1 Enter the desired one digit value 0 or 1 in the Fill Variable field Press SPACE to toggle the variable between 1 and 0 O represents an unprogrammed state while 1 represents a programmed state 2 When the desired fill variable is displayed press ENTER The programmer fills the fuse map with the specified variable When done the programmer displays Done in the message bar Clear Vectors More Commands Edit Data Clear Vectors This command enables you to clear the current test vectors from memory To clear vectors press ENTER Note Only vectors in programmer RAM are cleared This command cannot be used to clear vectors stored on a disk 4 48 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Edit Memory Menu The Edit Memory menu appears if you have selected a memory device This menu contains the Edit Memory Complement Data Copy Fill Memory and Swap Memory
88. to FFFFFFFF To load your file absolutely set the I O Addr Offset to 0 the data is stored at the addresses specified in the data file 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands mE I O Timeout Limits the time 0 to 99 seconds the programmer waits for data transfer to begin O disables the timeout Use the 0 setting only for data formats that use a start code and end code These formats which include codes 5 6 7 9 11 13 16 and 96 need the timeout enabled in order to terminate a normal data transfer WB Upload Wait Sets the period that the programmer waits before it begins sending data to the host computer after the host upload command is sent The range of this parameter is 0 to 99 seconds B Transmit Pacing Specifies the time delay to insert between characters transmitted to a host during an upload See the note about transmit pacing at the end of this section for more information m Download Echoing Y N Displays the data being downloaded which may slow down the process of receiving data and is not recommended for high baud rates such as 9600 and above Download echoing may not be used with the binary formats Output Record Size Specifies the number of data bytes contained in each data record during upload The range of this parameter is 0 to 256 bytes Some formats have fixed record lengths for which this parameter does not apply m Number Of Nulls Sets the number of null characters sent between each record in a data f
89. to transmit data Used for hardware handshaking A low inhibits data transmission from the programmer 21 25 No connection If these lines are not connected the programmer will consider them high and will function normally 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 Insert Boot Disk in Programmer 2900 3900 Insert the Boot Disk into the programmer disk drive as described below 1 Make sure both the Boot disk and the Algorithm System disk are write enabled see Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Write enabled Disk BACK OF DISK WRITE ENABLED POSITION 1374 3 2 Insert the Boot Disk into the programmer disk drive see Figure 2 4 so that the arrow molded into the plastic case is on the top of the disk and points toward the programmer Push the disk straight into the drive until the disk drops down and the eject button pops out Figure 2 4 Inserting the Boot Disk 2900 3900 1 44MB DISK DRIVE EJECT BUTTON MOLDED ARROW rE _ BOOT DISK 0530 5 WRITE PROTECT TAB 2 10 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 Install the Base Before you insert a device or MatchBook into a Base you must install the Base in the programmer as described below Note You can install and remove a Base with the power on as long as you are not performing a device operation 1 Position the programmer so the rounded half points toward you then pull the sliding
90. translation of the data takes place during the transfer There are no overhead characters added to the data i e no address record start code end code nulls or checksum Every byte transferred represents the users data This format can be used to download unformatted data such as a exe file to the programmer Since this format does not have an end of file character download transfers will terminate after no more data is received and an I O timeout occurs This is true for all data formats which don t have an end of file indicator For this reason do not use a value of 0 for the I O timeout parameter on the communication parameters screen since this will disable the timeout from occurring A value between 1 and 99 inclusive should be used for the I O timeout parameter when using formats which require the timeout to occur 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 11 Translation Formats LOF Format Code 17 The Link Object Format LOF is an extension of the standard JEDEC data translation format and is used to transfer fuse and test vector data between the programmer and a host computer LOF is designed to support the Quicklogic QL8x12A family of FPGAs An LOF data file is stored as an imploded ZIP file which yields data compression approaching 95 Note The specification for the ZIP data compression algorithm allows for multiple data files to be compressed into one ZIP file In addition the ZIP data compression algorithm allows for multip
91. users Go to Insert Boot Disk in Programmer on page 2 10 3980 users Go to Install the Base on page 2 11 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 3 For HiTerm Users To set up HiTerm software and your programmer for use with a PC follow the steps below 1 Connect the hardware CAUTION To minimize electromagnetic interference use only properly shielded and terminated cables a Connect one end of the RS 232C serial cable to the serial port connector on the back of the PC usually labeled COM1 or COM2 b Connect the other end of the serial cable to the Terminal A port on the back of the programmer Install HiTerm on the PC Install HiTerm on your PC hard drive as described below To run HiTerm from the floppy disk see the HiTerm manual or the manual doc file on the Utility disk For information on DOS commands see the MS DOS manual a Insert the Utility disk in your PC then copy the HiTerm files from the Utility disk to a directory on the PC hard drive such as c hiterm b Make sure the PATH statement in the autoexec bat file includes the directory where the HiTerm files are located c Edit the prg9600 cfg configuration file to reflect the setup of your PC This file read whenever you run HiTerm specifies these parameters Line Parameter Options 1 Mode Specify Programmer P mode Only the first character of the line is significant 2 Baud rate Enter complete number for example 9600 not 96 See the HiTerm User Manua
92. you toggle the User Menu Port parameter To cancel the port switch operation press CTRL Z Otherwise press ENTER to switch the port Then move the cable between the programmer and the PC or terminal to the port specified by the parameter IOX init err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system l O timeout error Data sum hex value See page 6 18 Illegal bit error See page 6 17 Illegal instr err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system Illegal Key Input Type control Z to abort parameter entry You pressed a key that is illegal for the field where the cursor is located For example if you type a hex number in the Data Word Width field where only decimal numbers are allowed this message is displayed Illegal terminal type The terminal type number you entered was not one of the choices on the Terminal Type screen Type in a valid terminal type number 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 5 Messages Insert blank device Hit return This message is displayed during the Quick copy mode operation Remove the newly programmed device or the master device from the device socket place a blank device in the socket and press ENTER The programmer will program the blank device with RAM data loaded from the master device Insert destination disk Hit return to continue This message may appear duri
93. your own cable see page 2 8 1 Connect the hardware To connect the programmer to a host follow the steps below CAUTION To minimize electromagnetic interference use only a properly shielded and terminated cable a Connect one end of the RS 232C serial cable to the serial port connector on the host Serial ports on Sun workstations are usually labeled Serial Port A or Serial Port Consult the documentation that came with the workstation for more information b Connect the other end of the serial cable to the programmer s Remote B port 2 Set the communication parameters Set the communication parameters of the serial port connected to the programmer as follows 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit full duplex and CTS DTR handshaking Note CTS DTR Hardware Handshake is enabled as the default If those signals are not connected the programmer will communicate correctly using XON XOFF Software Handshake which is always used whether or not CTS DTR handshake is enabled After communication is established and the programmer is operating you can change the communication parameters to suit your needs Consult the operator s manual supplied with the host if you need to change the host s communication parameters The programmer is now connected to your host 2900 3900 users Go to Insert Boot Disk in Programmer on page 2 10 3980 users Go to Install the Base on page 2 11 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 5
94. 00 User Manual EE EE LoT HB gie quite JEDEC Kernel Mode Code 92 kernel 2 STX design spec min fuse information ETX xmit checksum gt design spec gt lt field character gt lt min fuse information gt lt fuse list gt lt fuse list gt You may use the JEDEC kernel format if you wish to send only the minimum data necessary to program the logic device for example if you do not want to send any test vectors If you specify format code 92 the programmer will ignore everything except the design specification field and the fuse information field The following fields will be ignored if format 92 is specified C F G Q V and X Also the security fuse will be set to zero and the transmission checksum will be ignored Figure 5 19 shows an example of a kernel JEDEC transmission Figure 5 19 JEDEC Kernel Mode Format example lt STX gt Acme Logic Design Jane Engineer Feb 29 1983 Widget Decode 756 AB 3456 Rev C Device Mullard 12AX7 L0000 1111111011 1111111111 1111000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 0000000101 1111111111 1111111111 0000000000 0000000000 0000111101 1111111111 1111111111 1111110111 1111111111 1111111111 L0200 1110101111 1111110000 0000000000 0000000000 1111111111 1111011011 1111111111 1111111110 0111111111 1111111111 111 110 1111111111 1111111111 1111101111 1111111111
95. 00000000000000 000000000 naaouauuaougaogoaumaouaagauusamouumuappomum mua 1548 2 9 Locate the 78 pin connector block on the waveform board see Figure A 3 10 Refer to Figure A 4 for the location of the pins on the connector pin numbers are not silk screened on the board and mark the following pins on the connector block using small pieces of tape Pin 72 Pin 1 ground Pin 78 10V Pin 24 15V Pin 28 8 MHz Note Testing the wrong pins on the connector block will yield invalid calibration readings 3980 3900 2900 User Manual A 3 Performance Verification Figure A 4 Test Points on the Connector Block 40 39 PIN 28 MHz do PIN 24 15V PIN 72 Plugged No PIN 78 10V PIN 1 GROUND Be a 1577 2 Checking the Master Clock Plug in the programmer and turn on the power switch 2 Check the 8 MHz clock signal by placing the ground probe of your frequency counter or oscilloscope on pin 1 ground of the 78 pin connector block Place the test probe on pin 28 shown in Figure A 4 WARNING Make sure the ground and test probes are on
96. 040010EA Extended Linear Address Record 10000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO00O 10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO 10002000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEO Data 10003000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDO Records 10004000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCO 00000001FF End of File Record cH l Dai Checksum Checksum Byte Record Type Count LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return with optional line feed and nulls determined by null count 0433 3 The six record types are described below 00 Data Record This record begins with the colon start character which is followed by the byte count in hex notation the address of the first data byte and the record type equal to 00 Following these are the data bytes The checksum follows the data bytes and is the two s complement in binary of the preceding bytes in the record including the byte count address record type and data bytes 01 End Record This end of file record also begins with the colon start character and is followed by the byte count equal to 00 the address equal to 0000 the record type equal to 01 and the checksum FF 02 Extended Segment Address Record This is added to the offset to determine the absolute destination address The address field for this record must contain ASCII zeros Hex 30s This record type defines bits 4 to 19 of the segment base address it can app
97. 1 2 Select and socket a logic device Select Program Device from the Main Menu The Program Logic Device screen is displayed Specify the parameters you want then press ENTER to begin programming When programming is complete the programmer displays the following message OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxx The following parameters can be specified on the Program Logic Device screen W Security Fuse Data 0 1 To program the security fuse set this parameter to 1 and set the Program Security Fuse parameter to Y This parameter defaults to O which disables programming of the security fuse Program Security Fuse Y N Enables or disables security fuse programming To program the security fuse select Y and set the Security Fuse Data parameter to 1 The default is N which disables programming of the security fuse 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Optional Parameters The Non default Parameters screen which contains the preceding parameters and any default parameters that were changed is displayed as the default The more complex All Parameters screen displays the following additional parameters To toggle between the two screens press F4 Illegal Bit Check Y N Enables default or disables the Illegal Bit test which compares data in a device against data in programmer RAM to determine if the device has already programmed locations of incorrect polarity For example the programmer would return an illegal bit er
98. 1 25 2 8 9 PIN MODEM DCE Pee 1 pep DATA b 2 RECEIVE DATA 3 TRANSMIT DTR d e lo q SIONAL GND ee ja Don 6 DSR RTS HELDHGH are lq C8 CTS NC NC 9 NC NC 9 PIN TERMINAL DTE BoD 1 oc PE PATA 2 TRANSMIT DATA gt 3 RECEIVE uc DIR 4 DTR q SIONAL GND lt ian DSR gt 6 DSR RTS HELDHGH p arg ES 8 cts NC NC 9 NC NC 25 PIN 25 PIN PROGRAMMER DTE MODEM DCE a PROTECTIVE GND a TRANSMIT 2 para 2 RECEIVE RECEIVE 3 le DATA 3 TRANSMIT i RTS HELD HIGH MI 5 bees 5 CTS ag 6 DSR z a SIGNAL GND x aii g ee 8 DCD 919 NC 20 DTR 21 25 25 PIN 25 PIN PROGRAMMER DCE 1 RECEIVE 2 TRANSMIT 3 9 19 20 21 25 la PROTECTIVE GND DATA DATA RTS HELD HIGH CTS DSR SIGNAL GND DCD HELD HIGH NC la DTR NC TERMINAL DTE 1 GND 2 TRANSMIT 3 RECEIVE 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 GND 8 DCD 20 DTR The minimum hookup includes Pins 2 3 and 7 Pins 1 and 7 are tied together 1388 3 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Pin Functions The function of the pins on the Terminal and Remote ports when connected to DCE and DTE equipment are described in the following table Type Pin Function Description DTE 1 Ground Provides a safety ground connection 2 Transmit Data Carries the transmitted data 3 Re
99. 101NOO0HHLHHHHHlN V0012 C0O111111101NO1HHHLHHHH1N Test Vectors V0013 C0111111110NOO0HHHHLHHHlN V0014 CO111111110NO1HHHHHLHHl1N V0015 CO111111111NO0HHHHHHLHl1N V0016 CO111111111NO1HHHHHHHL1N V0017 C0000000100NO1HLLLLLLL1N V0018 C1111111000NO1LHHHHHHHlN V0019 C0000000000NOO0HHHHHHHHON V0020 C0000000000N10Z2Z2ZZZZZZ1N C1B20 Fuse Map Checksum B8CO Transmission Checksum 0090 3 3980 3900 2900 User Manual EE LEE LoT HB gie d 0 EU JEDEC Field Syntax field lt delimiter gt lt field identifier field character field identifier 2 A C D F G K L N P Q R S TT AA reserved identifier gt B E H I J M O U W Y 2Z Following the design specification field in a JEDEC transmission can be any number of information fields Each of the JEDEC fields begins with a character that identifies what type of field it is Fields are terminated by using an asterisk character Multiple character identifiers can be used to create sub fields i e A1 A or AB3 Although they are not required you may use carriage returns CR and line feeds LF to improve readability of the data Field Identifiers Field identifiers which are currently used in JEDEC transmissions are shown above on the field identifiers line The reserved identifier line indicates characters not currently used reserved for future use as fie
100. 2 directs the programmer to use odd numbered addresses Total Set Size Specifies the number of virtual devices in the set for device operations For example if you are verifying 16 bit wide data into two 8 bit wide devices your virtual device still equals one one 16 bit virtual device Enter any number between 1 and 99 Automatic Set Size calculation is tried when any of these parameters are changed Device width Device Block Size or User Data Size Total Set Size can be defined by the following equation USER DATA SIZE DATA WORD WIDTH DEVICE WIDTH TOTAL SET SIZE DEVICE BLOCK SIZE User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block used to verify the device with the source This value is normally equal to the device size or to a multiple of the device size for verifying a set If 0 is entered it is reset to the device size User Data Size works with Total Set Size to determine the total amount of bytes to verify with a set of devices Next Operation Begins At Specifies the user memory address where the next data byte will be verified This value is calculated from Data Word Width Device Block Size Memory Begin Address device width and next set member parameters 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Optional Parameters The Non default Parameters screen which contains the preceding parameters and any default parameters that were changed is displayed as the default The more complex A
101. 33 United States 425 882 3211 xii 3980 3900 2900 User Manual World Wide Web www data io com The Data I O Web site includes links to online information about technical products general information about Data I O a list of sales offices and technical user information such as application notes and device lists To access the Web you need an Internet account with Web access and a Web browser The address of Data I O s Home Page is http www data io com Warranty Information Data I O Corporation warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship at the time of delivery and thereafter for a period of one 1 year The foregoing warranty and the manufacturers warranties if any are in lieu of all other warranties expressed implied or arising under law including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Data I O maintains customer service offices throughout the world each staffed with factory trained technicians to provide prompt quality service For warranty service contact Data I O Customer Support Keep Current Subscription Service To keep your product up to date with the latest features and device support Data I O offers the Keep Current Subscription Service a one year renewable subscription that incorporates manufacturer recommended changes to existing device support to maintain optimum yields throughput and long term reliability For more i
102. 3900 2900 User Manual 2 1 Connecting to a PC 2 2 To connect the programmer to a PC you need the following B An unused RS 232C serial port on the PC Serial ports on a PC are usually labeled COM1 or COM2 B Terminal emulation software to allow the programmer and the PC to communicate We suggest you use TaskLink or HiTerm supplied with the programmer which enable you to download files to the programmer at up to 115 2K baud A 25 pin serial cable To build your own cable see page 2 8 For TaskLink Users To set up TaskLink software and your programmer for use with a PC follow the steps below For more information refer to the TaskLink Getting Started Guide and the User Manual pages shown in parentheses 1 Connect the serial cable and programmer power cord a Connect one end of the serial cable to the Terminal A serial port on the programmer back panel and connect the other end to the COM1 or COM2 serial port on the PC Make sure nothing is connected to the programmer s Remote port b Plug the power cord into the programmer back panel and into the wall Socket 2 Install the programmer software in the programmer 2900 3900 only a Place the Boot Files disk in the programmer disk drive see page 2 10 Note After you set up the programmer back up your Boot Files and Algorithm System disks on disks formatted on the programmer see page 4 57 store the originals in a safe place and use the copies during
103. 3980 3900 2900 Programming Systems User Manual DATAI O March 1998 981 0414 001 Data I O has made every attempt to ensure that the information in this document is accurate and complete Data I O assumes no liability for errors or for any incidental consequential indirect or special damages including without limitation loss of use loss or alteration of data delays or lost profits or savings arising from the use of this document or the product which it accompanies No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without written permission from Data I O Data I O Corporation 10525 Willows Road N E P O Box 97046 Redmond Washington 98073 9746 USA 425 881 6444 http www data io com Acknowledgments Data I O is a registered trademark and AutoBaud Keep Current MatchBook SmartPort and HiTerm Terminal Emulator are trademarks of Data I O Corporation Data I O Corporation acknowledges the trademarks of other organizations for their respective products or services mentioned in this document Portions of the 2900 3900 and 3980 Programming Systems are protected under U S Patent numbers 4 837 653 4 840 576 5 176 525 and 5 289 118 Other U S and Foreign Patents Pending 1998 Data I O Corporation All rights reserved Contents Preface Data I O Customer Support leer nns xi Contacting Data I O Sea osa sm E on
104. 4 through 6 as necessary When you are done adding devices press F2 once or twice until you are prompted to insert the Custom Menu disk Insert the Custom Menu disk and press ENTER to save your changes to disk More Commands Configure System Custom Menu Algorithms View This command displays the contents of a Custom Menu To view a Custom Menu follow these steps 1 2 3 Delete Select the View command Insert the disk that contains your Custom Menu then press ENTER to continue Follow the directions on the screen inserting disks if prompted When you are done press F2 to return to the Custom Menu Algs menu More Commands Configure System Custom Menu Algorithms Delete This command allows you to delete devices from a Custom Menu as described below 1 Select the Delete command 2 Insert the disk that contains your Custom Menu then press ENTER to continue Follow the directions on the screen inserting disks if prompted 3 The Custom Menu is displayed Move the cursor to the Delete field and enter the number next to the file you want to delete 4 Move the cursor to the Are you sure field and press Y CAUTION If you do not want to delete the file do not press Enter Instead press F2 to return to the Custom Menu Algs menu 5 To delete the file press ENTER 6 When you are done press F2 to return to the Custom Menu Algs menu 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 37 Commands Update More Commands Confi
105. 444 40 eee E ee ee eR eo ew eS B 4 CRC Commands amp 246s ees ko ER a ee Re Ee ee ee ea Ro Rn Eo B 5 3980 3900 2900 User Manual C Keep Current Subscription D Glossary Computer Requirements lees C 1 Procedure Overview eller C 2 1 Gather Information 22e C 2 2 Connect to Keep Current leen C 3 Using the BBS ks xxix e Se Rae Sooke SUE oe SOP ADR Boke Rs C 3 Using the Web xc sek asma UO E E RR Rak RUE GR RR EO e Ra C 3 3 Find Device Algorithm llle C 3 4 Download Algorithm elles C 4 5 Use Algorithm suena korr RR RU aa WEED Re ge a GR CELAGRORORUR AO C 4 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Vii Figures 1 1 Contents of the Programming System l l sss 1 2 1 2 Front Panel Features ellen 1 3 1 3 Back Panel Features llle es 1 4 2 1 Programmer Main Menu ler 2 3 2 2 Pin Designations for RS 232C Serial Port Connection 2 8 2 3 Write enabled Disk auauna aaa 2 10 2 4 Inserting the Boot Disk 2900 3900 2 2000 2 10 2 5 Base Opening aces eae ae Bea ee eee bade EX ERE SUE cR 2 11 2 6 Aligning the Base axo ele Se OR RCROR we ee a s 2 11 2 7 Removing a Base auaa hn 2 12 2 8 Typical Power on Screen llle ee 2 16 2 9 Inserting a DIP Device into the DIP Base 2 19 2 10 Inserting a MatchBook into the Base 000 2 20 2 11 Closing the
106. 8 3 14 Translation Format Selection Screen 020000 3 19 3 15 Download Data from Host Screen illl 3 20 3 16 Download Data from Host Screen 000 ee eee 3 23 3 17 Edit Programmer Memory Screen llle 3 25 3 18 Edit Screen s ss eee kA a ERA UO AER G E RR ERR 3 25 3 19 Program Memory Device Screen Non default Parameters 3 27 3 20 Program Memory Device Screen All Parameters 3 28 3 21 Verify Memory Device Screen Non default Parameters 3 29 3 22 Verify Memory Device Screen All Parameters 3 30 4 1 Command Tree page numbers are in italics 4 2 5 1 ASCII Binary Format example leen 5 3 5 2 TI SDSMAC Format example lee 5 4 5 3 Formatted Binary Format example llle 5 6 5 4 Formatted Binary Format example 000 eee eee 5 7 Viii 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 5 Spectrum Format example lle 5 8 5 6 ASCII Octal and Hex Formats example eee 5 14 5 7 RCA Cosmac Format example llle 5 16 5 8 Fairchild Fairbug example leen 5 17 5 9 MOS Technology Format example else 5 18 5 10 Motorola EXORciser Format example lees 5 19 5 11 Intel Intellec 8 MDS Format example es 5 20 5 12 An Example of Signetics Absolute Object Format 5 20 5 13 Tektronix Hex
107. 8 Precautions ESD A 1 Preventive maintenance 2 29 Program Device Logic Device 4 10 Memory Device 4 12 Program Security Fuse default setting 4 4 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Program Logic Device 4 10 Program Memory Device 4 13 Programmer description of 1 1 setup 2 1 Programmer disks 1 4 inserting 2 10 Programmer Fuse Map Edit 4 45 Programmer Test Vector Edit 4 46 Programming a device session 3 2 3 27 Programming parameters 4 21 Purge File 4 55 Keep Current 4 34 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Q QFP device 1 8 R Radio frequency Interference RFI 1 7 RAM Device Selection default setting 4 4 Edit Programming Parameters 4 25 RAM upgrade 1 8 Reject Option default setting 4 4 Edit Programming Parameters 4 21 Program Logic Device 4 11 Program Memory Device 4 14 Reminder bar command screens 3 5 Help screens 3 8 Remote LED 1 3 Remote Off Code default setting 4 4 Edit Interface Parameters 4 30 Remote On Code default setting 4 4 Edit Interface Parameters 4 30 Remote port 1 4 Rename Data File 4 55 Rename File 4 55 Restore System Parameters 4 19 S Safety Canadian Standards Association 1 7 Certificate of Compliance 1 7 specifications 1 7 TUV 1 7 Underwriters Laboratories 1 7 Save Data File 4 54 Save System Parameters 4 31 Screen format 3 5 SDIP device 1 8 2 28 Security Fuse Data default setting 4 4 Program Logic Device 4 10 Selecting algorithm type 4 5 devic
108. 8 Intel MCS 86 Hex Object FFFFF 89 Hewlett Packard 64000 Absolute FFFFFFFF 90 Texas Instruments SDSMAC FFFF 91 92 JEDEC Full and Kernel N A 94 Tektronix Hexadecimal Extended FFFFFFFF 95 Motorola 32 bit S3 record FFFFFFFF 96 Hewlett Packard UNIX Format FFFFFFFF 97 Intel OMF 386 FFFFFFFF 98 Intel OMF 286 FFFFFF 99 Intel Hex 32 FFFFFFFF 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 Messages This chapter describes system and error messages you may see while operating the programmer Messages are listed in alphabetical order Online Help is also available for messages If the message you are looking for is not in this chapter press F3 or when the message appears for a description Troubleshooting Guides describing the following messages and associated corrective actions are included at the end of this chapter Device Insertion Error When Using Elastomeric Pad Ls 6 11 Device Overcurrent Fault aasa aaa llle 6 13 Device Programming Error 1 hrs 6 14 Invalid Device ID on Logic Device llle 6 15 Electronic ID Verify Error on Memory Device llle ens 6 16 Illegal Bit Error em RACE xn RR a ee ea ee KORR Re eR 6 17 1 0 Timeout Errori ease m eyes op OR E ROLE a cR ac oR Y Rr a a e dr US P 6 18 Partial or No Transfer Performed llle 6 19 Incompatible User Data File for Device Selected 00005 6 20 Message List 0 div err The programmer experienced a divide by zero error that i
109. 821 For repair or warranty service contact Data I O Central Dispatch Telephone 800 735 6070 Fax 425 881 0561 For Keep Current subscription service Data I O Sales or repair service contract contact Telephone 800 332 8246 Fax 425 869 7423 Canada For technical assistance contact Data I O Customer Resource Center Telephone 800 247 5700 Fax 425 869 2821 For repair or warranty service or Keep Data I O Canada Current subscription service contact 6725 Airport Road Suite 102 Mississauga Ontario L4V 1V2 Telephone 905 678 0761 Fax 905 678 7306 Japan For technical assistance repair or Data I O Japan warranty service or Keep Current Osaki CN Building 2F subscription service contact 5 10 10 Osaki Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 Telephone 3 3779 2151 Fax 3 3779 2203 Germany For technical assistance repair warranty Data I O GmbH service or Keep Current subscription Lochhamer Schlag 5 service contact 82166 Gr felfing Telephone 89 858 580 Fax 89 858 5810 Other For technical assistance repair or Your local Data I O representative Countries warranty service or Keep Current subscription service contact 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Xi Contacting Data I O You can contact Data I O for technical assistance by calling sending a fax or electronic mail e mail or using the Bulletin Board Service BBS To help us give you quick and accurate assistance please provide the following information W Product version number W P
110. 900 3900 Make sure the Boot disk is in the programmer disk drive then turn on the power switch on the rear panel The Power LED should light If it does not turn off the programmer check the power connections then turn on the programmer again Note Do not remove the Boot disk while the Self Test or disk drive LED is lit If you remove the Boot disk during powerup you must reboot the programmer 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 13 5 Check Self lest Results When you turn on the programmer a self test is performed While the self test is in progress the LEDs are lit as shown Power Terminal Remote Self Test On Off Off On When the programmer completes powerup the Self Test LED and disk drive LED turn off and the front panel LEDs illuminate in the patterns shown below depending on the results of the self test Programmer Passed Self test If the self test was completed successfully the Power LED lights along with the LEDs for any equipment connected to the Terminal and Remote ports Power Terminal Remote Self Test Description On On Off Off Terminal port OK Self test finished with no errors On Off On Off Remote port OK Self test finished with no errors On On On Off Remote amp terminal ports OK Self test finished with no errors Note Terminal port OK indicates that the programmer detected an RS 232 serial device connected to the Terminal port and a valid connection has been established with that device If
111. 96 This format divides the data file into data records each with a maximum size of 250 bytes not including header information An ID header is added to the beginning of the first record Each subsequent record has its own header section The section at the beginning of the file contains the following elements the header 8004 filename byte count for the processor information record and the processor information record The header 8004 identifies the type of file being transferred The first byte of this header 80 indicates that this file is binary and the 04 indicates the type of file absolute The ID header is followed by a 16 byte filename not used by the programmer Next is the byte count which indicates the size minus one of the Processor Information Record that follows The Processor Information Record is divided into the following data words Data Bus Width Data Width Base Transfer Address LS least significant and Transfer Address MS most significant The Data Bus Width represents the width of the target system s bus in bits The Data Width Base represents the smallest addressable entity used by the target microprocessor The Data Bus Width and Data Width Base are not used by the programmer during download During upload the Data Bus Width will be set to the current Data Word Width and the Data Width Base will be set to 8 The Transfer Address LS and Transfer Address MS are not used by the programmer The data
112. A 4 8 Load Memory Device 1 0 ccc hh 4 8 Program Device s see ara ete ee Scalia de a OR REUS nce OM TR eae e BORD Behn ee d 4 10 Program Logic Device leen 4 10 Program Memory Device aaau aaa 4 12 Enhanced Security Fuse Capability ssaa aaa 4 14 Verify DEVICE ca mery a ae Sige Pee Re AARE B 4 ee RO N a RR e OR EGER 4 15 Verify Logic Device aasa aaa res 4 15 Verify Memory Device leer ns 4 16 More Commands lle hh hn 4 18 Configure System 24 ica ge medo ee hx ee ek Pa KR RR AC d 4 19 Device Checks cc es 4 39 Edit Data se oseaan nega Ge ade Sem Son Seah a Sr ie eth a ee hom eee 4 45 File Operations sss seed ee go RA ee ee Eee ee ew ba e ds 4 53 Job Fil x ox oy hose el ce Rm RUE te ode RC RU RU ORE Se Me HSS 4 58 Remote Control leer rrr 4 59 cle ca LT 4 60 Transfer Data cnuis stesia gabri EnEn hr hs 4 61 Yield Tally itu eren a nbi eom RI RU we Ree ee ee JR 4 69 5 Translation Formats Introduction u c eo Rr UR ee Ra t p XR ae BOR E RS Y nun 5 1 Instrument Control Codes saasaa aaa 5 2 General Notes leer hr hrs 5 2 ASCII Binary Format Codes 01 02 and 03 or 05 06 and 07 5 3 Texas Instruments SDSMAC Format 320 Code04 LL 5 4 5 Level BNPF Format Codes 080r 09 llle ees 5 5 Formatted Binary Format Code 10 l 002 eee eee 5 6 DEC Binary Format Code 11 l l 5 7 Spectrum Format Codes 120r 13 l
113. CII character you want to use to disable remote control mW Main Menu Job Files Y N When this feature is enabled you can start a Job File from the Main Menu rather than having to go to the Job Files menu m Powerup User RAM Test Y N Enable or disable User RAM Test at powerup 4 30 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Save System Parameters More Commands Configure System Save Save System Parameters System Parameters are all the parameters on the Programming Serial I O Communication and Interface screens With the Save command you can save a set of system parameters for future use This feature is useful if you want the programmer to power up with preset parameters or if multiple users prefer to have their own sets of parameters easily available To save a system configuration follow these steps 1 Set the system parameters to fit your application using the Configure Edit menus 2 Go to the Save screen and select a file number between one and nine in which to store the configuration file File numbers zero through two are reserved for factory defaults powerup defaults and CRC defaults Follow the instructions on the screen inserting disks when prompted Note Select Powerup defaults to save the settings and have them automatically restored at powerup 3 Enter a description of the configuration file you are saving for example Config file for Intel 27C256 The name can be up to 30 characters long 4 After you
114. FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF00O 00101060FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOO 002010A0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOO 003010EO0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOO 00401021FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOO of Signetics Absolute Object Format r 2 Hex Characters 1 Byte 1 Ld r Address Check r Data Check 000000 Transfer Address Byte Count 00 in End of File Record LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return line feeds and nulls determined by null count 5 20 3980 3900 2900 Data Records 0084 2 User Manual EE EE LOT HB me quire The start character is a colon This is followed by the address the byte count and a 2 digit address check The address check is calculated by exclusive ORing every byte with the previous one then rotating left one bit Data are represented by pairs of hexadecimal characters The byte count must equal the number of data bytes in the record The suffix is a 2 character data check calculated using the same operations described for the address check The end of file record consists of the colon start character the address and the byte count equal to 00 Tektronix Hexadecimal Format Code 86 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 13 illustrates a valid Tektronix data file The data in each record are sandwiched between the start character a slash and a 2 character checksum Following the start character the next 4 characters of the prefix express the address of
115. FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBC 89030000FC O End of File Record End of File Record HH IT Start Character Sumcheck Byte Count Address Data Records LEGEND Nonprinting Carriage Return line feed and nulls determined by null count 0082 2 Each data record begins with the start characters S1 The third and fourth characters represent the byte count which expresses the number of data address and checksum bytes in the record The address of the first data byte in the record is expressed by the last 4 characters of the prefix Data bytes follow each represented by 2 hexadecimal characters The number of data bytes occurring must be three less than the byte count The suffix is a 2 character checksum which equals the one s complement of the binary summation of the byte count address and data bytes The end of file record consists of the start characters S9 the byte count the address in hex and a checksum The maximum record length is 250 data bytes 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 19 Translation Formats Intel Intellec 8 MDS Format Code 83 Intel data records begin with a 9 character prefix and end with a 2 character suffix The byte count must equal the number of data bytes in the record Figure 5 11 simulates a series of valid data records Each record begins with a colon which is followed by a 2 character byte count The 4 digits following
116. FY DEVICE IN SOCKET PIN 1 ALIGNMENT FINGER 1 OF 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Inserting a PGA Device into a PGA Base 3900 3980 The PGA Base can accommodate PGA packages up to 15 x 15 pin arrays Use the following procedure to insert a PGA device into the PGA Base Note When you insert a PGA device into the PGA Base pay particular attention to the orientation and positioning of the device Install the PGA Base into the programmer see page 2 11 2 Unlock the PGA socket by lifting up on the socket lever Insert the device into the PGA socket Make sure the PGA device is bottom justified and that pin 1 of the device is against the left side of the socket Figure 2 14 shows the proper alignment of a PGA device 4 Push the socket lever down to lock the PGA device into the PGA socket Figure 2 14 Orienting a PGA Device in the PGA Base SOCKET LEVER ON p PGA SOCKET NUMBERS AND SMALL ARROWS INDICATE j gt eeeee5e e eo oo cc oe 0 INPGA o 13eeee ejee e e o e 69 84 PINPGA glee eccc 00000009 9 9 1 ee ejes ee 4A PINPGA ee ojo o e c 99 ARROW MEANS vols BOTTOM JUSTIFY Tow oa e DEVICE IN SOCKET ec 9e ec 9e ecce o o A 0566 5 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 23 Installing a PPI Adapter into the PPI Base Perform the following procedure and refer to the illustrations to in
117. File A sequence of keystrokes that have been stored in a disk file and which can be played back at a later time Keep Current Subscription Service A one year renewable subscription that provides periodic update kits containing the latest features and device support for Data I O products LCA An acronym for Logic Cell Array a reconfigurable programmer gate array manufactured by Xilinx Corporation D 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual LCC An acronym for Leadless Chip Carrier a type of device package A 4 sided ceramic package with pads on the underside for surface mount applications LED An acronym for Light Emitting Diode The programmer has five LEDs four on the top cover and one on the disk drive Load Data A device operation that moves device data into the programmer You can load the programmer with data from a device from the programmer s internal disk drive or from a serial port for example from the Remote port Load Device A device operation that copies data from a master device into User memory Logic Verification After programming a device you can select test vector verification fuse verification or both types of verification Master Device A device that contains data you wish to program into another device For example you would load data from a master device and then program that data into a blank device MatchBook A durable plastic carrier that handles surface mount devices such as LCCs PLCCs SOICs an
118. File Record Byte Count Checksum Record Type LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return line feed and nulls determined by null count 0087 4 The four record types are described below 00 Data Record This begins with the colon start character which is followed by the byte count in hex notation the address of the first data byte and the record type equal to 00 Following these are the data bytes The checksum follows the data bytes and is the two s complement in binary of the preceding bytes in the record including the byte count address record type and data bytes 01 End Record This end of file record also begins with the colon start character This is followed by the byte count equal to 00 the address equal to 0000 the record type equal to 01 and the checksum FF 02 Extended Segment Address Record This is added to the offset to determine the absolute destination address The address field for this record must contain ASCII zeros Hex 30s This record type defines bits 4 to 19 of the segment base address It can appear randomly anywhere within the object file and affects the absolute memory address of subsequent data records in the file The following example illustrates how the extended segment address is used to determine a byte address 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 23 Translation Formats Problem Find the address for the first data byte for
119. HH HHHHH PROGRAMMING SYSTEM Copyright Data I O Corporation User RAM 2176KB Software revision X XX Algorithm revision Y YY Current terminal type DEC VT1 ANSI 3 64 Do you want to select a neu terminal type Y N N If the current terminal type is correct press ENTER and go to Set Up High Speed Download on page 2 17 if you will be using high speed download or go to Install Devices on page 2 19 Selecting a New Terminal Type To change the current terminal type and or the default terminal type follow these steps 1 When the programmer prompts Do you want to select a new terminal type Y N N press Y then ENTER 2 The default and current terminal types and a list of the available terminal types is displayed Enter the number corresponding to the terminal type you want to use then press ENTER If the screen is blank or if random characters are displayed the Terminal type configuration is incorrect Turn off the programmer turn it on again then select the correct terminal 3 After you change the terminal type for this current session the programmer responds with the following prompt Save terminal type as power on default Y N N 4 To save the terminal as the powerup default press Y then ENTER To use this terminal type for this session only press N then ENTER You are returned to the Main Menu 2 16 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 7 Set Up High Speed Download optional W
120. If the device part number is not displayed on the first screen press CTRL N to display the next screen Note If you are using a device other than the AMD 27256 remember that the device you select may not have the same capabilities For example the AMD 27256 supports Electronic ID while the Hitachi 27256 does not If you do not find the device part number you want return to the Manufacturer List and look at the Device Type field which allows you to filter out specific device types Press SPACE to cycle through the three settings All Memory amp Emicros or Logic Only When you select a manufacturer the programmer displays only devices that fit the filter you selected When the programming algorithm has finished loading the status window displays the selected device and returns to the Main Menu The programmer sets the Load parameters to match the size of the selected device Insert the Master Device Make sure the DIP Base is properly installed in the programmer If the socket is locked unlock it by pulling up the socket lever Insert the device in the socket so that it is bottom justified and pin 1 is in the upper left corner See Figure 3 9 Press the socket lever down to lock the device into place Note Insert devices into the programmer AFTER you have installed a Base in the programmer 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Figure 3 9 Locking and Unlocking a Device SOCKET LEVERS UNLOCKED pu SOCKET LE
121. Manual Computer Remote Control Summary of Extended CRC Commands Command Description Response 01 Display system configuration SSSS AAAA MM PP II JJ gt nn02 Set upload wait time gt n03 Set device ID verify option HHHHHHHH gt or gt nn04 Set Remote port baud rate gt XXX XXXX05 Set host command gt n06 Select data bits gt n07 Set next set member gt xx09 Set set size gt nn22 Set data word width gt n23 Select number of verify passes gt n24 Select security fuse programming gt n26 Specify logic verify options gt n27 Set clear enable disable sec fuse gt n28 Fill fuse map gt n29 Set reject count option gt hhh2A or hh2A Enable programming options gt hhh2B or hh2B Disable programming options gt nhh2C Select memory fill option gt hh2D Vector test options gt 2F Return 8 character sumcheck HHHHHHHH gt XXX XXxx30 Set data file name gt n31 Set data source destination gt XXX XXXx33 Select device manufacturer gt XXX XXXx34 Select device part number gt XXX XXxx38 Load file from disk gt XXX XXXX3B Delete disk file gt n3C Set data transfer port gt XXX XXXX3E Select Keep Current algorithm gt 39 Delete all RAM files gt n40 n41 43 46 49 n4A n4D n4F n52 Upload device information Perform self tests and upload results Upload yield tally Clear yield tally Suspend CRC mode Get filename from disk Select algorith
122. NTER to return to terminal emulation If sample dat is not in the current directory press ALT F5 to display HiTerm s Change Directory command Type the drive and path name of the directory containing sample dat then press ENTER to change to that directory Press ALT F6 ENTER to view the current directory If sample dat is in the current directory press ENTER to return to terminal emulation If the data file is not in the current directory repeat the procedure until you find the desired data file Note The function key commands in this Session are for IBM compatible PCs If you are using an NEC 9800 PC the HiTerm commands will be slightly different See the HiTerm User Manual In the Download Host Command field type tr sample dat or substitute the appropriate filename if you are using a different file The TRANSFER TR command is a special Download Host Command that tells HiTerm and the programmer to perform a High Speed Download Press ENTER to begin the download The message bar displays Parameter Entered and the action symbol rotates while the data is being downloaded When the download is finished the message bar displays Data transfer complete Data sum xxxxxxxx Where xxxxxxxx indicates the sumcheck of the transferred data You can use the sumcheck to verify that the downloaded data matches the data on your host The sumcheck for memory devices is an eight digit hexadecimal summation of the data downloaded When you progr
123. OO SOIC DEVICE oQ OO PIN 1 ee OO y OO ORIENTATION ICON 89 oo N OO OO O SD SD 2755 1 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 27 SDIP Devices Orient SDIP Shrink DIP devices in the socket with pin 1 at the top left and with the bottom of the device aligned with the bottom of the socket Figure 2 19 Inserting an SDIP device in a PPI Adapter O a o0 p mooo oo OO M OO SDIP SOCKET se fere OO oO OO OO OO oO OO OO PIN 1 SS am 66 Ss OO OO E OO OO oO SDIP DEVICE es 69 se OO o0 FE OO OO oO OO OO OO oO OO OO OO oO PIN 1 OO Ex OO ere l OO ee OO OO OO SDIP ORIENTATION B6 Ex oo o0 OO 00 Eb jm oO OO oO O e D O 2414 1 Inserting Other Devices The programmer must be fitted with a Base and adapter appropriate for the device you are using When you insert a device into an adapter socket consult the illustrations on the adapter to determine device orientation Most devices are keyed so that they can fit into the socket only one way For more information refer to the documentation included with the adapter 2 28 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 9 Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Fan Operate your programmer where the vent over the fan will not become blocked and remove any dust or dirt that accumulates on the fa
124. Parameters FILENAME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REU X XX YYY ZZ MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 170 FORMAT MAIN MENU LOAD MEMORY DEVICE all parameters Select device Destination RAM Set auto increment IN Quick copy Compare elec ID d Data word width 3 Next deuice 1 Program device Total set size 1 User data size 8080 Uerifu device Next operation begins at E More commands Memory begin address 7 Deuice begin address 2 Device block size 80808 Return Execute F4 Select mode options Fi Main Menu FZ Preu menu F3 or 7 Help Set the parameters as shown in Figure 3 10 To change the value of a parameter move the cursor to the desired field type the new value then either press ENTER or use the arrow keys to move the cursor to a new field If you try to enter an incorrect parameter the programmer beeps and the message line reads Illegal parameter value If you enter a valid parameter the message line reads Parameter Entered For more information on a parameter see Chapter 4 or use online Help Load the Data Review 3 16 Now that you have set the parameters you can load the data from the device To begin the load press ENTER When the programmer has loaded the data it displays OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxx represents the 8 digit sumcheck of the data loaded from the device A 4 digit sumcheck is displayed for a logic device When you select Load Device from the Main Menu y
125. Parameters More Commands Configure System Edit Communication Use the Edit Communication Parameters screen to change the programmer s I O characteristics when downloading or uploading data To save the communication parameters settings for use later save them in a configuration file using the Save command in the Configure System menu Source destination R T Specifies the source destination port of the data to be transferred Press SPACE to toggle between R Remote port and T Terminal port m I O Translation Format Specifies the two digit decimal code that corresponds to the translation format in which the data will be transferred For a detailed list and sample of each format see the Translation Formats chapter of this manual W I O Addr Offset Specifies address offset to use during a data transfer The I O Addr Offset is subtracted from the I O Addresses during Input from Disk and Download operations so data is properly located in User RAM or on disk During Output to Disk and Upload operations the I O Addr Offset is added to the User Memory Address Specifying FFFFFFFF instructs the programmer to set the I O Addr Offset to the first incoming address of data received from Input from Disk and Download operations During Output to Disk and Upload operations setting the I O Addr Offset to FFFFFFFF is the same as setting the I O Addr Offset to 0 since no offset is added to the I O addresses sent out This parameter defaults
126. Probable Cause Solution I O Address Offset Absolute translation To transfer data from file to corresponding RAM FFFFFFFF and first file locations enter an I O Address Offset value of 00000000 address is not the lowest Offset translation If file data must begin at the programmer RAM location 0000H find the lowest file address and use that value as the I O Address Offset Improper use of Begin Your file must be transferred to proper locations in programmer RAM RAM Address and or User Edit Programmer RAM to determine whether data has been transferred Data Size properly If it hasn t make sure your Begin RAM Address and User Data Size parameters are appropriate Refer to the Download Data section of your User Manual for definitions and usage File addressing places View your file with an ASCII editor and look for addresses that exceed data outside RAM address your programmer s RAM address range To convert the decimal value range of your programmer RAM size to its hex equivalent refer to the Data I O Memory Chart Application Note Additional Information This warning message appears in the download screen reached via More Transfer Download from the Main Menu and indicates that a portion of your file s data has not been transferred into programmer RAM Transfer problems of this nature occur more often with files that have been generated with addresses in non sequential order where the lowest address is embedded
127. R D Specifies the destination of the data that is being downloaded from the host computer Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D disk m Filename Specifies the name of the disk file in which to save the downloaded file This option appears only if you specify Disk as the Destination The filename must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27256 dat m I O Translation Format Selects the translation format of the data in the file A list of formats the programmer supports is available on the Format Select screen in the Transfer Data menu and also in the front of Chapter 5 If you know the number for your format enter it from this screen If you do not know the number of the format you are using use the Format Select command to select the format If you are using the Altera POF format you must select the desired POF device before you perform a data transfer operation 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 61 Commands Upload Data 4 62 I O Addr Offset Enter the beginning hex address of the host computer s data file or the first address you want to capture within a file This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected The programmer subtracts this address from addresses received to determine where either in the user RAM or in the disk file the data will be loaded Entering FFFFFFFF sets the first address received as the I O offset for the rest of the download Memory Begin Address Specifies the first addre
128. Selects the number of times to test the device O directs the programmer not to test the device 1 directs the programmer to test the device once at the device manufacturer s nominal Vcc 2 directs the programmer to verify the device at the device manufacturer s recommended high and low Vcc levels This parameter defaults to 2 Erase EE Device Y N Allows you to erase electronically erasable PROMs Before the programming cycle the programmer checks the device and displays a warning if the device if non blank If you enable the erasing of the device the programmer erases the device before programming the device Enhanced Security Fuse Capability The enhanced security fuse capability for EMICRO parts allows Security Fuse Data to be stored in a data file Currently some devices support this capability including the Intel 8742AH For more information or to see if a device supports this capability see the device manufacturer s data book The Security Fuse Data field cannot be restored using the More Commands Configure System Restore command Security Fuse Data is restored from a data file 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Verify Device The Verify Device command compares data in a programmed device with data in RAM Depending on the type of device selected either the Verify Logic Device screen or the Verify Memory Device screen appears when you select the Verify Device command Before you can verify a device you must load the
129. Session 7 for information on selecting a data translation format 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Prepare the Programmer From the Main Menu press M T D to get to the Download Data From Host screen which is shown in Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 Download Data from Host Screen FILENAME RAM AVAIL Z176KB REU Xx WY MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 I U FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS N TRANSFER MENU DOWNLOAD DATA FROM HOST Source Remote Terminal i Upload data Destination RAM Disk RI Compare data Format select I 0 Translation Format EE Input from disk I70 addr offset FFFFFFFF Output to disk Memory begin address ol Serial output User data size ol Download host command F1 Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or 7 Help Make sure the parameters reflect your system configuration Use the following settings if your host is connected to the Remote port on the programmer Source Remote port Destination RAM I O Translation Format 83 Intel Hex I O Address Offset FFFFFFFF Memory Begin Address 0 User Data Size 0 If your configuration is different change the parameters to match your configuration For example select translation format 91 if the data file you will download is a JEDEC file For now leave the Download Host Command blank you will fill that in later If the parameters are correct skip ahead to the section titled Downloading the File About Parameters Parameters are use
130. Sumcheck Display Compare Electronic ID Illegal Bit Check Blank Check Electronic Erase Under Overblow Logic Devices Only Device Configure Before you can run one of these commands you must do the following 1 Select a device For more information see Select a Device on page 4 5 2 Insert and lock a device into the socket This applies only if you are checking a device not if you are checking User RAM Sumcheck Display The sumcheck is a 4 or 8 digit hexadecimal number that when compared to the original data allows you to verify that a copy of the data matches the original data Remember you must select a device before you calculate the sumcheck The sumcheck is computed by adding each 8 bit byte in the specified range into a 32 bit result with the carry dropped Sumcheck Logic Device More Commands Device Checks Sumcheck Display Sumcheck Logic Device If a logic device is selected the Sumcheck Logic Device screen is displayed To sumcheck a logic device follow these steps 1 Select and socket a logic device 2 Press ENTER and the programmer calculates the 4 digit sumcheck of the fuse pattern The sumcheck is displayed in the message bar Sumcheck Memory Device More Commands Device Checks Sumcheck Display Sumcheck Memory Device For memory devices the programmer calculates and displays the sumcheck for a single device for each device in a set or for an entire set Follow the steps below to calculate the su
131. The parameters are described below Swap Mode The type of swap to perform Choose between Byte mode and Nibble mode In Byte mode the high byte and the low byte will be swapped In Nibble mode the high order and low order nibbles will be swapped Press SPACE to toggle between the two modes m Memory Begin Address The memory address at which to begin the swap Enter any 1 to 6 digit hex address W Block Size The number of bytes in hex to be swapped Enter any 1 to 6 digit hex block size The block size added to the memory address cannot exceed the user memory size Also the block size must be an even number if using Byte mode File Operations More Commands File Operations From the File Operations menu you can access several file manipulation and directory commands These functions help you move and copy files view file directories and organize and maintain your disks The following sections describe each of the File Operations commands in the order in which they appear on the file menu screen Note A file disk has a capacity of 1 44M bytes or 112 files whichever comes first View Directory More Commands File Operations View Directory This command displays the file directory of the disk in the disk drive To view a directory follow these steps 1 Insert the disk you want to view into the disk drive 2 Press ENTER to view the directory The View Directory command can view the directory of any DOS compatible 3 5 inch
132. The programmer compares the electronic ID of the socketed device to the electronic ID of the selected device If the electronic ID of the socketed device matches the electronic ID of the selected device the following message is displayed OPERATION COMPLETE Device ssssssss where ssssssss is the electronic ID of the socketed device 3 If the programmer detects an electronic ID that does not match the selected device type the following message is displayed OPERATION FAILED Electronic ID verify error Device ssssssss where ssssssss is the electronic ID of the socketed device Illegal Bit Check The Illegal Bit Test compares data in a device against data in the programmer s RAM to determine if the device has already programmed locations of incorrect polarity Illegal Bit Check is supported for both logic and memory devices but is not supported for electronically erasable devices The device cannot be programmed if the programmer detects an illegal bit For example if data in RAM indicates that a specific bit should be in an unprogrammed state and the corresponding bit in the device is in a programmed state an illegal bit error will occur If the programmer detects an illegal bit it displays an error message If the device is erasable the illegal bit can be corrected by erasing the device Logic Device Illegal Bit Check More Commands Device Checks Illegal Bit Check Illegal Bit Check Logic Device If you selected a logic device the
133. The programmer displays Parameter Entered 7 Move the cursor to the Memory Begin Address field and type 0 8 Press ENTER to begin loading the data file The action symbol rotates while the programmer loads the data file and displays Loading data from file 9 If the data file loads successfully the programmer displays Done and the Load File screen is displayed Go to page 3 26 to learn how to edit the sample file If the sample data file did not load successfully return to the beginning of this Session and try it again You can load device data into programmer RAM by loading a data file from the programmer s floppy disk drive Use the commands on the File Operations menu such as the Load File command if your data file is stored in binary image format Use the commands on the Transfer Data menu such as the Input from Disk command if your data file is stored in a specific data translation format such as Intel Hex or JEDEC When you select the Load File command the programmer displays a directory of the files on the disk in the drive Enter the filename of the file you want to load Press CTRL N to display the next page of files press CTRL P to display the previous page When loading data for a memory device also enter a memory begin address Press ENTER to begin loading If the load operation completes successfully the programmer displays the following message in the message bar Done 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Sta
134. Use the More Transfer Data Input from Disk command device from disk and the disk data is and program the device from RAM still in the JED format QF and QP fields When programming a device the programmer looks at the QF and QP fields in the JED file If the fields do not contain one of the acceptable values the programmer returns the error QF is for the number of fuses in the device QP is for the number of pins in the device Calculating the Number of Fuses in a Device There are three ways of determining the number of fuses in a device 1 Review the device manufacturer s specification for the number of fuses 2 Using the programmer in terminal mode perform the following a Select the device b Choose More commands Edit Data Fill Fuse Map c Choose More commands Edit Data Edit Logic d Page down to the end of the fuse map Note the number of the last fuse and add 1 to it fuse numbers start at 0 Compare it to the QF field in the JED file 3 Using the programmer in terminal mode perform the following a Select the device b Choose More commands Edit Data Fill Fuse Map c Choose More commands Transfer Data Upload Data d Enter the file name of the JED file to be created e View the new JED file with the text editor Locate the QF and the QP fields and compare them to the QF and QP fields in the failing JED file 6 20 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Performance Verification This appendix describes how to verify the per
135. VERS LOCKED 0548 2 Set the Parameters After you select the device type and lock the master device in the socket choose Load Device from the Main Menu The Load Memory Device parameter screen is displayed see Figure 3 10 Figure 3 10 Load Memory Device Screen Non default Parameters FILENRME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REV X XX Y Y Y ZZ MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 I 0 FORMAT MAIN MENU LOAD MEMORY DEVICE Cnon default Select device Destination RAM i Quick copy Data uord uidth 8 Next device 1 Program device Total set size 1 User data size 8888 Uerify deuice Next operation begins at More commands Return Execute F4 Select mode options F1 Main menu FZ Preu menu F3 or Help One of the following two Load Memory Device screens is displayed m The Non default Parameters screen the default screen displays a subset of the Load parameters supported by the selected device see Figure 3 10 Usually these are the only parameters you need to set W The All Parameters screen displays all the Load parameters supported by the selected device see Figure 3 11 When you perform more complicated operations such as loading only part of the device data you will change some of the parameters on this screen To switch between the two screens press F4 For this Session you will be using the Non default screen 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 15 Getting Started Figure 3 11 Load Memory Screen All
136. a 1 Phillips screwdriver replace the three screws you removed from the top of the programmer in step 6 See Figure A 2 for the location of the screw holes Your programmer is reassembled and ready for use 3980 3900 2900 User Manual A 5 Performance Verification A 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual B Computer Remote Control The programmer can be controlled via a host computer using Computer Remote Control CRC protocol CRC commands have been designed to be incorporated into a remote computer software program driver that will allow an operator to control the programmer The driver generates commands and sends them to the programmer which executes the commands The programmer then returns a response character and in some cases data The driver reacts to the response and uses it to generate messages and prompts for the user Note You do not need to use CRC if you are using TaskLink or are accessing the programmer s built in menu system using HiTerm or a similar product to communicate with the programmer CRC commands offer you an alternative allowing you to create your own custom interface with the programmer This chapter is not intended to be a complete guide to using CRC commands For a more detailed explanation of CRC commands refer to the UniSystem Computer Remote Control Application Note 983 0490 available from Customer Support This chapter contains the following information W System Setup Explains how to se
137. a file For more information or to see if a device supports this capability see the device manufacturer s data book ESD An acronym for Electrostatic Discharge False Positive In programming a misprogrammed fuse that retains minimal operational characteristics so that it passes the fuse test These may be inadequately programmed or over programmed so that they will fail later in circuit File Transfer Operations An operation involving the transfer of data between the programmer and a host Upload and download are file transfer operations D 4 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Filename The name of the file to use during file operations The filename must follow standard DOS conventions up to eight alphanumeric characters followed by an optional three character file extension with the two fields separated by a period An example of a valid filename would be 27256 dat or filename c Fuse Verification A type of post programming device check that checks the fuse pattern programmed into a logic device with the pattern in user memory Fusemap The fuse level description portion of a programmable integrated circuit Fusemaps are typically files in JEDEC Standard 3A and are downloaded to PLD programmers for device implementation Handshaking The required sequence of signals for communication between two units The I O bus protocol for a unit defines its handshaking requirements This is especially true for asynchronous I O systems in wh
138. a quick summary of some of the most often used key commands Key combinations displayed with a dash between them such as CTRL P indicate you should press and hold the first key then press the second key Key combinations displayed with a space between them such as ESC CTRL T indicate you should press and release the first key then press the key combination General Help The general Help text describes the next higher command or menu The general Help changes when you move to another menu level for example when you leave the Self test screen and return to the More Commands menu Context sensitive Help Displayed in reverse video the context sensitive Help describes the item the cursor was on when you called the Help function The information in this field changes when you move the cursor to a different location on the screen Reminder Bar Displayed on the bottom line of the screen the reminder bar shows which function keys you can use to exit Help Accessing Online Help for System Messages Online Help is available for non fatal system messages which result from situations that do not interrupt the programmer s operation Fatal messages which result from situations that do interrupt the programmer s operation are listed and described in Chapter 6 Non fatal error messages are generally displayed in the message bar To display the online Help for a message press F3 or Exit the message Help screen as you would any Help screen
139. a to into the disk drive and return to the beginning of this step Specify the parameters described below Be sure to include a filename Press ENTER to begin the save If you are saving information for a logic device the fuse map security fuse state and vectors are saved The parameters are described below 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands WB Filename Purge File Specifies the name of the disk file to save RAM data to This may be a new or existing filename you want to overwrite If you are writing to an existing file the current data in the file is replaced by the new data The filename must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27c256 dat or 1618 dat Memory Begin Address for memory devices only Specifies the first address in RAM where data is to be saved The default address is 0 User Data Size Specifies the size in hex bytes of the data block to save This value is normally equal to the device size This option appears only if you have selected a memory device More Commands File Operations Purge File This command deletes a file or group of files from a disk To purge a file from a disk follow these steps 1 2 Rename File Insert the disk with the file you want to delete into the disk drive When you select the Purge File command the dialog window fills with a directory listing The programmer displays up to 28 files at one time If there are more than 28 files press CTRL N to display the n
140. about programming errors Logic device verification can include functional testing 2869 1 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 1 Getting Started Session 1 Programming a Device Using TaskLink This tutorial is designed to help you become familiar with TaskLink screens and the steps you will use to program a device For this Session you will use TaskLink in simulation mode and do not need to have your programmer connected uE PT 1 From the TaskLink directory type tl as simulation mode then press ENTER To run TaskLink when you want M to actually program a device kacara Badsaita urlaliratium type tl a then press ENTER i qus E it Tarkbink 2 From the Setup menu select Select Device 3 Scroll through the list until the manufacturer of the device you want to use is highlighted then click OK Pewirs file TIE Frogrammdrg Egr mm Ummrion 5 5H 4 Scroll through the list of device part numbers until the one you want is highlighted then click OK RE PFrecaeminag aaran Feralas 2 58 5 From the Setup menu select General Parameters These parameters determine what i iram device operations are performed rera tme MUS Bem nc Lupur Hpuc iat before during and after E feb o rem 1 amp 3 Ebreirsn r P Shevking pne V Enable Zpecial Para Essam rga iria E IE Conriaxbry Chen icing L Da lt Camcel 3 a LLLI programming To learn the parameter s function highli
141. ack an error message is displayed and the job file must be re recorded Remote Control More Commands Remote Control CRC Mode This command puts the programmer in Computer Remote Control mode To exit remote control type CTRL Z on the terminal s keyboard or send a Z ENTER command from the host computer Chapter 2 Setting Up describes how to set up your system Appendix B Computer Remote Control provides information on how to use CRC and describes the CRC command set 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 59 Commands Self test More Commands Self test The Self test command allows you to test subsystems in the programmer verifying proper operation or isolating possible problem areas An automatic self test is also performed each time the programmer is powered up If errors occur during the powerup test the Self test screen is displayed showing the areas that failed Some self tests such as User RAM test can be disabled so they are not checked during powerup Disabling and enabling self tests is done in the More Commands Interface menu Note For details help on the function of each self test move the cursor to the test you want information about and press F3 For information on how to verify the performance of your programmer refer to Appendix A Halting a Self test You can stop a self test at anytime during its operation by pressing CTRL Z Running the Self test To perform a Self test follow these steps 1 Ma
142. address most are implied Data bytes are addressed sequentially unless an explicit address is included in the data stream This address is preceded by a and an A must contain 2 to 8 hex or 3 to 11 octal characters and must be followed by a comma except for the ASCII Hex Comma format which uses a period The programmer skips to the new address to store the next data byte succeeding bytes are again stored sequentially Each format has an end code which terminates input operations However if a new start code follows within 16 characters of an end code input will continue uninterrupted If no characters come within 2 seconds input operation is terminated After receiving the final end code following an input operation the programmer calculates a sumcheck of all incoming data Optionally a sumcheck can also be entered in the input data stream The programmer compares this sumcheck with its own calculated sumcheck If they match the programmer will display the sumcheck if not a sumcheck error will be displayed Note The sumcheck field consists of either 2 4 hex or 3 6 octal characters sandwiched between the and comma characters The sumcheck immediately follows an end code The sumcheck is optional in the input mode but is always included in the output mode The most significant digit of the sumcheck may be 0 or 1 when expressing 16 bits as 6 octal characters The programmer divides the output data into 8 line blocks Data tran
143. ady to format the disk type Y ENTER at the Are You Sure prompt If you are not ready to format a disk press F2 to return to the File Operations menu 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 57 Commands Job File 3 The programmer checks the disk in the disk drive to ensure it is not a System disk If the programmer detects the Algorithm System disk or the Boot disk this message appears WARNING system disk in drive Hit return to continue Z to abort CAUTION Do NOT format the programmer Algorithm System disk or the Boot disk the original contents of the disk will be lost 4 To format the disk press ENTER If you do not want to format the disk press CTRL Z More Commands Job File The Job File feature allows you to record a series of keystrokes that can be replayed later You can store up to 10 job files on each System disk Each job file can contain up to 499 keystrokes although a typical job file contains 10 to 20 keystrokes Job files allow you to perform setup operations without rekeying all the parameters each time a new device is selected For example if you regularly program five different devices you could create and save five different job files each specifying particular options for a device You can view Job files with the View Directory command Insert the disk with the Job file you want to use and press F4 to display the directory for the current disk A job file appears as JFN JOB N is a number between 0 and 9
144. algorithms 4 34 Add 4 36 Create 4 35 Delete 4 37 updating 4 38 View 4 37 D Data editing 3 25 loading from a device 3 14 4 8 loading from a host 3 22 loading from a PC 3 20 loading from disk 3 17 Data Bits Edit Serial Port Configuration 4 26 Data destination default setting 4 3 Data File Directory 4 53 Data Location Compare Data 4 64 Data Representation Edit Fuse Map 4 45 Data source default setting 4 3 Data translation format default setting 4 3 selecting 4 65 Data Word Width default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 22 Illegal Bit Check Memory Device 4 42 Load Memory Device 4 8 Program Memory Device 4 12 Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Verify Memory Device 4 16 Default factory settings 4 3 Index 2 Delete File Keep Current 4 33 Destination Download Data 4 61 Edit Communication Parameters 4 26 Input from Disk 4 66 Output Logic Data 4 68 Output Memory Data 4 68 Upload Data 4 63 Device Begin Address default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Load Memory Device 4 9 Program Memory Device 4 13 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Device Block Size default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Load Memory Device 4 9 Program Memory Device 4 13 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Device Checks 4 39 Device Configure Command 4 44 Device insertion error when using elastomeric pad error message 6 11 Device List Disk 1 1 1 5 Device overcurrent fault error mes
145. am this data into a device the programmer generates another sumcheck If the two sumchecks match the programmed data and downloaded data match In this Session you learned how to download data to the programmer from a host connected to the programmer s Terminal port The steps are 1 2 3 4 Select the translation format that matched the format of your data file Press M T DTO Go to the download screen Set the parameters on the Download screen to match your setup Enter the host Download Host Command For example on a PC using HiTerm to transfer file filename dat type tr filename dat 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 21 Getting Started Session 9 Loading Data from a Host In this Session you will learn how to download data from a host to the programmer through one of the serial ports on the programmer The procedures in this Session apply to many types of hosts including VAXes UNIX based workstations and DOS based PCs Note If you are using a DOS based PC we recommend that you use HiTerm as your terminal emulation software Downloading a file with HiTerm is covered in the previous Session This Session assumes that you have a host connected to one of the serial ports on the programmer and a terminal connected to the other serial port on the programmer This type of configuration is called Transparent mode Terminal Workstation See Chapter 2 Setting Up for information on connecting a host and terminal to the
146. ame of the disk file containing the fuse data to edit This option appears only if you select disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions W Data Representation X 0 1 Specifies how the data in RAM or data file appears on the terminal s screen Press SPACE to toggle between these options X and unprogrammed state or O and 1 programmed state The following commands are available when you use the fuse editor Command Keystrokes Description Prev Block CTRL P Displays the previous block of fuse data Next Block CTRL N Displays the next block of fuse data 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 45 Commands 4 46 Command Keystrokes Description Jump to Fuse CTRL B Moves the cursor to a specific fuse A highlighted area appears after the B Jump to Fuse prompt at the bottom of the screen Type the fuse number to jump to then press ENTER Restore Block CTRL U Returns the current page of fuse data to its original state before editing that page Only the data visible on the screen is affected by this command This command works only if you have not moved off the currently displayed page of edit data since any changes were made Exit Editor F2 Exits the fuse editor Vector Edit More Commands Edit Data Vector Edit Test Vector Edit The vector editor allows you to edit test vectors you have created for a logic device To edit test vectors follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Set the para
147. ammer to a terminal follow the steps below CAUTION To minimize electromagnetic interference use only properly shielded and terminated cables 2 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual a Connect one end of an RS 232C serial cable to the serial port connector on the back of the terminal Some terminal serial ports may be labeled Modem others may be labeled EIA Refer to the documentation that came with the terminal for more information b If you will not be using transparent mode connect the other end of the cable to the Terminal A port on the back of the programmer then go to step 2 If you will be using transparent mode connect one end of an RS 232C serial cable to the serial port connector on the host If the host is not available locally for instance if the host is a networked VAX connect the serial cable to the appropriate serial port Connect the other end of the cable to the programmer s Remote B port 2 Set the communication parameters Set the communication parameters of the equipment connected to the programmer as follows 9600 baud 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit full duplex and CTS DTR handshaking Note CTS DTR Hardware Handshake is enabled as the default If those signals are not connected the programmer will communicate correctly using XON XOFF Software Handshake which is always used whether or not CTS DTR handshake is enabled If you are using transparent mode set the communication parameters on the ser
148. and Electronic Erase operations To use the device configure feature follow these steps 1 2 Select a device that supports sector configuration To enable electronic erase set the Erase EE device field in the Program screen to YES To access the Device Configure features when in terminal mode press M D D The Sector Configuration screen should be displayed On the Sector Configuration screen use the arrow keys to move from field to field Press SPACE to toggle between Y yes and N no Each sector has the following fields Erase Set to Y if you wish the sector to be erased when a device erase operation is performed Set to N to disable erase on the sector You must enable electronic erase as explained in step 2 above in order to use the Erase feature Program Set to Y if you wish the sector to be programmed when a device program operation is performed Set to N to disable programming on the sector Protect Set to Y if you wish the sector protect to be enabled Set to N to disable protect on the sector Note that not all devices that support sector erase and program also have support for sector protect After you set the Erase Protect and Program fields press F2 to return to the Device Checks menu or press F1 to return to the Main Menu 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Edit Data Use the commands on the Edit Data menu to make changes to data stored in RAM or to data stored in a disk file When you
149. and disk file data with the convention that the LSB of a 16 bit word resides in the even byte of memory Online Help Available throughout the programmer the help screens provide you with both general help and context sensitive help The Help screen is divided into four sections the key listing the general help the specific help and the reminder bar Output Record Size The number of data bytes contained in each data record during upload Overblow A condition in which fuses are blown that should not have been Overblown Fuse A fuse that has been over programmed such that the surrounding area may have been damaged or such that fuse material splatter was created Splatter or rattlers can cause intermittent shorting PAL amp An acronym for Programmable Array Logic PALs are devices with programmable AND and fixed OR arrays This is a slightly different architecture from a PROM or an FPLA Other examples of PAL type architectures from other manufacturers include PEEL and GAL A registered trademark of Advanced Micro Devices Inc Parallel Test Vector Application Use of internal registers to hold and release a full set of test vectors e g 20 for a 10 input 10 output device at once In contrast to serial application parallel does not require accommodations for clocking contention and parallel better matches in circuit PLD operation and board test suites Part Number The number on the device For example if you are usin
150. ansfer the file again Unrecognized characters The data file must begin with characters that match the appropriate in beginning of file format described in the programmer s User Manual Remove any characters in the data file that the programmer will not recognize In general ensure that the format of the data file conforms to the description in the Translation Formats chapter of your User Manual No recognizable end of The data file must end with the proper end of file character or record file character or record in as described in the programmer s User Manual under the I O file translation format type selected Add the end of file character or record if it is missing Of course this does not apply to binary files which have no end of file character or record Additional Information 6 18 This error occurs when a file is transferred from systems such as a PC Sun or VAS over RS 232 or when transfer occurs via the programmer disk drive using More Transfer Input from disk If Data sum 00000000 is displayed no data was transferred Other hex values indicate the file transferred partially or completely The I O translation format parameter is selected in the download screen I O translation formats are described in Chapter 7 To tell which format your data file corresponds to view the file with an ASCII editor or hex editor for a binary file 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages Partial or No Transfer Performed
151. ase by lifting up the front of the door and pressing in slightly on the sides of the door near the hinges 2 Place the door over the adapter as shown in the illustration 3 Guide the hooks into the PPI Base and lower the adapter and door together as a unit onto the base 4 Move the adapter from side to side until it rests on the Base and the holes on the adapter line up with the raised plastic guide pins on the Base 5 While pulling back on the two latches press down on the door until the latches snap into place over the door Make sure that both latches are securely in place Figure 2 15 High Profile PPI Adapter ADAPTER DOOR GUIDE PIN 1 of 2 BASE f 1326 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 25 Inserting Devices in a PPI Adapter PPI adapters accept a variety of device package types and pin configurations The following figures show common device packages and the proper device orientation in the adapter An icon on each adapter indicates proper device orientation TSOP Devices TSOP Thin Small Outline Package devices have two different pinouts m Standard pinout the icon represents pin 1 with a circle in the upper left corner of the device m Reverse pinout the icon represents pin 1 with a triangle in the upper left corner of the device To install a TSOP device in a PPI Base follow the steps below and refer to the illustration 1 Press down on the outer edges of the socket 2 While st
152. ations This value usually equals the device size or to a multiple of the device size for set programming User Data Size works with Total Set Size to determine the total amount of bytes for a set operation This parameter can also indicate the number of bytes in a data transfer operation m Memory Begin Address Specifies the first hex address in RAM to load data from a device Also specifies the first address where a device is programmed verified If the user memory is RAM it is a beginning RAM address If the user memory is disk it is a beginning disk file address The Memory Begin Address must be an even address if you selected a 16 bit device The default address is O 4 22 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands WB Device Begin Address Specifies the first address used in device operations This option is used for memory devices only WB Device Block Size Defines the size in hex of device data used in device operations When you select a device Device Block Size is set to the device size and normally does not need to be changed It is also automatically set to a smaller value if the Device Begin Address is nonzero This parameter can be changed if desired If a zero is entered the Device Block Size is set to the device size m Illegal Bit Check Y N Enables or disables the illegal bit test This test compares data in a device against data in the programmer s RAM to determine if the device has already programmed locations of incorrect
153. ay be tested For example the waveform circuit test must pass before the pin control unit test executes Note All the installed programmer hardware must pass self test before any other operations can take place Transfer Data More Commands Transfer Data Use the commands on the Transfer Data menu to move data files back and forth between the programmer and a host computer The Transfer Data menu contains the following seven commands Download Data Upload Data Compare Data Format Select Input From Disk Output to Disk and Serial Output Each of these commands is described in this section Download Data More Commands Transfer Data Download Data Use the Download Data command to specify downloading parameters and to execute the download operation Downloading moves a data file from a host computer to the programmer s RAM or disk Before you download data specify the variables for the following parameters then enter a command in the Download Host Command field The information in the command line is a command that your host computer the computer containing the file to download recognizes as an instruction to begin the download operation Finally press ENTER to execute the download When the download is complete the programmer displays Data transfer complete W Source R T Specifies what programmer port is connected to your host computer Press SPACE to toggle between R Remote port and T Terminal port m Destination
154. ceive Data Carries the received data 4 Request to Send Held high by the programmer 5 Clear to Send A high enables the programmer to transmit data Used for hardware handshaking A low inhibits data transmission from the programmer 6 Data Set Ready Held high when the remote source is ready to send or receive data A low inhibits data transmission from the programmer 7 Signal Ground Provides a reference ground for all signals on the cable 8 Data Carrier Held high when the modem detects a carrier A Detect low inhibits the programmer from transmitting data 9 19 No Connection 20 Data Terminal Pulled high by the programmer to indicate it is Ready ready to receive data Pulled low to signal the remote computer to stop sending data Used for hardware handshaking 21 25 No Connection DCE 1 Ground Provides a safety ground connection 2 Receive Data Carries the received data from the DTE device to the programmer 3 Transmit Data Carries the transmitted data from the programmer to the DTE device Request to Send Held high by the programmer 5 Clear to Send A high on this line from the programmer means that it is ready to receive data Used for hardware handshaking 6 Data Set Ready Held high when the programmer is ready to transfer data 7 Signal Ground Provides a reference ground for all signals on the cable 8 Data Carrier Held high by the programmer 9 19 No Connection 20 Data Terminal A high enables the programmer
155. cific information the Display Device Footnote feature enabled as the default displays the information If this feature is not enabled the programmer prompts you to press F3 or to view the information You can enable Display Device Footnote under More Commands Configure System Edit Programming Parameters If there is more than one screen of device specific information press CTRL N to view the next screen of information Press CTRL P to view the previous screen of information Press F2 to exit the screen The device used in this Session does not require any online information To select a device you must first select the Manufacturer of the device then the part number of the device Some devices have special information available online that can be viewed after a device is selected 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 4 Selecting a Keep Current Algorithm This Session describes how to select a device that is supported by a Keep Current algorithm you downloaded from the Data I O Web site or the Keep Current Bulletin Board System BBS See Appendix C for more information The Keep Current algorithm s should be on a 3 5 inch disk formatted in your programmer Note The device you use may not have the same capabilities as the device used in this Session Insert the Keep Current Algorithm Disk Insert the 3 5 inch disk containing the Keep Current algorithm s into the programmer disk drive Select the Kee
156. commands Edit Memory More Commands Edit Data Edit Memory Edit Memory Data Use the Edit Memory command to edit the data for a memory device To edit data stored in memory follow these steps 1 2 Specify the memory editing parameters Press ENTER to enter the editor Depending on the selected word width the 4 8 or 16 bit word width memory editor screen appears To change data move the cursor to the memory location to be changed and type the new characters over the old ones Enter the data either in hex or ASCII mode select the mode using TAB as described below The cursor s location is shown as a hex address at the top of the screen The parameters and editor commands are described below Source R D Specifies the source of the data to be edited Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D Disk Filename Specifies the name of the disk file containing the data to edit This option appears only if you select disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions An example of a valid filename is 27c256 dat The file must be an absolute binary file Edit Data Word Width 4 8 16 32 Selects a 4 8 16 or 32 bit Data Word Width Press SPACE to toggle between the 4 8 and 16 bit options If you select 8 the editor treats all addresses as byte addresses If you select 16 or 32 the editor treats all addresses as 16 or 32 bit word addresses and the Edit Odd Even Byte Swap feature is enabled
157. cribed below Reject Option C S Selects the number of times the device is pulsed with programming voltage before it is rejected as unprogrammable C Selects the number of pulses specified by the manufacturer Unless you are programming devices to a strict military specification you should leave this option set to C which is the default S Selects either one pulse or military specification number of pulses Logic Verification F V A Specifies the type of logic verification to perform Press SPACE to step through the following three choices All A AII directs the programmer to perform both fuse verification and vector verification This is the default setting Fuse Verification F Fuse Verification checks the fuse pattern programmed into the device with the pattern in the programmer s memory Vector Verification V Vector Verification functionally tests the device using structured test vectors stored in memory Vector testing for logic devices with more than 44 pins 2900 or 84 pins 3900 is not supported Verify Passes 0 1 2 Selects the number of times to test the device O do not to test the device 1 test the device once at the device manufacturer s nominal Vcc 2 Verify the device at the manufacturer s recommended high and low Vcc levels This is the default Verify Data Format B H Specifies either B binary or H hex for the mis verify data display format on the Verify Memory Device screen Algori
158. ctor preamble The programmer detected an error with the format of a disk Use a different disk or reformat the existing disk and try the operation again FILE ERROR No disk in drive The programmer tried to access a disk file but the disk drive is empty Insert the disk with the file to be used 6 4 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages FILE ERROR Track not found The programmer cannot find the disk track associated with the system file or cannot find the data needed to support whatever action you just requested If you try the operation again and the error message reappears use a new disk or a new copy of the required software or data File not initialized Enter C to initialize any other key to quit The file you selected is not in a format that is compatible with the feature you want to use To use the fuse editor when the data file you have is not formatted for the selected device type C to reformat the data file so it is compatible with the device Formatting and initializing user disk A disk is being formatted Hit PF3 or to view device specific message The selected device has specific information associated with it Hit return to continue Z to abort A Verify operation failed To ignore the warning and proceed with the verify operation press ENTER To investigate the verify errors press CTRL Z to display the Verify screen Hit return to switch user menu port Z to abort This message is displayed when
159. curity fuse already blown If you continue by pressing ENTER the program operation will be performed and previous data in the device will be overwritten System error Please contact Data I O Contact Data I O Customer Support System parameters restored The configuration file from the Restore System Parameters screen was restored System parameters saved The programmer saved the set of system parameters Task error The programmer has experienced an error that it cannot recover from turn the programmer off and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support Testing A self test is in progress TEST HALTED Socket not empty hit return to continue Z to abort The self test you are trying to run requires that no devices are in the device socket Remove the socketed part and retry the operation or type CTRL Z to cancel the operation CAUTION If you press the carriage return key the programmer will run the test and the socketed device could be damaged Transferring data This message appears while a data transfer operation is being performed transparent mode The programmer entered transparent mode To exit type ESC CTRL T 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 9 Messages Tre init err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support User RAM sumcheck ssssssss This message co
160. d N disables this option W RAM Device Selection Y N Selecting Y causes the programmer to load default Algorithm Type D algorithms into RAM This feature is limited to programmers with 8MB of RAM N disables this option and frees up any RAM used by the option When you select a device after you power up with this option enabled the programmer loads the algorithms from the Algorithm disk that is inserted in the disk drive and displays the following message Loading device algorithm file into user RAM You are prompted to insert a different disk if you select a device whose algorithm is not yet loaded into RAM Serial I O Port Configuration More Commands Configure System Edit Serial I O Use the Edit Serial I O Port Configuration command to specify the communications parameters for the programmer s two serial ports Use this command when you connect equipment to the programmer s Terminal and Remote ports so they can be compatible with your terminal or host computer To save the settings of the two ports for use in a future session save them in a configuration file A change in the serial port parameters does not become effective until you press ENTER If terminal settings are changed a message prompts you to press ENTER again after you alter your terminal to match the new settings Output to the terminal is suspended until you press ENTER the second time The parameters and their settings are described below E Baud Rate
161. d PGAs during programming Memory Begin Address The first address in hex of the first byte of data to be used in device operations If the data source destination is RAM the memory begin address is a RAM address If the data source destination is disk the memory begin address is the offset for a disk file Message Bar The fourth line of the screen The programmer displays system and error messages in the message bar The action symbol is also located in the message bar MicroBGA Also nBGA or mBGA short for Micro Ball Grid Array A small thin device package with area array compliant bumps Trademarked by Tessera Inc Next Device Used during serial set programming this value specifies the next device in the set For example if you are using 8 bit devices and have specified a word width of 16 bits it will require two devices to store each 16 bit word Depending on the value entered the data programmed into the next device will come from either even addresses or odd addresses 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 7 Non default Parameters The Non default parameters screen displays a selected group of parameters on a parameter entry screen To display all the available parameters press F4 to toggle to the All Parameters screen Odd even Byte Swap Used during device operations for 16 bit devices this option swaps the Most Significant Bytes MSB and the Least Significant Bytes LSB of 16 bit words The programmer stores RAM data
162. d Standard Definitions 5 28 The Backus Naur Form BNF is used in the description here to define the syntax of the JEDEC format BNF is a shorthand notation that follows these rules denotes is defined as Characters enclosed by single quotes are literals required Angle brackets enclose identifiers Square brackets enclose optional items Braces enclose a repeated item The item may appear zero or more times Vertical bars indicate a choice between items Repeat counts are given by a n suffix For example a 6 digit number would be defined as lt number lt lt digit gt 6 For example in words the definition of a person s name reads The full name consists of an optional title followed by a first name a middle name and a last name The person may not have a middle name or may have several middle names The titles consist of Mr Mrs Ms Miss and Dr The BNF definition for a person s name is full name lt title gt f name gt lt m name gt lt l name gt title Mr Mrs Ms Miss Dr The following standard definitions are used throughout the rest of this document digit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 hex digit digit A B C D E F binary digit 0 1 number digit digit del space carriage return delimiter del lt del gt
163. d defines the states of fuses that are not explicitly defined in the L or K fields If no F field is specified all fuse states must be defined by L or K fields The C field the fuse information checksum field is used to detect transmitting and receiving errors The field contains a 16 bit sum modulus 65535 computed by adding 8 bit words containing the fuse states for the entire device The 8 bit words are formed as shown in the following figure Unused bits in the final 8 bit word are set to zero before the checksum is calculated Word 00 msb isb Fuse No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 01 msb Isb Fuse No 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Word 62 msb Isb Fuse No 503 499 498 497 496 3980 3900 2900 User Manual EE LEE LoT HB gie d 0 EU Following is an example of full specification of the L C and F fields FO LO 01010101 L0008 01010111 L1000 0101 CO19E Following is an alternate way of defining the same fuse states using the K field FO KO 55 K0008 57 K1000 5 CO19E Another example where F and C are not specified LO200 01101010101010101011 010111010110100010010010010 The Security Fuse Field G security fuse G binary digit The JEDEC G field is used to enable the security fuse of some logic devices To enable the fuse send a 1 in the G field G1 The Note Field N lt note gt N lt field characters The note field is used in JEDEC transmission to
164. d the checksum of the transfer address and byte count An optional abort record contains 2 start characters slashes followed by an arbitrary string of ASCII characters Any characters between a carriage return and a are ignored 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 21 Translation Formats Motorola EXORmacs Format Code 87 Figure 5 14 5 22 Motorola data files may begin with an optional sign on record initiated by the start characters SO Data records start with an 8 or 10 character prefix and end with a 2 character suffix Figure 5 14 shows a series of Motorola EXORmacs data records Motorola EXORmacs Format example Optional Sign On Record S00B00004441544120492F4FF3 Checksum d S214FF0000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC 1130010FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEC 1130020FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDC Data 1130030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCC Records 1130040FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFBC 9030000FC C End of File Record T ao I Checksum Start i Character Checksum Byte Count Address LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return line feed and nulls determined by null count 0086 3 Each data record begins with the start characters S1 or S2 S1 if the following address field has 4 characters S2 if it has 6 characters The third and fourth characters represent the byte count which expresses the number of data address and checksum
165. daily operation b Install a Base in the programmer and remove any devices in the socket see page 2 11 c Turn on the power switch on the programmer back panel see page 2 13 The green Power Terminal and Self Test LEDs should light After about four minutes the Self Test LED will turn off see page 2 14 3 Install TaskLink in the PC Insert the TaskLink disk into the disk drive of your PC then type drive install for instance a install to begin the installation program If you accept the default settings TaskLink is installed in a c tl directory 4 Start TaskLink a From the DOS prompt type cd tl to change to the TaskLink directory b Type tl a to open TaskLink in Administrative mode In Windows you can create program items or shortcuts to run TaskLink The command to run TaskLink in Administrative mode is tl exe a a hidden file A DOS mouse driver must be installed if you plan to control TaskLink with a mouse To access TaskLink commands using the keyboard press Alt then press the highlighted letter Use the arrow and Tab keys to move around 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 Setup TaskLink a From TaskLink s main screen select Options Alt O press T select 2900 3900 3980 then press OK Press H Handler Type select No handler used then press OK Press P Programmer Port Select COM1 or COM2 9600 None 8 and 1 Select None for Host Port and Port options Press OK After the Self Test
166. decimal digit E xxx Xxxx represents a string of characters Filenames are limited to 12 total characters name eight characters a period one character and an extension three characters For example nn02 indicates that you may precede the 02 command with two decimal digits 3980 3900 2900 User Manual B 5 Computer Remote Control Summary of Standard CRC Commands Command Description Response Invert RAM gt hhhhhh Select device begin address gt hhhhhh Select memory block size gt hhhhhh lt Select memory begin address gt nn Select I O timeout gt fffppp or ffpp Select device type gt CffA Enter translation format gt B Blank check gt C Compare to port gt D Set odd parity gt E Set even parity gt F Error status inquiry HHHHHHHH gt G Configuration inquiry DD gt H No operation gt I Input from port gt J Set 1 stop bit gt K Set 2 stop bits gt L Load RAM from device gt hhM Enter record size gt N Set no parity gt O Output to port gt P Program device gt Q Swap nibbles gt R Return status of device AAAAA BB C gt S View sumcheck HHHH gt T Illegal bit test gt hhU Set nulls gt V Verify device gt hhhhhhhhw Set I O offset gt X Error code inquiry HH HH Y Display parity errors HHHH gt Z Exit remote control none View device family pinout code FFFPPP gt Move memory block gt hh Clear fill RAM with data gt B 6 3980 3900 2900 User
167. described in the ASCII Hex and Octal figure Transmission stops when the specified number of bytes has been transmitted Address specification is required for only the first data byte in the transfer An address must have 1 to 4 hex characters and must be followed by a space The programmer records the next hexadecimal character after the space as the start of the first data byte A carriage return must follow the space if the start code M is used Succeeding bytes are recorded sequentially Each data record is followed by a comma if the next record is not preceded by an address or by a semicolon if it starts with an address Records consist of data bytes expressed as 2 hexadecimal characters and followed by either a comma or semicolon and a carriage return Any characters received between a comma or semicolon and a carriage return will be ignored by the programmer The carriage return character is significant to this format because it can signal either the continuation or the end of data flow if the carriage return is preceded by a comma or semicolon more data must follow the absence of a comma or semicolon before the carriage return indicates the end of transmission Output data records are followed by either a comma or a semicolon and a carriage return The start of file records are expressed exactly as for input 5 16 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Fairchild Fairbug Code 80 In the Fairbug format input and ou
168. display the Communication Parameters screen If this screen is not displayed turn off the programmer reconnect the PC cable to the Terminal A port then return to step 1 Press F1 to display the Main Menu then continue with the next step If the Main Menu is not displayed turn off the programmer reconnect the PC cable to the Terminal A port then return to step 1 High Speed Download is now enabled for this session Changing the Powerup Defaults 2 18 If you do not save the changes you made you can use High Speed Download for the current session but you must repeat the procedure to enable it the next time you turn on the programmer To make High Speed Download part of your powerup defaults follow the steps below for the complete list of powerup defaults see page 4 3 1 From the Main Menu press MC S to display the Save System Parameters screen Up to ten configuration files are displayed Press 1 ENTER The programmer displays Parameter Entered Press ENTER to save the current settings as the Powerup Defaults The action symbol rotates as the programmer saves the settings When finished the programmer displays the following message System parameters saved High Speed Download will now be available whenever you turn on the programmer To learn how to download files to the programmer using High Speed Download see the tutorial Session on page 3 21 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 8 Install Devices Use the fo
169. dit Screen ADDRESS aaaaeeaa 90800018 90000020 aaaaanaga3a 0aG0G4a 86648658 aaaaaaca 20000077A 00000088 aaaaeasa GGaaGAa 6GG0GBG aaaeaCca GGae0eDea G6GGG0ER GGG0GFU gt gt aoz gt 20 54 65 7a 64 68 6C ZE Z0 ua ua aa Prev block Next block Delete byte Start stop T z 68 78 TZ 61 61 6F 2G zo aa aa aa Z 28 69 61 TZ 74 73 61 2G 26 aa a 08 E Exchange 3 28 73 6D 67 65 28 64 28 26 aa 08 CURSOR AT LOCATION 080000080 HE 4 za 28 78 TZ za 62 65 28 28 aa aa Ba 8 BIT XADEC IMAL 5 b f 8 Z Z0 20 Z 69 73 ZU 61 6C 65 20 GF 61 6D 6D 63 74 68 61 74 65 65 GE 20 64 2 69 6E 20 20 20 20 Z0 28 20 20 GG gg BA aa 988 GB BA BA 98 O8 BA BA g Z0 6E 66 6E 28 28 74 28 28 aa aa aa a zo zo 28 67 2G 28 6F 20 28 aa ua aa B z 2G 73 za 2G 28 z 28 28 aa aa aa F Search pattern B Jump to address insert Tab with ADDRESSING C 24 2G 6F z 2G 24 2G 2G 24 aa aa aa D 28 Zu 6D 28 2G 28 28 2G 28 aa 212 aa E 28 28 65 28 28 28 za 28 28 aa aa 212 U PFZ Toggle Hex ASCII modes ASCII 01234567896BCDEF This is an example of some prrgramming date that has been loaded into Restore block Exit editor The edit screen displays 256 bytes at a time The reminder bar at the bottom of the screen display
170. dress 20 20 00 07 00 o08 00 08H00 00jJ 00 00 00 FF 00 FA Number of bytes in LS Word 00 00j 00 00 02 00 26 02 03 38 FF FF FF FF FF O2 thefollowing record Tert 30 38 FF FF FF FF FF 02 03 38 FF FF FF FF FF 02 hotincluding header 92 MS Word 03 38 FF FF FF FF FF 02 03 16 75 A8 00 75 82 10 75 DO 00 75 B8 10 75 89 20 75 88 40 75 98 50 75 97 00 E5 99 75 80 00 75 90 EO 75 AO 40 75 BO FF 74 58 F5 70 F5 71 75 75 00 75 76 FF 51 FD E5 90 54 60 B4 0005 75 8D A0 80 13 B4 20 05 75 BD F4 80 OB B4 40 05 75 8D E8 80 03 75 8D FD 75 A8 90 75 99 52 90 00 AD 7A 00 11 D5 31 02 51 79 90 00 B7 7A 10 11 D5 31 02 51 79 90 00 C1 7A 20 11 D5 31 02 51 79 90 00 CB 7A 30 11 D5 31 02 51 79 80 D2 03 07 0B 13 11 17 1F 1D 23 00 02 06 OA 12 10 16 1E 1C 22 00 01 05 09 0D OF 15 19 1B 21 04 08 OC OF 14 18 1A 20 14 78 00 EA 44 40 AO AF E8 93 24 30 F9 87 80 EA 54 4F F5 AO Number of bytesin 75 AO 4F B8 OA EC EA 54 3F F5 AO 78 28 00 00 FF Number of bytes in the following record 100 FA 00 FAJ DO OO DO 00 00 D8 FA 8A AO 22 A8 71 thefollowing record not including header mo Rs 7n 01 22 E6 08 B8 70 02 78 58 88 71 F9 B4 or extra byte if present gt o ng 72 90 01 22 93 73 06 30 Data Record End of first 124 record words Load Address 26 B4 5A 07 51 FD LS Word nn RNA BE B4 Load Address Data Record MS Word This data translation format was generated by a dump utility for il
171. drive Insert the Algorithm System disk into the disk drive and try the operation again Non blank device Hit return to continue Z to abort The programmer performed a blank check on a device and detected bits that are not in their erased or blank state and are not illegal bits Before this test can be performed the Blank Check option in the Programming Parameters screen must be enabled If you press ENTER the programmer will proceed with the Programming operation and program over the existing data If you press CTRL Z the Program screen will reappear so you can try the operation again with another device Odd Memory Begin Address is not allowed The Memory Begin Address is set to an odd number and you tried a device operation on a 16 bit or larger device Set the Memory Begin Address to an even number and retry the device operation OPERATION COMPLETE The operation you selected has been completed you may now proceed with other operations OPERATION COMPLETE Device hhhhhhhh This message appears after a successful Compare Electronic ID operation hhhhhhhh represents the device s electronic ID OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck hhhhhhhh This message appears after the completion of a Program Load or Verify operation hhhhhhhh represents the sumcheck of the data that was programmed into the device Vector test not supported will be appended to the message when you attempt to perform a structured vector test on devices with
172. e 4 5 translation format session 3 19 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Selecting a device session 3 9 Selecting a Keep Current algorithm session 3 11 Self test 4 60 continuous 4 60 halting 4 60 interpreting 2 14 4 60 LED 1 3 on powerup 2 14 4 61 one pass 4 60 performance verification 1 7 running 4 60 Serial Output 4 67 Serial port configuration changing 4 25 Serial Vector Test Edit Programming Parameters 4 24 Sessions editing data 3 25 loading data from a host 3 22 loading data from a PC 3 20 loading data from disk 3 17 loading from a device 3 14 navigating through menus 3 5 programming a device using TaskLink 3 programming a memory device 3 27 selecting a device 3 9 selecting a Keep Current algorithm 3 11 selecting a translation format 3 19 verifying a device 3 29 Set Auto Increment Load Memory Device 4 10 Program Memory Device 4 13 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Set Sumcheck Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Setting programming parameters 4 21 Setting up the programmer 2 1 connecting to a host 2 5 connecting to a PC 2 2 connecting to a terminal 2 6 SmartPort 2 8 Software Data Protection Program Memory Device 4 13 Source Compare Data 4 64 Download Data 4 61 Edit Communication Parameters 4 26 Edit Fuse Map 4 45 Edit Memory 4 49 Edit Test Vectors 4 46 Index 7 Output Logic Data 4 68 Output Memory Data 4 68 Output to Disk 4 67 Upload Data 4 63 SPA bl
173. e AMD 27256 supports Electronic ID while the Hitachi 27256 does not Load the Data File Before you can program the device you must perform the following steps to load your data into RAM 1 Create a binary file on a disk 2 Insert the disk into the programmer disk drive 3 From the More Commands File Operations menu select the Load File command to load the data file into RAM This operation is described in detail in Session 6 Set the Parameters After the data is loaded in RAM select Program Device from the Main Menu The Program Memory Device screen is displayed see Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 Program Memory Device Screen Non default Parameters FILENAME SAMPLE BIN RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REV X XX Y YY 2 2 MANUFACTURER AMD PART Z27Z56 I 0 FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS MAIN MENU PROGRAM MEMORY DEVICE non default gt Select device Source CRAM RI Quick copy Data word width 8 Load device Next device 1 Total set size Verify device User data size Next operation begins at a More commands Return Execute F4 Select mode options F1 Main menu FZ Preu menu F3 or Help One of the following two Program Memory Device screens is displayed m The Non default Parameters screen the default screen displays a subset of the Program Memory Device parameters supported by the selected device see Figure 3 19 Usually these are the only parameters you need to set W The All Parameters screen displays all the
174. e and MatchBooks provide support for over 3000 devices in PLCC packages The optional PPI Base and adapters support a wide variety of packages including SOIC TSOP QFP and BGA 3980 Programming System In addition to the features of the 3900 the 3980 has an internal hard disk drive the Mass Storage Module that provides 80 MB of storage space for system software and device programming algorithms so you do not have to insert a Boot disk when you power up or switch disks during operation Configurations You can set up your programmer in the following configurations m Connected to a PC using TaskLink Software see page 2 2 or HiTerm Terminal Emulator see page 2 4 to control the programmer W Connected to a Host such as a workstation which you can use to control the programmer and store data files see page 2 5 W Connected to a standalone Terminal such as the DEC VT 100 Qume VT 101 and Wyse WY 30 40 70 family of terminals see page 2 6 Device Support The most current list of supported devices can be found on our Web site at http www data io com The Device List Disk which is shipped with the programmer also lists the supported devices The many other features of the Device List Disk are described on page 1 5 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 1 1 Introduction Contents of Package Your Programming System package should contain the items shown in Figure 1 1 Figure 1 1 Contents of the Programming System
175. e commands to set up unique parameter files for each device type you want to program then save those values from the More Commands Configure System Save screen These parameter settings can then be loaded at a later time using the More Commands Configure System Restore screen Device Checks Performs device tests on socketed devices Edit Data Allows you to edit RAM or disk data Separate editing features exist for logic and memory devices File Operations Performs various operations on the programmer s disk files such as loading saving deleting or renaming a file Job File Allows you to play back a series of keystrokes This is useful if you are consistently programming the same devices Up to ten job files may be stored on any Algorithm System disk Remote Control Switches the programmer to remote mode where it will accept commands sent from a remote computer Appendix B Computer Remote Control lists the commands recognized by the programmer in remote mode Self test Performs diagnostic checks on the programmer s circuitry Transfer Data Allows you to upload or download data to or from the programmer Also allows you to select or change the data translation format Yield Tally Allows you to view or clear programming statistics 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Configure System More Commands Configure System The Configure System commands allow you to accomplish these basic tasks WB Change communications
176. e data for the least column row address continuing with increasing row addresses until the first column is filled then incrementing the column address etc tag 8 Used This packet signals the end of the packet list in the POF This packet must be the Nth packet where N is the packet count declared in the POF header The CRC field is a 16 bit Cyclic Redundancy Check computed on all bytes in the file up to but not including the CRC value itself If this CRC value is zero the CRC check should be ignored tag 9 Skipped tag 10 Used This packet allows the POF to contain test vectors for post programming testing purposes Each vector is a character string and uses the 20 character codes for vector bits defined in JEDEC standard 3A section 7 0 tag 12 Skipped tag 14 Read This packet defines the number of programmable elements in the target device tag 17 Read 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats This packet defines a group of logical addresses in the target device and associates logical data with these addresses The addresses comprise a linear region in the logical address space bounded on the low end by the starting address and extending upward by the address count specified in the packet The starting address and address count are each specified by 4 byte fields 32 bits Absolute Binary Format Code 16 Absolute Binary format is a literal representation of the data to be transferred and no
177. e disk duplication Press ENTER to proceed with the operation Disk error terminal type not saved You tried to save the terminal type as one of the powerup parameters but the disk is either full or is defective Disk open error Type ESC and Control W to reboot You tried to boot the programmer without the Boot disk in the disk drive Insert the Boot disk in the disk drive and reboot the programmer Disk write protected terminal type not saved You tried to save the terminal type as one of the powerup parameters but the disk is write protected Move the write protect slide so the hole through the disk is blocked Done The operation is completed Proceed to the next operation you want to perform Done Bytes copied nnnnnn This message is displayed after the Copy File operation is complete It displays the size of the file that was copied in hexadecimal bytes Proceed to the next operation you want to perform Electronic ID verify error Device hhhhhh See page 6 16 End of file You are viewing the last block of data using the memory editor vector editor fuse editor or the over under blow feature Fatal system err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support FILE ERROR Can t reach track 0 A fatal disk error occurred The disk drive may be faulty Contact Data I O Customer Support FILE ERROR Error in se
178. e number of milliseconds the programmer will insert as a time delay between characters transmitted to the host computer during uploading The time delay is specified in tenths of milliseconds Transparent Mode One of the programmer s three operating modes The programmer is controlled from either a dedicated terminal or from a workstation running a terminal emulation package TSOP An acronym for Thin Small Outline Package a type of device package A rectangular device with gull wing leads on the short sides Also called TSOP I Underblow A condition in which fuses that should have been blown or programmed were not Underblown Fuse A fuse that did not disconnect as per manufacturer s specifications These fuses may test properly but tend to be more prone to grow back when in circuit rendering the PLD useless Universal Pin Driver A pin driver with the ability to supply power and ground to every pin With Universal Pin Drivers you can program and test devices without having to use pin out adapters and characterizers Universal PLD Programmer A programmer that can apply power ground and any programming pulse required to program any fuse technology device Upload Data A file transfer operation that involves sending data from the programmer to a host Upload Host Command A command that is sent from the programmer to the host during an upload The command tells the host what to do with the incoming data Upload Wait The length of t
179. e programmer The steps were 1 2 3 4 Select the translation format that matched the format of your data file From the Main Menu press M T D to go to the download screen Set the parameters on the Download screen to match your setup Enter the host Download Host Command For example to transfer the file filename dat you would enter cat filename dat for a UNIX based host If you are using a VMS based host you would enter type filename dat 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 10 Editing Data In the previous Session you loaded a data file into the programmer In this Session you will learn how to edit that data file 1 Return to the Main Menu and select a memory device See Session 3 2 Select More Commands Edit Data from the Main Menu then select Edit Memory to display the Edit Programmer Memory screen see Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 Edit Programmer Memory Screen FILENAME 170 FORMAT 1 EDIT MENU Edit memory Complement Move data Fill memory MANUFACTURER AMD RAM AVATL PART 27256 Intel Intellec 8 MDS Return F1 128 OF 128KB REU X XX Y Y ZZ EDIT PROGRAMMER MEMORY Source RAM Edit data word width 4 8 Edit address offset Edit begin address Execute Main menu FZ Prev menu 16 F3 or 7 Help 3 Set the parameters as shown in Figure 3 17 then press ENTER The Edit screen is displayed see Figure 3 18 Figure 3 18 E
180. e programmer through one of the serial ports on the programmer HiTerm was written with this programming system in mind and supports 115 2K baud downloading and binary transfer while some other terminal emulators do not HiTerm opens and closes files automatically with other terminal emulators you must do that yourself For this Session you need the following W A DOS based PC connected to the programmer described in Chapter 2 W HiTerm properly installed on the PC connected to the programmer See Chapter 2 Setting Up for quick installation instructions for HiTerm or the HiTerm User Manual W Your programmer configured for High Speed Download which allows you to download data files at 115 2K baud See page 2 17 to configure the programmer for High Speed Download W A file to be transferred We suggest you use sample dat a sample data file on the HiTerm disk If you use a different data file substitute its filename for sample dat If its format is not Intel Intellec 8 MDS use the Format Select command see Session 6 to select the correct format Prepare the Programmer 1 From the Main Menu press M T D to get to the Download Data from Host screen shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Download Data from Host Screen 3 20 FILENAME RAM AVAIL Z176KB REV Xx WY MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 I U FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS N TRANSFER MENU DOWNLOAD DATA FROM HOST Source Remote Terminal gt i Upload data Dest
181. ear randomly anywhere within the object file and affects the absolute memory address of subsequent data records in the file The following example illustrates how the extended segment address is used to determine a byte address 3980 3900 2900 User Manual EE EE LoT HB gie quite Problem Find the address for the first data byte for the following file 02 0000 04 0010 EA 02 0000 02 1230 BA 10 0045 00 55AA FF BC Solution Step 1 Find the extended linear address offset for the data record 0010 in the example Step 2 Find the extended segment address offset for the data record 1230 in the example Step 3 Find the address offset for the data from the data record 0045 in the example Step 4 Calculate the absolute address for the first byte of the data record as follows 00100000 Linear address offset shifted left 16 bits 12300 Segment address offset shifted left 4 bits 0045 Address offset from data record 00112345 32 bit address for first data byte The address for the first data byte is 112345 Note Always specify the address offset when using this format even when the offset is zero During output translation the firmware will force the record size to 16 decimal if the record size is specified greater than 16 There is no such limitation for record sizes specified less than 16 03 Start Segment Address Record This record which specifies bits 4 19 of the execution start address for the objec
182. eck parameter displayed on the Programming Parameters screen via More Configure system Edit Programming options from the Main Menu If this error occurs during a programming operation but not during a load operation a device test may be causing the problem Disable all device checks such as Device check and Illegal bit check listed on the Program Device screen by changing the appropriate fields from Y to N Press the F4 key to display all parameters Improper algorithm applied due to possible software bug If this error occurs on devices with old and recent date codes there may be a software bug in the device s programming algorithm Workaround On the Device List find an earlier version of programmer software that supports your device boot your programmer with this version and repeat the operation Note Contact Data I O Customer Support and report your findings Programmer hardware problem If an overcurrent error occurs with different devices a hardware problem may be indicated To determine whether a hardware malfunction exists perform a self test Main Menu More Commands Self test with no devices in the socket If the self test shows a malfunction make the necessary service arrangements Additional Information This error is reported by the hardware overcurrent detection circuitry on the programmer The trip level for the overcurrent error is set by the programming algorithm From the error alone it is not poss
183. ed 58 ASCII Hex With SOH 96 HP Unix 86 Tek Hex 53 ASCII Hex With STX 99 Intel Hex 32 Sa TI SDSMAC 52 ASCII Hex Apostrophe 83 Intel Intellec 8 MDS B4 TI SDSMAC 3205 57 ASCII Hex SMS 88 Intel MCS 86 Hex Obj 55 ASCII Hex SP With SOH 98 Intel OMF2Z86 50 ASCII Hex SP With STX 97 Intel OMF386 Select translation format Fi Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or Help Return Execute You must choose a translation format to use Normally you would select the same format as your data file For this Session select the Intel 8 bit Hex data translation format Select the translation format just as you selected a device manufacturer find what you are looking for and type the number beside it For the format selection screen shown in Figure 3 14 you would type 83 then press ENTER to select the Intel 8 bit Hex Intel Intellec 8 MDS translation format When you press ENTER the programmer configures itself for the selected translation format and returns to the Transfer Menu Note that the I O Format line in the status window now reads I O FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS Use the Format Select command on the Transfer Data menu to select a new translation format Locate the desired format type the number to the left of the format then press ENTER 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 19 Getting Started Session 8 Loading Data from a PC Using HiTerm In this Session you will learn how to use HiTerm to download data from a PC to th
184. een if you chose C Note If the screen you want to view is not displayed select the correct algorithm type as described above 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 5 Commands 4 In the Manufacturer field enter the number that is next to the item you want to select For example to select KEEP CURRENT type 1 in the manufacturer field then press ENTER The upper right corner of the screen displays the total number of screens pages and the page you are on Press CTRL N to go to the next page or CTRL P to go to the previous page When you select a manufacturer you can set the device type filter to the appropriate setting for the device you are using Logic Only displays only logic devices Memory amp Emicros displays memory and emicro devices and All displays all device types Press SPACE to cycle through the filter types The list changes accordingly 5 After you select the manufacturer a list of devices is displayed Find the device you want to use then enter the number next to that device If you do not see the device you are looking for press CTRL N to move to the next page or press CTRL P to return to the previous page 6 After you enter the correct number press ENTER The programmer returns to the Main Menu and the status window shows the device you selected Cross Programming Cross programming allows a single generic programmable logic device PLD to be configured as any one of many PLD architectures Consequently
185. eep Current algorithm works with a specific version of system software When the programmer displays the available Keep Current algorithm s on the Keep Current Part List screen it filters out the Keep Current algorithms that are invalid and incompatible with the installed version of system software A Keep Current algorithm and a version of the programmer system software are compatible when the numbers to the left and immediate right of the decimal point match as shown in the following table System Algorithm Software Version Version Compatible X 31 X 3 Yes X 3 X 3 Yes X 2 X 3 No Keep Current algorithms are valid for one major release of software because the Keep Current algorithms are included with the next release of system software The following example illustrates a typical Keep Current scenario 1 In May you update your system software to version X 4 At the same time you enroll in the Keep Current Subscription Service 2 In June Cruft Technologies announces a new device the Cruft 1263 A week later Data I O announces support for the Cruft 1263 and places a Keep Current algorithm for the Cruft 1263 on the Keep Current BBS 4 The next day you call the Keep Current BBS and download the new algorithm for the Cruft 1263 5 In August Data I O releases version X 5 system software complete with the new algorithm for the Cruft 1263 6 You update your programmer to version X 5 system software which includes the alg
186. efault Blank Check Y N Enables or disables the Blank Check test which checks a device for programmed bits This parameter defaults to Y which enables the test Compare Electronic ID Y N When enabled compares the electronic signature of the device against the electronic signature of the selected algorithm Enable Yield Tally Y N When enabled directs the programmer to keep a running tally of the programming yields for the last sixteen types of devices programmed These totals show how many devices passed and failed and what specific errors if any occurred This parameter defaults to N For more information see Yield Tally on page 4 69 Odd Even Byte Swap Y N When enabled allows the Most Significant Bytes MSB and the Least Significant Bytes LSB of 16 bit words to be swapped when data is programmed into a 16 bit device The data is programmed into a device retrieving the Most Significant byte from an odd memory address when the flag is N and an even memory address when it is Y Reject Option C S Selects the number of times the device is pulsed with programming voltage before it is rejected as unprogrammable C selects the number of pulses specified by the manufacturer S selects either a one pulse or the military specification number of programming pulses Unless you are programming devices to a strict military specification you should leave this option set at C This option defaults to C Verify Passes 0 1 2
187. efault Choose D if you will be selecting a device from the Manufacturer List which contains almost all the devices supported by your programmer E Extended Algorithm Choose E if you will be selecting a device from an Extended Algorithm list which contains devices that use extended algorithms for programming K Keep Current Choose K if you will be selecting a device from a Keep Current list which contains devices that use Keep Current algorithms for programming see Keep Current on page 4 32 for more information You can also access Keep Current devices by choosing D then selecting KEEP CURRENT from the manufacturers list C Custom Menu Choose C to select a device from a Custom Menu list which contains devices you included in a Custom Menu see Custom Menu Algs on page 4 34 for more information After you set the Algorithm Type press F1 to return to the Main Menu Note To save your Algorithm Type and other parameter changes as powerup defaults see page 4 31 Select a Device Main Menu Select Device Device List 1 From the Main Menu choose Select Device Press F1 to return to the Main Menu if needed If you are prompted to do so insert the requested disk Depending on the Algorithm Type you selected one of the following screens is displayed W Device Manufacturer List screen if you chose D m Extended Algorithm screen if you chose E WB Keep Current screen if you chose K W Custom Menu scr
188. election operation selects the device algorithm from the designated algorithm media m Checksum Calculation 4 8 D B Determines the word size and display of the checksum for all device operations The Odd Even Byte Swap option affects this calculation 4 calculate and display 4 digit 4 bit checksum For 4 bit devices 8 default calculate and display 8 digit 8 bit checksum For 8 bit devices D calculate and display the checksum based on the number of bits per word in the device width For 16 and 32 bit devices B calculate and display the checksum based on the number of bits per word in the device width and also to display the 8 bit checksum Data Word Width Should match the data bus word width in the target microprocessor system for the device being programmed For 8 bit or larger devices any word width between 4 and 64 may be typed in For 4 bit devices your word width choices are 4 8 16 and 32 When performing a Quick Copy the Data Word Width is set to the device word width and restored to the original value after the Quick Copy is complete The programmer changes this parameter to match the selected device s width except when the current Data Word Width is 16 your selected device s word width is 8 AND the previously selected device s word width is also 8 When this condition exists this parameter does not change m User Data Size Defines the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block used in device oper
189. entified by their device IDs Semiconductor manufacturers issue new IDs to reflect changes in manufacturing processes that may produce modifications to device programming algorithms Data I O engages in ongoing communication with semiconductor manufacturers and is usually informed when device IDs change 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 15 Messages Electronic ID Verify Error on Memory Device Probable Cause Solution Improper device selected Make sure the device selection matches the manufacturer and part number of your device as precisely as possible If it doesn t select the proper characteristics and perform the operation again Note Choosing the wrong manufacturer and or part number using the Select device option from the Main Menu causes the programmer to expect an electronic ID that differs from the ID in your device Device manufacturer has changed the Electronic ID of the part and programmer does not recognize it If the device is labeled with a recent date code the manufacturer may have placed a new electronic ID on the device that is not recognized by your programmer To minimize ID errors use the latest version of your programmer software Workaround If your programmer is at the current version disable the Compare elec ID parameter change from Y to N under the Load Device Program Device Verify Device or Programming Parameters screens Note You may wish to contact the device manufacturer to find
190. ently slow transition speeds Enabling this feature reduces the possibility of doubling clocking due to slow transition times This switch is available only for logic devices defaults to Y on powerup and stays on until turned off CAUTION If used with invalid test vectors that drive outputs the High Speed Logic Drivers test may cause overcurrent errors Compensated Vector Test Y N Y enables load compensation on PLD output pins under test during vector testing which may eliminate structured test errors when testing PLDs sensitive to output loading where many of the device s registers transition simultaneously This test is available only for logic devices and defaults to N at powerup It defaults to Y if you select a non Open Collector device and defaults to N if you select an Open Collector device This parameter can be saved restored with the Save Restore Configuration command 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands W Display Device Footnote Y N Y enables the programmer to automatically display any device specific information for the selected device N disables automatic display and causes the programmer to display this message if there is any device specific information Hit F3 or to view device specific message m Abort on Empty Socket Y N Y the default causes the programmer to abort the operation in progress when an empty socket is found A Load operation on an empty socket does not change RAM and no checksum is reporte
191. er s recommended high and low Vcc levels This is the default Reject Option C S Selects the number of times the device is pulsed with programming voltage before it is rejected as unprogrammable C Selects the number of pulses specified by the manufacturer the default Unless you are programming devices to a strict military specification leave this option set to C S Selects either one pulse or military specification number of pulses 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 11 Commands Program Memory Device Main Menu Program Device Program Memory Device Parameters To program a memory device follow these steps 1 2 Select and socket a memory device Select Program Device from the Main Menu The Program Memory Device screen is displayed Specify the parameters you want Then press ENTER to begin programming When the programming is complete the programmer displays the following message OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxxxxxx The following parameters are available Data Word Width Sets the word width of the data to be programmed For 8 bit or larger devices the minimum word width is equal to the device width and the maximum is 64 For 4 bit devices your word width choices are 4 8 16 and 32 This value should match the data bus word width in the target system for the device being programmed Next Device Designates the next device in the set For example if you are using 8 bit devices and have specified a
192. erating 5 10 kg 11 22 Ib Shipping 7 36 kg 16 22 Ib Temperature Operating 4 C to 40 C 40 F to 105 F Storage 4 C to 50 C 40 F to 122 F Transportation 40 C to 55 C 40 F to 130 F Relative Humidity Operating 20 to 80 noncondensing Storage 10 to 90 noncondensing Altitude Operating To 5 000 meters Storage To 15 000 meters 1 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Introduction Safety The 2900 3900 and 3980 are certified by UL CSA and TUV to comply with the following safety standards UL Underwriters Laboratories UL 1950 S b Canadian Standards Association CSA C22 2 NO 231 TUV G Technischer berwachungsverein PRODUCT T V GS Mark Certification EN60950 SERVICE gepr fte Sicherheit Certificate of RFI EMI Compliance Data I O certifies that the 2900 3900 and 3980 comply with the Radio Frequency Interference RFI and Electromagnetic Interference EMI requirements of EN55022 Class A and EN50082 1 as called out in 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive for the European Community C EC conformity mark WARNING This equipment is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Performance Verification The programmer verifies internal voltages every time it is powered up and every time a complete self test is run The voltage verification is performed by software and is
193. ere BY OAS Dee eee ke xe d xii World Wide Web www data io com l l xiii Warranty Information a a rs xiii Keep Current Subscription Service llle xiii Repall ServICe ss us Rude a uox Ro x E Re UR RUE IE I D a T BLUR C RE e DR xiii End User Registration and Address Change 00 0 000s xiii 1 Introduction Product Descriptions nassa aaao aeaa a 1 1 Configurations 1 223 eu ee Re 378 RON ee 1 1 Device Support 4 ea o Pe Owe ee ERE E XX PS eae Se GR XR QUE oS 1 1 Contents of Package scrani raa c eee d Ros d ye Go RS LR OR RR a 1 2 External Features lee eee hh hs 1 3 Ber cea aeaaea n ea a A e an a a a E a a E a 1 4 Programmer DISKS a s ii dia paia anae eaa ea a Aa o a 1 4 PC DISKS rude a E CERE Cube E Sk ee cos a eie a ere a a 1 5 Specifications kw ee oa BS ea ER ae a Ree aT a E a 1 6 Physical and Environmental aaua saaa a ee ees 1 6 Safety reser taws aww inkat ryka npa mS a A x XU S Sao 1 7 Certificate of RFI EMI Compliance 0000 cee es 1 7 Performance Verification es 1 7 OD Iq rrr 1 8 2 Setting Up 1 Choose Your Configuration and Connect the Equipment 2 1 Connecting toa PC said x hace E ie wets eS ee Ew Re xg X eee 2 2 Connecting to a Host leer s 2 5 Connecting to a Terminal llle 2 6 More About Cables meini mrami rodd ra Ea iau Ea A a a 2 8 2 Insert Boot Disk in Programmer 2900 3900 sasana sanaaa aaa 2 10 3 Ins
194. eric programmable logic device PLD to be configured as any one of many PLD architectures Consequently the generic device can take on the function of many subset devices For example a 16V8 generic PLD can be configured as a 16R4 16R8 or 16L8 Data Bits A communication parameter that specifies the number of bits per byte Data Representation The manner in which the data in user memory appear on the screen You can select either X and or O and 1 where X and O represent an unprogrammed state and and 1 represent a programmed state Data Translation Formats See Translation Formats Data Word Width The word width of the data to be used during a device operation For 8 bit or above devices the maximum is 64 and the minimum word width is equal to the device width For 4 bit devices the word width can be 4 8 16 or 32 This value should match the word width of the data bus in the target system for the device being programmed Destination The place where you are sending something usually data The place can be RAM a disk file or one of the programmer s serial ports Device Begin Address The first hexadecimal address of device data to use for a device operation If programming it represents the first address to program If verifying it represents the first address to verify Device Block Size The size of device data to be used in device operations Device Operation Usually a term that refers to loading programmi
195. erminal is on the same port SSSSSSSS The parameters are described below W Source R T Specifies which of the programmer s ports is connected to the computer with the data file that is to be compared with the memory data Press SPACE to toggle between R Remote port and T Terminal port W Data Location R D Specifies where the data to be compared is located Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM or D Disk m Filename Specifies the name of the disk file you want compared This option appears only if you specify Disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27256 dat m I O Translation Format Specifies the data translation format of the data in the file If you know the number for your format you can enter it from this screen If you do not know the format number find the format you want to use on the Format Select screen and enter the format number from Entering the format number from the Format Select screen changes the Translation Format parameter on this screen 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands mE I O Addr Offset Specifies the beginning address of the downloaded data file to be compared This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected Entering FFFFFFFF causes the programmer to default to the first incoming address as the lowest address to be compared m Memory Begin Address Specifies the first hexadecimal address of data to compare with data from the Source
196. es of the characters beginning with the first tag character and ending with the checksum tag character 7 or 8 Data records follow the same format as the start of file record but do not contain a file header The end of file record consists of a colon only The output translator sends a CTRL S after the colon JEDEC Format Codes 91 and 92 The JEDEC Joint Electron Device Engineering Council format is used to transfer fuse and test vector data between the programmer and a host computer Code 91 is full format and includes all the data fields such as note and test fields described on the following pages Code 92 is the Kernel or shorter format The JEDEC Kernel format includes only the minimum information needed for the programming it does not for example include information fields or test vector fields Prior to transferring a JEDEC file the appropriate Logic device must be selected JEDEC s legal character set consists of all the printable ASCII characters and four control characters The four allowable control characters are STX ETX CR RETURN and LF line feed Other control characters such as ESC or BREAK should not be used Note This is Data I O Corporation s implementation of JEDEC Standard 3A For a copy of the strict standard write to Electronic Industries Association Engineering Department 2001 Eye Street NW Washington D C 20006 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 27 Translation Formats BNF Rules an
197. esents a word location B followed by 4 data characters 16 bit word F denotes the end of a data record followed by 2 data characters 5 4 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats The start of file record begins with a tag character and a 12 character file header The first four characters are the word count of the 16 bit data words the remaining file header characters are the name of the file and may be any ASCII characters in hex notation Next come interspersed address fields and data fields each with tag characters The address fields represent 16 bit words If any data fields appear before the first address field in the file the first of those data fields is assigned to address 0000 Address fields may be expressed for any data word but none are required The record ends with a checksum field initiated by the tag character 7 or 8 a 4 character checksum and the tag character F The checksum is the two s complement of the sum of the 8 bit ASCII values of the characters beginning with the first tag character and ending with the checksum tag character 7 or 8 Data records follow the same format as the start of file record but do not contain a file header The end of file record consists of a colon only The output translator sends a CTRL S after the colon During download or input from disk operations the destination address for the data is calculated in the following manner Memory address
198. eturn character to terminate the line when transmitted to the host To clear a previously entered command press SPACE ENTER 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 63 Commands Compare Data 4 64 More Commands Transfer Data Compare Data The Compare Data command compares data in user memory with the data file downloaded from the host computer You can use this command to verify that you transferred a complete and accurate copy of a data file The current I O format is used to translate the incoming data from the serial port JEDEC format cannot be used with this command This operation is similar to the download operation except data is compared with rather than written to memory 1 Before you compare data specify variables for parameters listed below 2 Enter a command in the Download Host Command field The information in the command line is a command that your host computer recognizes as an instruction to begin the download operation 3 Press ENTER to run the command One of these messages is displayed Message Condition Data transfer complete The two data files are identical Data verify error Data sum The two data files are not identical XXXXXXXX Compare fail at AAAAAA XX Data in memory does not match data not YY AAAAAA address XX memory Sent from the host and the terminal is data YY host s data not on the same port as the port receiving the data from the host Data verify error Data sum The t
199. ewlett Packard UNIX Format Code 96 es 5 40 Intel OMF386 Format Code 97 celeres 5 41 Intel OMF286 Format Code 98 llle 5 42 Intel Hex 32 Code 99 es 5 44 Highest I O Addresses nunaa aana rns 5 46 Message List sg at ae Row ne eR E EE ave ex ee is 6 1 Device Insertion Error When Using Elastomeric Pad 6 11 Device Over current Fault saasaa aaa a a 6 13 Device Programming Error 1 0c 6 14 Invalid Device ID on Logic Device llle 6 15 Electronic ID Verify Error on Memory Device lens 6 16 Illegal Bit ErrOrs 4 iam m E Beha DERE ORO x Bee oa eds 6 17 I O Timeout Error hh hio or arn 6 18 Partial or No Transfer Performed lees 6 19 Incompatible User Data File for Device Selected Ls 6 20 OF and QPfields eee rrr 6 20 Reducing Electrostatic Discharge saasaa ee A 1 Accessing TESt POINTS i suu ed we RUD ee eg a SF x OR eae A 2 Checking the Master Clock 0 000 es A 4 Checking the Reference Voltages 00 cee ee A 4 Reassembling the Programmer llle A 5 B Computer Remote Control vi System Set p si i Rx Rb eh Ae Rd Ek Eoo ER ADRES esc eom ROCA A Ss B 1 Entering CRC Mode uude RUE ee E Rok ee CELERE ARR B 2 Exiting CRO Mode secure RR RR C e XR E RR RR Rok Rn B 3 Suspending CRC Mode ll llle B 3 Halting CRC Operations sasaaa saaa es B 4 CRC Default SettingS 5 449 68350
200. existing file To preserve the existing file press CTRL Z 6 Move the cursor down to the Enter Description field and type a name for the job file that was just recorded The description can be up to 31 characters long and should be followed by ENTER To save the job file press ENTER While the file is being saved the action symbol rotates When the save action is done you are returned to the last screen displayed during job file recording If you do not want to save the job file press F2 or F1 Playing Back a Job File More Commands Job File Use the Job File command to play back a pre recorded job file To play back a job file follow these steps 1 Go to the Job Files screen 2 You see a listing of the job files stored on the Algorithm System disk in the disk drive To select a job file from this disk type the number of the job file you want to play back and press ENTER For example to play back the fifth file on the list press 5 ENTER To view a list of job files stored on another disk insert the disk and press F4 which reconstructs the job file directory 3 The programmer now plays back the keystrokes that were recorded Each screen displayed while you were recording keystrokes is shown briefly 4 After the job file is played back the programmer displays the following message Job file playback ended The last screen recorded while you were creating the job file is now displayed If an error occurred during playb
201. ext page of files Press CTRL P to display the first page of files If you do not see the file you want to delete press F2 insert another disk and return to the beginning of this step Move the cursor to the Filename field and enter the name of the file you want to delete Note You can use an asterisk as a wildcard For example to purge both 27512 dat and 27128 dat you could type 27 dat Move the cursor to the Are you sure field and press Y CAUTION If you do not want to delete the file do not press Enter To delete the file press ENTER If you do not want to delete the file press F2 to return to the File Operations menu More Commands File Operations Rename File This command changes the name of a file To rename a file follow these steps 1 2 Insert the disk with the file you want to rename into the disk drive When you select the Rename File command the dialog window fills with the directory listing displaying up to 28 files at a time If there are more than 28 files press CTRL N to display the next page of files Press CTRL P to display the first page of files If you do not see the file you want to rename press F2 insert another disk and return to the beginning of this step 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 55 Commands Copy File 3 4 5 Move the cursor to the From field and enter the current name of the file you want to rename Move the cursor to the To field and enter the new na
202. f E field cells is otherwise unknown W The number of cells specified in the E field is not included in the QF number of fuses field The E field cells are included in the C fuse checksum field The E field reads left to right for the purpose of checksum calculation The syntax for the E field is as follows Electrical Data Fuse List gt E lt binary digit s The character E begins the E field and is followed by one binary digit for each E fuse Each binary digit indicates one of two possible states zero specifying a low resistance link or one specifying a high resistance link for each fuse For example QF24 10000 101011000000000000000000 E10100111 C011A U10110110 Test Field V field function test pin list gt test vector test vector lt pin lt N gt number gt delimiter number N 2 number of pins on device test vector V number lt delimiter gt lt test condition N test condition digit B C D F H K E N P U X v reserved condition 2 A E G I UJ M O Q R S T VU W Y Z 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 35 Translation Formats 5 36 Functional test information is specified by test vectors containing test conditions for each device pin Each test vector contains n test conditions where n is the number of pins on the device The followi
203. f the supported formats The Format Select screen lists the programmer supported formats to choose from Enter the number of the format that you want to use in the format entry field at the bottom of the screen then press ENTER When you select a translation format from this screen the same format is entered in all the other Transfer Data screens such as Download Data and Compare Data Input From Disk More Commands Transfer Data Input From Disk Use this command to load a data file from disk if the data is stored in a translation format Depending on the settings of the Destination parameter the data in the disk file is loaded into either RAM or another disk file To input a data file from disk follow these steps 1 Insert the disk containing the file to input into the drive 2 Specify the settings for the parameters listed below 3 Press ENTER to start this command The programmer displays Data transfer complete when the file has been loaded 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 65 Commands The following parameters are available WB Input Filename Specifies the name of the disk file from which formatted data are taken The filename must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27256 hex WB Destination R D Specifies the destination for the data Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D another disk file m Filename Specifies the filename for the disk file into which data are sent This option appears only if you spec
204. formance of your programmer by checking the reference voltage and master clock WARNING The procedures described in this chapter are designed to be performed by personnel qualified to service electronic equipment Do not attempt to perform these procedures unless you are qualified to do so The programmer performs a full performance verification every time it is powered up and every time a complete Self test cycle is run To ensure that your programmer remains fully operational Data I O recommends that you cycle power AND run a complete Self test cycle at least once a day To ensure that your programmer continues to meet product performance specifications Data I O recommends that you return it to an authorized Data I O Service Center every twelve months for a complete performance evaluation Diagnostic tools used by the factory are not available in the field To verify your programmer s performance you need the following tools and equipment m 1 or 2 Phillips screwdriver Grounded wrist strap Antistatic workstation Digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places Frequency counter or oscilloscope Reducing Electrostatic Discharge The circuit boards inside your programmer are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge ESD You can reduce the effects of ESD by using special equipment and observing certain procedures Use the following precautions to reduce ESD m Make sure a common static potential ground exists
205. front of the Base then lower the back edge of the MatchBook into place on the Base See Figure 2 10 3 Insert the device into the MatchBook as described later in this section Figure 2 10 Inserting a MatchBook into the Base MATCHBOOK FRONT EDGE Under locking tabs 0537 4 4 Finally close the MatchBook and press the retaining latch forward with your thumb until the latch snaps into place as shown in Figure 2 11 CAUTION To prevent premature wear on the conductive pad do not place excessive force on the top of the MatchBook Figure 2 11 Closing the MatchBook 0539 5 2 20 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Inserting a PLCC or LCC Device into a MatchBook Use the following procedure to insert a PLCC or LCC device into a MatchBook 1 Select the appropriate MatchBook and Base For example if you are using a 44 pin PLCC device select the 44 pin PLCC MatchBook and the PLCC Base 2 Insert the appropriate Base into the programmer see page 2 11 Insert the appropriate MatchBook into the Base see page 2 19 4 Position the device so that pin 1 is near the handle on the Base see Figure 2 12 A small dot molded into each MatchBook is available to help you align your device There is also a beveled corner on the PLCC LCC MatchBook to help you align devices whose pin 1 is indicated with a chamfered corner Figure 2 12 Inserting a Device into the PLCC or LCC Base PIN 1 P CORNER mm RETAINING LATCH em
206. g an Intel 27C256 the part number of the device is 27C256 Pin Driver The electric circuit reading or applying voltage and current pulses to the individual pin of a device for programming or testing See also Universal Pin Driver D 8 3980 3900 2900 User Manual PGA PLCC PLD PROM Program An acronym for Pin Grid Array a type of device package Usually a square device with one side populated with small pins as leads An acronym for Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier a device package with J shaped leads extending from four sides downward used for surface mount applications An acronym for Programmable Logic Device a type of programmable integrated circuit Architectures range from very simple to very complex Most PLDs contain two levels of logic an AND array followed by an OR array An acronym for Programmable Read Only Memory A device with fixed AND and programmable OR arrays This is a slightly different architecture from an FPLA or a PAL The controlled application of electrical pulses to program specific fuses or cells Program Device A device operation that copies device data into a socketed device The programming is done according to the programming algorithm selected in the select device stage The programming operation can also include a verify operation Program Security Fuse A programming parameter that enables disables the programming of the device s security fuse Program Signature Available on
207. g combinatorial only Registered devices are typically used for sequencers and state machine designs Typical examples are 16R8 825159 and 22V10 Reject Option A post programming device check that pulses the programmed device with voltage to see if the device has programmed per specification The number of times a device is pulsed varies by manufacturer and by the reject option you select Reminder Bar The bottom line of the screen The reminder bar tells you what function keys are available and what they will do if pressed Remote Mode The programmer is controlled from a host running a driver program Device data files can be stored on the programmer s disk and on the host SDIP An acronym for Shrink Dual Inline Package An SDIP device is the same as DIP but has more leads at higher pitch Security Fuse A location in a programmable device that when programmed secures the device from readback the data in the device is unreadable Security Fuse Data The actual data to program into the device s security fuse Select Device A procedure that tells the programmer what device you will be using You select a device by selecting the manufacturer and the device part number D 10 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Self test A built in self diagnosis command that allows you to test various circuits and subsystems in the programmer verifying proper operation or isolating possible problem areas Serial Set A method of set programming in which
208. g specifications Consequently disabling the electronic ID check is a viable workaround for most memory devices 6 16 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages When this error occurs the electronic ID of the device is displayed You can also determine the electronic ID of your part by selecting the Compare Elec ID Device checks option using the More Device checks option from the Main Menu The Compare elec ID parameter is located in the Load Device Program Device Verify Device and Programming Parameters screens To display the full parameter list under the Load Device Program Device and Verify Device screens press the F4 function key Illegal Bit Error Probable Cause Solution Windowed device Perform a blank check on the device using the More Device checks contains data options from the Main Menu to determine whether is it truly blank If blank check reports Non blank device place the device under a UV lamp and allow sufficient time for it to be fully erased After erasure reprogram the device Electrically erasable EE Make sure that the device s electronic erase feature Erase EE Device device contains data and parameter under the Program Device screen is enabled set to Y device s electronic erase Reprogram the device after the electronic erase feature has been feature is not enabled enabled Note To display all parameters on the Program Device screen press the F4 function key One Time Programmable Perf
209. ge is displayed after a data transfer of a POF The data sum represents the calculated checksum for the data bytes transferred The POF CRC represents the calculated Cyclic Redundancy Check for all the bytes in the POF up to but not including the CRC value Data operation complete data saved on disk This message is displayed after a data file is downloaded to disk Destination file already exists Hit return to continue Z to abort The filename you designated as the destination for the data already exists so existing data will be written over if you execute the operation This precautionary message occurs on any file operation that could overwrite an existing file Device insertion error See page 6 11 Device overcurrent fault See page 6 13 Device programming error See page 6 14 Disk boot err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the problem persists use another copy of the Algorithm System disk Disk data error The read or write operation you tried to run could not be completed because there is a problem with the disk Retry the operation with a different disk 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 3 Messages Disk duplication overwrites user RAM Hit Return to continue Z to abort The duplicate disk operation uses User RAM as a buffer Anything already in User RAM will be overwritten If you don t want to overwrite User RAM press CTRL Z to halt th
210. ght it then press F1 The Help topic is displayed 3 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started 6 From the Setup menu select Memory Parameters to specify how and where data is loaded in programmer RAM To ensure a consistent sumcheck 1 peo HIS you can preload all address sh zi dnas locations into RAM with a known prin Payee hexadecimal value many data files do not contain data for every memory address To do this select Specific under Automatic RAM Fill and enter a value usually OO or FF to be placed in RAM before a file is loaded To learn about I O Offset highlight it then press F1 to display Help ord Width NI fr 5 ia Ean Fill TI 7 The next step is to load programmer RAM with the data to be programmed into the device In this example the data is stored in a file on a disk so select Load RAM from PC Disk File Tarl mk 8 Press F2 or click on the down x Feta arrow at the right end of the dialog box to display the Data File selection box 9 Search for and select a file from any drive accessible from your PC 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 3 Getting Started 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 From the Data menu select Translation Format Highlight the format of the file you will load into RAM then click OK 5 describes translation formats When the file is successfully loaded into programmer RAM a green box displays the Checksum
211. gic devices have 4 digit sumchecks For devices in a set you can calculate the individual sumcheck of the device and the sumcheck of the entire set Terminal Emulator A program to enable a PC or other computer to act as an ASCII terminal Allows a PC to be used to communicate with a programmer in terminal mode or with a mainframe Terminal Mode One of the programmer s three operating modes The programmer is controlled from either a dedicated terminal or a workstation running a terminal emulation package Device data files can be stored on the programmer s disk and on the workstation Test Vector Test vectors functionally test the device using structured test vectors stored in memory or in a disk file Test Vector Stretching Conversion of DIP test vectors to equivalent PLCC test vectors by adding don t care vector characters into the string to correspond with the PLCC s dead pins Total set size Used during serial set programming this value specifies how many devices are in a set Translate DIP LCC Vectors See JEDEC I O Translate DIP LCC Vectors D 12 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats A form of transmission protocol these formats are used when transferring data between the programmer and a host computer The different formats represent different ways of encoding the device data in a data file The data file could contain the fuse pattern for a logic device or the data for a memory device Transmit Pacing Th
212. git summation n of data in record LI r Data Records X Data Record Start Character End of File Record 0080 2 The last record consists of an asterisk only which indicates the end of file 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 17 Translation Formats MOS Technology Format Code 81 The data in each record is sandwiched between a 7 character prefix and a 4 character suffix The number of data bytes in each record must be indicated by the byte count in the prefix The input file can be divided into records of various lengths Figure 5 9 shows a series of valid data records Each data record begins with a semicolon The programmer will ignore all characters received prior to the first semicolon All other characters in a valid record must be valid hexadecimal digits 0 9 and A F A 2 digit byte count follows the start character The byte count expressed in hexadecimal digits must equal the number of data bytes in the record The byte count is greater than zero in the data records and equals zero 00 in the end of file record The next 4 digits make up the address of the first data byte in the record Data bytes follow each represented by 2 hexadecimal digits The end of file record consists of the semicolon start character followed by a 00 byte count the record count and a checksum Figure 5 9 MOS Technology Format example 5 18 Byte Count Sumcheck of record including Start Cha
213. gram which created the POF Device_Name tag 2 Used This packet contains the ASCII name of the target device to be programmed for example PM9129 Comment_Text tag 3 Read This packet contains a text string which may consist of comments related to the POF This text may be displayed to the operator when the file is read The string may include multiple lines of text separated by appropriate new line characters Tag_Reserved tag 4 Skipped 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 9 Translation Formats Security Bit Logical Address and Data 16 Electrical Address and Data Terminator Symbol table Test Vectors Electrical Address and Constant data Number of programmable elements Logical Address and Data 32 5 10 tag 2 5 Used This packet declares whether security mode should be enabled on the target device tag 6 Read This packet defines a group of logical addresses in the target device and associates logical data with these addresses The addresses comprise a linear region in the logical address space bounded on the low end by the starting address and extending upward by the address count specified in the packet The starting address and address count are each specified by two byte fields 16 bits tag 7 Used This packet defines a group of electrical addresses in the target device and associates data values with those addresses The data field is ordered in column row order beginning with th
214. gure System Custom Menu Algorithms Update This command displays the Update screen which allows you to update the algorithms in a Custom Menu to the current version of the algorithms To update algorithms from a Custom Menu follow these steps 1 2 4 Select the Update command Set the following fields using the arrow keys to move from field to field and press SPACE to toggle a selected field m Algorithm media F M 3980 only Select F is your current algorithm files are on floppy disks Select M if they are on the MSM hard drive m Add Create A C C creates a new Custom Menu disk and places the updated version of your old Custom Menu on the new disk A updates and adds an old Custom Menu to an updated Custom Menu m New Custom Menu Algorithm Disk Select the drive letter that will contain your updated Custom Menu B Old Custom Menu Algorithm Disk Select the drive letter that will contain your Old Custom Menu Note For Update operations the algorithm source is always D default Insert the disk that contains your Old Custom Menu and press ENTER to continue Follow the directions on the screen inserting disks if prompted To update the Custom Menu press ENTER if you do not want to update the Custom Menu press F2 After you update Custom Menus press F2 to return to the Custom Menu Algs menu Mass Storage 4 38 Main Menu More Commands Configure System Mass Storage Use this command to update the system software a
215. h covers programming a device If you do not have an AMD 27256 the device we are going to use for this Session then go to the Select Device screen and select the device you are going to program Keep in mind that the device you select might not have the same capabilities as the AMD 27256 For example the AMD 27256 supports Electronic ID while the Hitachi 27256 does not Set the Parameters Select Verify Device from the Main Menu The dialog window displays the Verify Memory Device screen see Figure 3 21 Figure 3 21 Verify Memory Device Screen Non default Parameters FILENAME SAMPLE BIN RAM AVAIL Z176KB REV XXX YY MANUFACTURER AMD PART 27256 I70 FORMAT Intel Intellec 8 MDS NeMemory block parameters now set for data file operation MAIN MENU VERIFY MEMORY DEVICE non default gt Select device Source RAM I Quick copy Data word width 3 Load device Next device H Program device Total set size User data size mut Next operation begins at E More commands Return Execute F4 Select mode options F1 Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or 7 Help One of the following two Verify Memory Device screens is displayed m The Non default Parameters screen the default screen displays a subset of the Verify Memory Device parameters supported by the selected device see Figure 3 21 Usually these are the only parameters you need to set W The All Parameters screen displays all the Verify Memory Device parameters
216. he device you use may not have the same capabilities as the AMD 27256 For example the AMD 27256 supports Electronic ID while the Hitachi 27256 does not Select a Manufacturer From the Main Menu choose the Select Device Command You can either press S or move the cursor to the Select Device menu item and press ENTER The Manufacturer List screen similar to Figure 3 5 is displayed Figure 3 5 Device Manufacturer Selection Screen FILENRME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REU X XX Y YY Z Z MANUFACTURER PART I 0 FORMAT _ EeE gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt E gt _ gt __ SESS MANUFACTURER LIST Page 1 of Z 1 KEEP CURRENT 14 Catalyst 27 IDT 40 Mitsubishi 2 AMD 15 Custom 28 ISSI 41 Motorola 3 AMD Archive 165 Cypress 29 Intel 42 NEC 4 BMD XPGM 17 Cypress XPGM 30 Intel XPGM 43 National 5 AMI 18 Dallas 31 Lattice 44 Natnl XPGM 6 AT amp T 19 Exel 32 Lattice XPGM 45 Neu Media 7 Actel 2 Fairchild 339 MMI LOGIC 46 Oki 8 Alliance 2Z1 Fujitsu 349 MMI PROM 47 mni laue 9 Altera 22 Goldstar 35 Macronix 48 PLUS Logic 10 Altera XPGM 23 Harris 36 Microchip 49 PLX 11 Asahi Kasei Z4 Hitachi 37 Micron Tech 50 Panasonic 12 Atmel C25 Hyundai C38 Mikroelek 51 Philips 13 fitmel XPGM Z6 ICT 39 Mit Plastics 52 Quick Logic Manufacturer Kl Device Type PEM Mode SRR N Next page P Prev page PF1 Ma
217. he programmer s RAM or disk to the host computer To upload a data file follow these steps 1 2 Specify the variables for the parameters listed below Enter a command in the Upload Host Command field The information in the command line is a command that your host computer the computer receiving the data file recognizes as an instruction to begin the upload operation Press ENTER to start the upload During the upload the action symbol rotates When done with the upload the programmer displays the following message Data Transfer complete Data sum XXXXXXXX 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands The parameters are described below Source R D Specifies where the data to be uploaded is located Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D disk Filename Specifies the name of the disk file to upload to the host This option appears only if you specify Disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions such as 27256 dat Destination R T Specifies which port the data file is sent through Press SPACE to toggle between R Remote Port and T Terminal Port I O Translation Format Specifies the translation format in which the file is to be generated The format specified here must be the same as that expected by the host computer A list of formats supported by the programmer appears on the Format Select screen in the Transfer Data menu in Chapter 5 If you know the number for your format y
218. hen you select this command Load Logic Device Main Menu Load Device Load Logic Parameters screen To load user memory with data from a logic device follow these steps 1 2 Select and socket a logic device Select Load Device from the Main Menu The Load Logic Device screen is displayed Press ENTER to begin the loading When the load operation is complete the programmer displays the following message OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck xxxx Load Memory Device Main Menu Load Device Load Memory Parameters screen To load user memory with data from a memory device follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Select and socket a memory device Select Load Device from the Main Menu From the Load Memory Device screen specify the parameters you want then press ENTER to begin loading When the load operation is complete the programmer displays OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck Xxxxxxxxx You can specify the following parameters in the Load Memory Device screen 4 8 Data Word Width Sets the word width of data to be loaded For 8 bit or larger devices the minimum word width equals the device width and the maximum word width is 64 For 4 bit devices the word width choices are 4 8 16 and 32 This value should match the data bus word width in the target system for the device being programmed The default value is the device word width Next Device Designates the next device next set member in the set For examp
219. her than zero is 4 0 4 milliseconds and the maximum is 99 9 9 milliseconds The factory default is O The transmit pacing value required for reliable data transfers may vary from those in the table due to host characteristics primarily determined by the processor speed of the host and whether or not software other than the communication software is running at the same time on the host larger delay values may be needed 4800 amp less 9600 19 2K HiTerm PC 0 0 6 AT 0 0 6 VTERM PC 0 4 15 AT 0 0 8 PROCOMM PC 0 4 9 AT 0 0 6 Interface Parameters More Commands Configure System Edit Edit Interface Parameters Interface Parameters are parameters that are not related directly to uploading downloading of files The parameters on the interface parameters screen are described below W Power On CRC Mode Y N When this feature is enabled the programmer enters computer remote control mode when it is turned on Press CTRL Z to exit CRC m Enable Terminal Beeps Y N When this feature is enabled the programmer beeps when an error message is generated m Remote On Code When this feature is enabled you can use an ASCII character to enable the Remote port Type the two digit hexadecimal number that represents the ASCII character you want to use to enable remote control m Remote Off Code When this feature is enabled you can use an ASCII character to disable the Remote port Type the two digit hexadecimal number that represents the AS
220. hould be looking at the Non default screen If the All Parameters screen is displayed press F4 to switch to the Non default screen Program the Device Review 3 28 For this Session you do not need to set any programming parameters so you are ready to program the data file into the device To begin programming press ENTER After the programmer has programmed the device the following message is displayed in the message bar OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck XXXXXXXX Where xxxxxxxx represents is the 8 digit 4 digit for a logic device sumcheck of the data programmed into the device in the socket When you select Program Device from the Main Menu either the Non default Parameters screen or the All Parameters screen Press F4 to toggle between the two parameter screens Enter the programming parameters then press ENTER to begin programming When the programmer is finished programming it displays the sumcheck 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 12 Verifying a Device Once you have programmed a device you can perform a number of different device checks and programming tests on the device For the rest of this Session we will refer to device checks and programming tests as verify operations Note During this Session you will verify a device with data stored in RAM Make sure you have completed Session 2 which is an introduction to the programmer s interface Also make sure you have completed Session 11 whic
221. ial port on the host as described above After you turn on the programmer you can change the programmer s Remote port parameters to match the host s communication parameters If your terminal has programmable function keys the following table lists the expected codes for the four function keys VT 100 Key Expected Code Wyse 30 Key Expected Code PF1 ESC OP F1 SOH CR PF2 ESCOQ F2 SOH A CR PF3 ESCOR F3 SOH B CR PF4 ESC OS F4 SOH CCR The programmer is now connected to your terminal 2900 3900 users Go to Insert Boot Disk in Programmer on page 2 10 3980 users Go to Insert the Base on page 2 11 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 7 More About Cables If you do not have one 25 pin RS 232C serial cable for each piece of equipment you will connect to the programmer you can use Figure 2 2 to build your own cable When you connect equipment to a programmer you must usually match Data Terminal Equipment DTE to Data Communications Equipment DCE The programmer is compatible with both types of equipment and automatically configures the Terminal and Remote ports to be compatible with the equipment connected to it The programmer s SmartPort feature toggles between the two types until a connection is established Figure 2 2 Pin Designations for RS 232C Serial Port Connection 25 PIN PROGRAMMER DTE TRANSMIT RECEIVE 21 25 25 PIN PROGRAMMER DCE RECEIVE TRANSMIT 2
222. ible to determine which operation the programmer was performing device tests program verify read when the overcurrent condition was detected To determine the nature of the problem you need to isolate the operation that is being performed 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 13 Messages Device Programming Error Probable Cause Solution Improper device selected Make sure the device selection matches the manufacturer and part number of your device as precisely as possible If it doesn t select the proper characteristics and perform the operation again Note Choosing the wrong manufacturer and or part number via the Select device option from the Main Menu causes the programmer to expect an electronic ID that differs from the ID in your device Faulty device s Program at least one more device labeled with the same date code If the operation is successful the original device is probably faulty If other devices with the same date code fail try to program devices labeled with different date codes If devices with different date codes are programmed successfully the devices with the original date code are probably faulty Note You may wish to contact the device manufacturer and report your findings Improper algorithm applied by programmer due to recent change in manufacturer specifications If this error occurs only on devices with recent date codes the devices may require a modified programming algorithm
223. ich each signal requires a response to complete an I O operation High speed Download A special feature of the programmer that allows the programmer to download data from a PC at 115 2K baud High speed Logic Drivers A device test that increases the speed of the logic transitions between 0 and 1 and 1 and O0 of the test vector input states This test is a diagnostic tool designed to help debug and classify test vector failures Specifically this test is designed to help identify vector transitions that are speed dependent Host A micro mini or mainframe computer used to control the programmer in Remote mode You must use a software driver such as Data I O s TaskLink to allow the computer to communicate with the programmer Host Command download amp upload The command that is sent from the programmer to the host system during uploading downloading See Download Host Command and Upload Host Command l O Address Offset This value influences the beginning address where data is stored during a file transfer operation For uploads the I O Offset represents the address to start loading a formatted data file For downloads the I O Offset is subtracted from the beginning address in the formatted data file The result is then added to the memory begin address to determine where the block of data is loaded l O Timeout The amount of time that the programmer will wait for a data transfer to begin 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 5
224. ield Refer to Figure 5 4 If the data output has a byte count GREATER than or equal to 64K an alternate arrow shaped header is used This alternate header shown below is followed by an 8 nibble byte count sandwiched between a null and a rubout The byte count shown here is 40000H 256K decimal If the byte count is LESS than 64K the regular arrowhead is used instead Data that is input using Formatted Binary format will accept either version of this format Figure 5 4 Formatted Binary Format example 8 DATA seces eee RUBOUT FF Bs 8 NIBBLE BYTE COUNT 4 90 ii NULL 00 d 08 L ARROW J 2 HEAD 1C 08 e e R 0483 2 In addition a third variation of this binary format is accepted on download This variation does not have an arrowhead and is accepted only on input The rubout begins the format and is immediately followed by the data There is no byte count or sumcheck Format 10 does not function properly unless you select NO parity and 8 bit data DEC Binary Format Code 11 Data transmission in the DEC Binary format is a stream of 8 bit data words with no control characters except the start code The start code is one null preceded by at least one rubout The DEC Binary format does not have addresses Formats 11 does not function properly unless you select NO parity and 8 bit data 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 7 Translation Formats Spectrum Format Codes 12 or 13 In this for
225. iffers from the ID in your device Device manufacturer has changed the device ID of the part and the programmer doesn t recognize it If the device is labeled with a recent date code the semiconductor manufacturer may have assigned the device a new ID that is not recognized by your programmer To minimize ID errors use the latest version of your programmer software Note If your programmer is at the current version you may wish to contact the device manufacturer to determine if they changed the device s ID If they did contact Data I O Customer Support Faulty device s Attempt the operation with at least one more device labeled with the same date code If the operation is successful the original device is probably faulty Note If a high percentage of parts produce ID errors you may wish to contact the device manufacturer and report your findings Possible bug in programmer software A high percentage of parts failing with ID errors may also indicate that a bug exists in the programming algorithm software associated with the part Workaround On your programmers Device List note the earliest version of programmer software that supports the device boot your programmer with this version and repeat the operation If the operation is successful you ve found a temporary workaround Note Contact Data I O Customer Support and report your findings Additional Information Most logic devices are uniquely id
226. ify Disk as the Destination The filename must follow standard DOS conventions mE I O Translation Format Specifies the format of the data to be input See Chapter 5 for a complete list of supported formats m I O Address Offset Enter the beginning hex address or the first address you want to capture within a file of the disk file s data This field appears only if a non JEDEC format has been selected The programmer subtracts this address from addresses received to determine where the data is loaded into memory Entering FFFFFFFF sets the I O Offset equal to the first address received m Memory Begin Address Specifies the first address in hex to which the first byte of data is stored in memory If the destination is RAM it is a beginning RAM address If the destination is Disk it is a beginning disk file address The default address is 0 This field appears only if a non JEDEC format has been selected m User Data Size The User Data Size specifies how many bytes in hex are read during the Input from Disk operation The default User Data Size is 0 which causes all the data to be input After the operation is complete the programmer updates the User Data Size parameter to reflect the number of bytes stored to the destination If a value less than the size of data file input is entered the number of bytes equal to that value are actually stored This field appears only if a non JEDEC format has been selected Output To Disk 4 66
227. ile after a carriage return and line feed The range of this parameter is O to 254 nulls Entering 255 specifies no nulls and suppresses the line feed B Instrument Control Code Specifies how the data transfer will be controlled Selecting O specifies regular XON XOFF handshaking selecting 1 or 2 specifies a special handshaking sequence see Chapter 5 for more information m Fill Memory Option N D U Specifies what data user memory will be filled with before download begins It is used for Download Data and Input from Disk operations The choices are N none D default and U user specified If you select N user memory will not be changed and whatever is in user memory will be overwritten by the downloaded data If you select D user memory will be filled with the data appropriate to initialize unused locations to the unprogrammed state for the device type selected If you select U user memory will be filled with what you specify in the Fill Data option W Fill Data Allows you to type in the hexadecimal data to be placed at unused locations of user memory during download To use this option you must also specify U for the Fill Memory option User memory can also be filled with the specified data during the Edit Data operation m High Speed Download Y N When enabled this parameter allows the programmer to download data from a PC at 115 2K baud For high speed download to work this parameter must be set to Y and the following condi
228. ill holding the socket edges down drop the device into the socket 3 Release the socket edges The device should be secured Figure 2 16 Inserting a TSOP Device in a PPI Base DEVICE A PIN 1 OF SOCKET TSOP ae C STANDARD PINOUT ICON REVERSE PINOUT ICON 1327 1 To remove a device press the socket edges down and lift it out 2 26 3980 3900 2900 User Manual QFP Devices Orient pin 1 of QFP Quad Flat Pack devices according to the icon or indicator on the adapter Figure 2 17 Inserting a QFP Device in a PPI Adapter DEVICE PIN 1 PIN 1 1328 2 SOIC Devices When you insert SOIC Small Outline Integrated Circuit devices make sure pin 1 represented by the notch or the circle indented into the package at one end of the device is to the left as shown in the illustration Figure 2 18 Inserting an SOIC Device in a PPI Adapter amp Qd OO OO CIRCUIT BOARD 1 88 OO PROGRAMMING BLOCK OG OO PIN INSULATION BLOCK ee OO OO OO OO PIN 1 eer OO
229. ime the programmer will wait before it begins sending data to the host computer after the host upload command is sent 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 13 User Data Size The hexadecimal number of bytes of a data block to use for a device operation Normally this value is equal to the device size During serial set operations this value works with Total Set Size to determine the total amount of bytes to program into a set of devices User Memory The workspace used during device operations It can be either internal RAM or a disk file Normally RAM is used for small quick device operations such as programming a single device while disk is used for larger device operations such as serial set programming User Menu Data The information you see when you look at the programmer screen It includes such items as the dialog window reminder bar and message bar User Menu Port The port to which the user menu data is sent You can re direct user menu data to either the Terminal port or the Remote port User RAM The RAM in the programmer User RAM can be used as a source destination for an operation Several operations use User RAM as a temporary storage buffer overwriting any data that may have been there previously Verify Device A device operation that compares data in a programmed device with data in RAM or in a disk file With logic devices verifying can also include functional testing Verify is an automatic part of the prog
230. in menu PFZ Prev menu PF3 or Help The text in the upper right corner of the screen shows how many screens pages of manufacturers there are and what page you are on To go to the previous page of manufacturers press CTRL P To go to the next page press CTRL N The list is in alphabetical order Some manufacturers are listed by their commonly used abbreviations such as AMD for Advanced Micro Devices The Device Type field allows you to filter out certain device types Press Space to cycle through the three settings All Memory amp Emicros or Logic Only When you select a manufacturer the programmer displays only devices that fit the filter you selected This Session uses a 27256 an EPROM Move the cursor to the Device Type field press SPACE to cycle through the device types until Memory amp Emicros appears in the field Page through the screens until you find AMD Move the cursor to the Manufacturer field enter the number to the left of AMD and press ENTER The Part list similar to the one in Figure 3 6 is displayed 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 9 Getting Started Figure 3 6 Part Number Selection Screen FILENAME RAM AVAIL Z176KB REV X XX Y YY MANUFACTURER PART I 0 FORMAT ors EE v NEM LEELZIELLLLLLLLLLLLLILLLLLILLLLLLLLLLLLLZLLILLLLLLSI PART MENU FOR MANUFACTURER AMD All Page lof 8 C1 2 R8 S PLCC 145 22P1 PLCC C27 27128A CZ ZURS8 T 155 ZZU10 10 C28 Z71Z8APC 28R8 T PLCC
231. ination RAM Disk RI Compare data Format select I 0 Translation Format S Input from disk I70 addr offset FFFFFFFF Output to disk Memory begin address ol Serial output User data size ol Download host command F1 Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or 7 Help 2 Make sure the parameters on the screen match your system configuration Use the following settings if you are using HiTerm on a PC connected to the Remote port on the programmer W Source Remote port Destination RAM I O Translation Format 83 Intel Hex I O Address Offset FFFFFFFF Memory Begin Address 0 User Data Size 0 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started 3 For now leave the Download Host Command blank If the other parameters are correct go to Download the File Note To find out more about the parameters see Chapter 4 To change a parameter move the cursor to the field you want to change type the new value then move the cursor to another field If the parameter is acceptable Parameter Entered is displayed If you enter an incorrect parameter the programmer beeps and displays an error message Continue until the displayed parameters match your configuration Download the File 1 Review Change to the directory that contains the data file you will download such as sample dat In DOS use the CD and DIR commands In HiTerm press ALT F6 ENTER to view the current directory If sample dat is in the current directory press E
232. ing Around Pressing the arrow keys moves the cursor in the direction indicated on the key The cursor will wrap around when it has reached the edge top bottom left right of a window Selecting a Menu Item To select a command either move the cursor to the menu item and press ENTER or press the first letter of the menu item For example to test the programmer select the Self test command on the More Commands menu To access the More Commands menu move the cursor to the More Commands menu item and press ENTER or press M The More Commands menu is displayed If it is not displayed press F1 and try again Figure 3 2 More Commands Menu Screen FILENAME MANUFACTURER I 70 FORMAT MORE COMMANDS Deuice checks Edit data File operations Job file Remote control Self test Transfer data Yield tally RAM AVAIL 2176KB PART REV X3x YY F1 Main menu FZ Prev menu F3 or 7 Help Move the cursor to the Self test menu item press the down arrow then press ENTER or S to run the command The Self test screen is displayed Figure 3 3 Self test Screen FILENAME MANUFACTURER 1 0 FORMAT MORE COMMANDS Configure system Deuice checks Edit data File operations Job file Remote control Transfer data Yield tally RAM AVAIL PART 128KB REU XXX WY SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TESTS Waveform board PASS Pin Control Unit PASS EPROM PASS Serial ports PASS System RAM PASS User RAM PASS Dis
233. insert notes or comments The programmer will ignore this field it will not be interpreted as data An example of a note field would be N Test Preload The Value Fields QF QP and QV JEDEC value fields define values or limits for the data file such as number of fuses The QF subfield defines the number of fuses in the device All of the value fields must occur before any device programming or testing fields appear in the data file Files with ONLY testing fields do not require the QF field and fields with ONLY programming data do not require the QP and QV fields The QF subfield tells the programmer how much memory to reserve for fuse data the number of fuses to set to the default condition and the number of fuses to include in the fuse checksum The QP subfield defines the number of pins or test conditions in the test vector and the QV subfield defines the maximum number of test vectors The P Field The P field remaps the device pinout and is used with the V test vector field An asterisk terminates the field The syntax of the field is as follows lt pin lt N gt list gt P lt pin number gt N lt pin lt N gt number gt lt delimiter gt lt number gt 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 33 Translation Formats The following example shows a P field V field and the resulting application P123456141516177891011 12 13 18 19 20 V0001 111000HLHHNNNNNNNNNN V0002 100000HHHLNNNNNNNNNN The result of applying the abo
234. ion uses RAM as a temporary storage buffer and alters the contents of RAM The programmer displays a list of devices if algorithm type K was selected in step 2 or a list of device manufacturers if algorithm type D or E was selected in step 2 Select a device or device manufacturer by typing the number next to it then press ENTER If the device or device manufacturer you want is not listed type CTRL N to see the next page 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands View If you selected a manufacturer in step 4 a list of devices made by the selected manufacturer is displayed Type the number next to the device you want to add to your Custom Menu then press ENTER to add the device Press CTRL N to see the next page of devices If prompted insert the Algorithm System disk that contains the algorithm you wish to add If the correct disk is not inserted the programmer will prompt you for the disk to insert when it is needed If you get the message Cannot access file_name sys the programmer could not find a system file on the disk inserted into the programmer s drive Insert the Algorithm System disk that contains the file For instance if the programmer could not access the file mem_alg sys which contains memory device algorithms insert the Memory algorithms disk Select additional devices from the current screen or press F2 to return to the manufacturer list if you were selecting devices from a manufacturers list Repeat steps
235. isplayed in the status window the name of the data file the amount of user RAM the version numbers of the algorithm system disk the device manufacturer and part number the family pinout code and the data translation format 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 11 Structured Test Vectors A string of test conditions applied to a PLD in a programmer tester to stimulate inputs and test outputs to ensure functionality A test vector is one such string for instance 20 characters for a 20 pin PLD with 10 input signals and 10 expected outputs Structured Test Vectors design Structured vectors created by the design engineer to confirm that the design is operating as intended for instance that a 10 bit counter is counting to 10 Design vectors are used both in preprogramming simulation and in manufacturing Structured Test Vectors device Structured vectors created by the design engineer test engineer or an automatic test vector generation program which confirm that the device is operating properly after programming For instance structured vectors can ensure that nothing can happen in the device to prevent the 10 bit counter from operating correctly An exhaustive set of device vectors will assure that no undetectable faults may occur Sumcheck A 4 or 8 digit hexadecimal number that when compared to the original data allows you to verify that a copy of the data matches the original data Memory devices have 8 digit sumchecks and lo
236. ith the programmer configured for High Speed Download you can download files from the PC to the programmer at 115 2K baud significantly reducing the transfer time for a large data file Note To obtain the best results we recommend you use a 486 or higher PC To use this feature you must control the programmer from a PC the PC must be connected to the programmer s Remote port and you must use TaskLink or HiTerm as your terminal emulation software High Speed Download supports the following formats Formatted Binary 10 Motorola EXORciser 82 Motorola EXORmax 87 Motorola 32 bit 95 Intel INTELLEC 83 Intel MCS 86 88 Intel Hex 32 99 W JEDEC full 91 During a high speed download the data file on the PC is translated into a special binary format and compressed the baud rates on the PC and the programmer are changed to 115 2K baud then the data file is downloaded to the programmer After the download the baud rates on the PC and programmer are restored to their original values Note A temporary copy of the data file is compressed your original data file is not changed Setting Up High Speed Download with TaskLink High Speed Download is enabled as the default in TaskLink V1 7 and higher If needed enable High Speed Download by following these steps 1 From the programmer main menu select M More Commands C Configure System E Edit C Communication Select the box next to the High Speed Download fie
237. k PASS Adapter Relays PASS Pin Driver Board 1 PASS Pin Driver Board Z PASS P Pass F Fail 1 Untested 1Not installed Perform All Tests Test mode DISS Return Execute F1 Main menu FZ Preu menu F3 or 7 Help 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Using Key Functions Some of the programmer s functions may be performed by pressing a key or a combination of keys To use the CTRL key hold it down then momentarily press the second key The key functions are listed below with their corresponding keystroke sequence Keystrokes Description F1 Return to the Main Menu F2 Go to the previous menu F3 or Display online Help for the current menu and cursor position F4 Display the Optional Parameters screen ENTER Execute highlighted command SPACE Toggle a parameter CTRL N Display next page CTRL P Display previous page CTRL R Repaint screen CTRL Z Halt current operation Esc CTRL T Enter exit transparent mode with host computer Esc CTRL J Start stop job file recording Esc CTRL W Restart the programmer warm boot BREAK A Execute AutoBaud ALT F1 Exit HiTerm In most cases press the F2 key to exit a menu selection If this does not work you can press the CTRL Z keys to cancel the operation Selecting Online Help Online Help screens provide both general Help and context sensitive Help information specific to a particular field on the screen To access Help move the cursor to the item you want to
238. ke sure the device socket is empty 2 Select the test mode You can select either one pass or continuous testing To toggle modes move the cursor to the Test Mode field and press SPACE One Pass testing runs the specified test once Continuous testing runs the specified test until there is a failure or until you halt the procedure by pressing CTRL Z Note There may be a delay before the programmer responds to the Ctri Z if the programmer is running the system RAM test 3 To test all hardware move the cursor to the Perform All Tests prompt and press ENTER To test a particular item move the cursor to the desired test and press ENTER Interpreting Self test Results 4 60 Four conditions are used as status indicators on the self test screen UNTESTED P PASS F FAIL NOT INSTALLED When testing begins a appears next to the untested areas As each test completes either P pass or F fail appears next to the test name showing the results of the test performed If a hardware item is not installed a appears During testing the message area of the self test screen indicates that testing is in progress During the System RAM test the Remote and the Terminal indicators blinks to indicate that testing is in progress 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands If symbols still appear next to some test names when the testing has completed it may be because some other test s need to pass before the indicated one m
239. l Bit Check 4 41 Logic Verification default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 21 Program Logic Device 4 11 Verify Logic Device 4 15 3980 3900 2900 User Manual M Main Menu Job Files Edit Interface Parameters 4 30 Maintenance 1 7 Manufacturer default setting 4 3 selecting 4 5 Mass Storage command 4 38 Master device inserting 3 14 MatchBooks 1 8 installing 2 20 Memory Address Complement Data 4 51 Memory Begin Address Compare Data 4 65 default setting 4 3 Download Data 4 62 Edit Programming Parameters 4 22 Fill Memory 4 52 Input from Disk 4 66 Load File 4 54 Load Memory Device 4 9 Output Memory Data 4 68 Output to Disk 4 67 Program Memory Device 4 13 Save File 4 55 Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Swap Data 4 53 Upload Data 4 63 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Memory Device Illegal Bit Check 4 42 Menus navigating 3 5 Message bar 3 5 Messages display of 3 5 list of 6 1 Move Data 4 52 Move Programmer Memory Data 4 52 MSM upgrade 1 8 N Navigating through menus session 3 5 Next Device Illegal Bit Check Memory Device 4 42 Load Memory Device 4 8 Program Memory Device 4 12 Verify Memory Device 4 16 Next Operation Begins At Illegal Bit Check Memory Device 4 42 Index 5 Load Memory Device 4 9 Program Memory Device 4 12 Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Verify Memory Device 4 16 Number of Lines Between Form Feeds Output Logic Data 4 68 Output Memory Data 4 68 Number
240. l for supported baud rates 3 Parity Specify None N Odd O or Even E Only the first character of the line is significant 4 Data bits Specify 7 or 8 5 Stop bits Specify 1 or 2 6 COM port Specify 1 or 2 7 PC type Select IBM compatible I NEC s PC 9800 family N or Autodetect A if you are not sure If HiTerm cannot read the file the following default settings are used Programmer mode 9600 baud no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit COM port 1 Autodetect d Edit the program bat file that runs HiTerm to reflect the location of the configuration files The example shows a program bat file modified to reflect HiTerm s installation in the c util hiterm directory echo off Rem HITERM will use the configuration filename Rem from command line if present If not 1 HITERM e util hiterm 1 Rem HITERM will use PRG9600 CFG if no Rem configuration file is specified If 1 HITERM e util hiterm prg9600 cfg 3980 3900 2900 User Manual e Reboot your PC HiTerm installation is now complete f To run HiTerm type program at the DOS prompt To exit HiTerm press ALT F1 2900 3900 users Go to Insert Boot Disk in Programmer on page 2 10 3980 users Go to Install the Base on page 2 11 Connecting to a Host To connect the programmer to a host you need the following W An unused RS 232C serial port on the host W A 25 pin serial cable For more information about cables or to build
241. laced algorithms is 10 More Commands Configure System Keep Current Delete This command deletes a KCx file from a disk To delete a file from a disk follow these steps 1 2 Insert the disk with the KCx file you want to delete into the disk drive When you select the Delete command the dialog window fills with a directory listing The programmer displays up to 10 files at one time If there are more than 10 files press CTRL N to display the next page of files Press CTRL P to display the first page of files 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 33 Commands Purge If you do not see the file you want to delete press F2 insert another disk and return to the beginning of this step Move the cursor to the Delete field and enter the number corresponding to the file to be deleted Move the cursor to the Are you sure field and press Y CAUTION If you do not want to delete the file do not press Enter To delete the file press ENTER If you do not want to delete the file press F2 to return to the Keep Current Configuration menu More Commands Configure System Keep Current Purge This command deletes all outdated KCx files from a disk leaving only the up to date algorithms To purge files from a disk follow these steps 1 2 4 Insert the disk with the KCx files you want to purge into the disk drive Select the Purge command A list is displayed showing the outdated Keep Current files those with
242. ld identifiers JEDEC field identifiers are defined as follows A Access time N Note field B m O C Checksum field P Pin sequence D Device type Q Value field E R Resulting vector field F Default fuse state field S Starting vector G Security fuse field T Test cycles H m U I x V Test vector field J T W K Fuse list field hex format X default test condition L Fuse list field Y M Z Reserved for future use Device Field D Device selection by this field is not supported by the programmer It has been replaced by the QF and QP fields and manual selection of devices 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 31 Translation Formats Fuse Information Fields L K F C 5 32 fuse information default state gt fuse list fuse list fuse checksum gt fuse list L number lt delimiter gt lt binary digit gt delimiter fuse list K number lt delimiter gt lt hex digit gt lt delimiter gt default state F binary digit fuse checksum C lt hex digit gt 4 Each fuse of a device is assigned a decimal number and has two possible states zero specifying a low resistance link or one specifying a high resistance link The state of each fuse in the device is given by three fields the fuse list L field or K field the default state F field and the fuse checksum C field Fuse states are explicitly defined
243. ld to enable it 2 Press F1 M R to return the programmer to Remote mode then press Alt F1 to go to TaskLink 3 From TaskLink s Main Menu select Options Set Preferences Select the box next to the Enable High Speed Download option to enable it Setting Up High Speed Download with HiTerm Follow these steps to connect your PC to the programmer s Remote port and configure the programmer to run in Terminal mode from the Remote port 1 Start HiTerm 2 Power up the programmer If the programmer is already powered up reboot it by pressing Esc CTRL W Boot up as normal 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 17 From the Main Menu press MC EC to get to the Communication Parameters screen Move the cursor to the High Speed Download field then press Y The programmer displays Hit return to switch user menu port Z to abort Press ENTER You will see no response on the screen The User Menu Port parameter is set to R which configures the programmer to send its user interface data to the Remote port The Terminal port is the factory default for the User Menu Port User interface data includes screens menu information and online Help Move the cable connecting the programmer and the PC from the Terminal A port to the Remote B port The Terminal LED should go out and the Remote LED be lit If the Remote LED does not light turn off the programmer reconnect the PC cable to the Terminal A port then return to step 1 Press CTRL R to re
244. le You are prompted to swap disks when necessary To copy a group of files you can use an asterisk as a wildcard in the name of the source and destination file To begin the copying press ENTER CAUTION If you do not want to copy the file do not press Enter Press F2 to return to the File Operations menu Duplicate Disk More Commands File Operations Duplicate Disks 4 56 Use this command to duplicate an entire disk using the programmer You can also duplicate a disk using DOS These methods are described below Note No matter which version you use to copy the disk we recommend you write protect your source disk by sliding its write protect tab so you can see through the hole it exposes 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Using DOS If you have access to a DOS based PC with a 1 44MB 3 5 inch disk drive we suggest that you use the DOS DISKCOPY not the COPY command to copy your Algorithm System disks and Boot disk The backup must be an exact bit for bit sector for sector copy of the original For more information see your DOS manual Note If you use the DOS DISKCOPY command to duplicate a disk make sure that the destination disk has been formatted on the programmer before the copy is made See the More Commands File Operations Format Disk command for more information Using the Programmer To use Duplicate Disk command to duplicate a disk using the programmer follow these steps 1 Insert the disk you want t
245. le if you are using 8 bit devices and have specified a word width of 16 bits on the Load Memory Device screen it requires two devices to store each 16 bit word Type 1 for the next set member to direct the programmer to load the first device in the set at even address bytes of the memory block Type 2 to direct the programmer to load the second device at odd address bytes of the memory block 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands WB Total Set Size Specifies the number of virtual devices in the set for device operations For example if you are loading 16 bit wide data from two 8 bit wide devices your virtual device still equals one one 16 bit virtual device Enter any number from 1 to 99 Automatic Set Size calculation will be attempted when any of the following parameters are changed Device Width Data Word Width Device Block Size or User Data Size Total Set Size can be defined by the following equation USER DATA SIZE DATA WORD WIDTH DEVICE WIDTH TOTAL SET SIZE DEVICE BLOCK SIZE W User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block used to load from the device to the destination This value is normally equal to the device size or to a multiple of the device size for loading a set If O or a value less than the device size is entered it is reset to the device size for the load User Data Size works with Total Set Size to determine the total amount of bytes to load from a set of devices
246. le types of data compression The programmer s implementation of UNZIP supports only imploded data files and will extract only the first file in a ZIP file All remaining files in the ZIP file will be ignored as will all files not stored in the imploded format The LOF format contains both a subset and a superset of the JEDEC format described in this chapter This section describes only the fields that are extensions of the JEDEC standard or that are unique to the LOF format See the section explaining the JEDEC format for information on the standard JEDEC fields See page 5 27 for information on obtaining a copy of the JEDEC Standard 3A LOF Field Syntax The LOF character set consists of all the characters that are permitted with the JEDEC format all printable ASCII characters and four control characters The four allowable control characters are STX ETX CR Return and LF line feed Other control characters such as Esc or Break should not be used Note This is Data I O Corporation s implementation of Quicklogic s Link Object Format Contact Quicklogic for a more in depth explanation of the format and its syntax 5 12 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats LOF Fields The following fields are included in Data I O s implementation of the LOF format STX C K N QB QC QF QM QP QS ETX gt Start of Data ASCII Ctrl B 0x02 hex Fuse Checksum Fuse data followed by control words and pulse
247. led as a factory default To run AutoBaud press BREAK then A After running AutoBaud you should see the Power on screen If so go to the next step Power on Screen If you do not see the Power on screen return to Checking the Connections When to Use AutoBaud Normally you can set the communication parameters on the controlling PC workstation terminal to match the programmer s baud rate Use AutoBaud when you will not be able to set the controlling equipment s baud rate to match the programmer s For example use AutoBaud to control the programmer with a terminal that cannot operate at 9600 baud Set the terminal s baud rate as close to 9600 as possible then run AutoBaud when the programmer boots up 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 15 6 Power on Screen The Power on screen is displayed after the programmer completes its powerup self test successfully The version and configuration information for the programmer along with the current and default terminal types are displayed Figure 2 8 Typical Power on Screen HEHEHE HHHHH HEHHE HHHHH HH HHH HHEHH HHH HHHHH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH Hi Hi HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH Hit HH HH HH Hit HH HH HHH HH HH HH HH HH HH HHH HHHHHH HH HH Hi HH HH HHH HHHHHH HHHHH nH HH iti HH HH HH Hit HH HH Hit HH HH HH oH HH iti HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH THEO HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HHHHH HHH TERRIER HHHHH HH THE HHH H
248. lex machine The 5 level BNPF format does not have addresses 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 5 Translation Formats Note Data without a start or end code may be input to or output from the programmer by use of the alternate data translation format code 09 This format accepts an abort character 10 hex to abort the transmission Formatted Binary Format Code 10 Data transfer in the Formatted Binary format consists of a stream of 8 bit data bytes preceded by a byte count and followed by a sumcheck as shown in Figure 5 3 The Formatted Binary format does not have addresses Figure 5 3 Formatted Binary Format example HIGH ORDER ORDER LOW _ 2 BYTE HEX SUMCHECK 02FB 2 NULLS m BINARY DATA BIT Ba 4 amp RUBOUT START CODE 0 4 NIBBLE HEX BYTE COUNT t 4E 1 NULL 0 T 0020 HEX ARROW 49 82 DECIMAL HEAD 2 2A 1C 08 0075 2 The programmer stores incoming binary data upon receipt of the start character Data are stored in RAM starting at the first RAM address specified by the Memory Begin Address parameter and ending at the last incoming data byte 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats A paper tape generated by a programmer contains a 5 byte arrow shaped header followed by a null and a 4 nibble byte count The start code an 8 bit rubout follows the byte count The end of data is signaled by two nulls and a 2 byte sumcheck of the data f
249. ll Parameters screen displays the following additional parameters To toggle between the two screens press F4 Memory Begin Address Specifies the beginning RAM address in hex against which the first byte of data is verified during a verify operation The Memory Begin Address must be an even address if you have selected a 16 bit device The default is 0 Device Begin Address Specifies the first hex device address that will be verified Device Block Size Specifies the size in hex of device data used in device operations When you select a device Device Block Size is automatically set to the device size and normally does not need to be changed It is also automatically set to a smaller value if the Device Begin Address is nonzero This parameter can be changed if desired If a zero is entered the Device Block Size is set automatically to equal the device size Set Auto increment When enabled directs the programmer when in a set verify mode to the starting memory address of the next data block that is to be verified For example if you have four 1K x 8 devices to verify against a 4K x 8 block of data using the auto increment option directs the programmer to point to the first address of the next 1K block after each device has been verified For single device operations this feature should be disabled and the Next Device parameter should be set to 1 Note Items with an asterisk are visible on the screen only if the selected de
250. lle 5 8 POF Programmer Object File Format Code 14 5 9 Absolute Binary Format Code 16 lle 5 11 LOF Format Code 17 leer Ee 5 12 LOF Field Syntax elec 5 12 ASCII Octal and Hex Formats Codes 30 37 and 50 58 5 14 RCA Cosmac Format Code 70 lesen 5 16 Fairchild Fairbug Code 80 0 000 eee es 5 17 MOS Technology Format Code 81 es 5 18 3980 3900 2900 User Manual V 6 Messages A Performance Verification Motorola EXORciser Format Code 82 es 5 19 Intel Intellec 8 MDS Format Code83 leen 5 20 Signetics Absolute Object Format Code 85 es 5 20 Tektronix Hexadecimal Format Code 86 eee 5 21 Motorola EXORmacs Format Code 87 0 0 eee ees 5 22 Intel MCS 86 Hexadecimal Object Code 88 0200 5 23 Hewlett Packard 64000 Absolute Format Code 89 5 25 Texas Instruments SDSMAC Format Code 90 eee ee 5 26 JEDEC Format Codes 91 and 92 1 llle 5 27 BNF Rules and Standard Definitions llle 5 28 JEDEC Full Format Code91 lees 5 30 JEDEC Field Syntax sc c curawan cler 5 31 Field Identifiers 5 31 JEDECU and EFields lle 5 34 JEDEC Kernel Mode Code92 lees 5 37 Extended Tektronix Hexadecimal Format Code94 5 37 Motorola 32 Bit Format Code 95 1 lees 5 39 H
251. llowing procedures to install devices in the programmer s Base Inserting a DIP Device into a DIP Base leeren Installing a MatchBook into a Base llllllll ee Inserting a PLCC or LCC Device into a MatchBook ll Inserting an SOIC Device into a MatchBook lere Inserting a PGA Device into a PGA Base lle Inserting a DIP Device into a DIP Base Install the DIP Base 2 Unlock the socket by pulling up on the socket lever Insert the DIP device into the socket Bottom justify the device as shown in Figure 2 9 If the device is not bottom justified the programmer cannot read or program the device 4 Lock the device into place by pressing the socket lever down Figure 2 9 Inserting a DIP Device into the DIP Base SOCKET LEVERS UNLOCKED E t SOCKET LEVERS LOCKED 0548 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 19 Installing a MatchBook into a Base The MatchBook device carrier holds a device in place on the Base When the device is locked into place the conductive pad in the Base forms a conductive path between the pin drivers in the programmer and the device in the MatchBook The following procedure describes how to use a MatchBook and how to insert and remove devices from a MatchBook 1 Insert the Base into the programmer and lock it into place 2 Select the appropriate MatchBook open it 909 set the front edge under the two locking tabs at the
252. lowing 1 Press F1 to go to the Main Menu 2 Type M to select the More Commands menu 3 Press R to select Computer Remote Control The programmer is now in Remote Control mode Except for CTRL Z all keyboard input will be ignored On Powerup The programmer enters either terminal or CRC mode during powerup based on the following combination of port connections and parameter settings Parameter Settings Port Connections Power Up User Terminal Remote CRC Menu Port Connected Connected Result Off T Terminal Yes Yes Terminal mode on Terminal port Off T Terminal No Yes CRC mode on Remote port Off R Remote X Yes Terminal mode on Remote port On X X Yes CRC mode on Remote port X X Yes No Terminal mode on Terminal port Note X don t care condition If you want the programmer to power up in CRC perform the following steps 1 Press F1 to get to the Main Menu Type M to select the More Commands menu 2 3 Press C to select the Configure System menu 4 Press E to select Edit from the Configure Systems menu 5 Press I to select Interface from the Edit menu The programmer displays the interface parameters B 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Computer Remote Control 6 Move the cursor to the Power on CRC field and press Y CRC is now selected The following steps in this procedure save CRC mode as a powerup system parameter Press F2 two times to return to the Configure System Parameters menu Press S to select Sa
253. lustrative purposes Actual data files are in binary code and are typically generated by the appropriate development software 0474 2 Intel OMF386 Format Code 97 This data translation format is considered by Intel to be proprietary information Contact your local Intel representative or call 408 987 8080 for information about the structure of this format 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 41 Translation Formats Intel OMF286 Format Code 98 The Intel OMF286 format is a dynamically allocatable file format This format has three basic parts the file header data file module and a 1 byte checksum The file header is hexadecimal number A2 that identifies this file as an Intel OMF 286 format file See Figure 5 23 Figure 5 23 Intel OMF286 Format example File Header A2 F3 FF FF 00 30 38 2F 30 34 2F 38 37 30 38 3A 34 33 3A 30 31 1C 69 41 50 58 32 38 36 20 53 59 Data File Header 53 54 45 4D 20 42 55 49 4C 44 45 52 2C 20 56 33 2E 32 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 3F 01 Last Location 00 80 FF 00 FF 00 40 81 FF 00 18 00 ASBTXT Location 50 00 00 00 Table of Contents DEBTXT Location 45B 66 00 OO0l 6B EF 00 00H00 00 00 90 199 00 00 00 Reserved ASBTXT Location 40 01 00 2C 00 00 00 00 04 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 Next Partition 00 00 00 6E 4F 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Section 04 00 04 00 00 00 00 28 00 20 00 28 00 28 0000 _ 00 70 01 00 2C 00 00 00 00 04 28 00 00 00 00 00 Secti
254. m type 0 1 2 3 Set RAM device selection See Application Note AAA AA gt See Application Note gt Displays terminal screen AAA AA gt gt gt Select algorithm source for floppy disk gt MSM not available 3980 3900 2900 User Manual B 7 Computer Remote Control Command Description Response XXX XXXx53 Save RAM data to disk file gt 54 Upload device footnote See Application Note 55 Upload device specific message See Application Note 56 Upload memory verify failure ddPAAAAAAAAHHhh 57 Get checksum of operation See Application Note 58 Upload system ID HHHH HHHH HHHH gt 5A Display list of parameters See Application Note 5B Clear vector data gt 5C Load system files for Custom Menu gt CM algorithm disk 5D Write system files to CM disk gt 5E Write algorithms to CM disk gt 60 Get number of sectors dd gt n 61 Get sector configuration settings HHHH HHHH gt nhhhhhhhh62 Get sector configuration settings gt 63 Reboot the programmer gt XXX XXXx64 A65 A7 DC EB EC FC FD FE B 8 Select device part number for CM use xxx xxxx33 to select the manufacturer Returns software version number Swap bytes Device check Input JEDEC data from host Output JEDEC data to host Restore CRC entry default parameters Restore user defined CRC parameters Save user defined CRC parameters n nnx where x may be a blank gt See Application Note gt gt gt g
255. mands File Operations Copy File command If no Keep Current algorithms are found or if the algorithms are not compatible with the current version of your system software the following message is displayed Insert Keep Current algorithm disk If this message is displayed insert a disk with compatible Keep Current algorithms into the disk drive and try again On the Replace Restore screen the dialog window fills with a directory listing with parts marked as replaced displayed in reverse video The programmer displays up to 10 files at one time If there are more than 10 files press CTRL N to display the next page of files Press CTRL P to display the first page of files Note that the only KCx files displayed are those that W Have a corresponding algorithm in alg sys the algorithm can already be selected during the normal device selection W Are compatible with your version of the system software To view files on another disk press F2 insert another disk and return to the beginning of this step Move the cursor to the Replace Restore field and enter the number corresponding to the file you want to replace or restore To toggle the file press ENTER If you do not want to toggle the file press F2 to return to the File Operations menu If you toggle the part to replaced status it is displayed in reverse video If the part was already marked as replaced it is toggled to restored status Note The maximum number of rep
256. mat bytes are recorded in ASCII codes with binary digits represented by 1s and Os During output each byte is preceded by a decimal address Figure 5 5 shows sample data bytes coded in the Spectrum format Bytes are sandwiched between the space and carriage return characters and are normally separated by line feeds The start code is a nonprintable STX CTRL B or hex 02 and the end code is a nonprintable ETX CTRL C or hex 03 Figure 5 5 Spectrum Format example Optional Start Code 0000 11111111 is a nonprintable STX 0001 11111111 0002 11111111 0003 11111111 0004 11111111 0005 11111111 0006 11111111 0007 11111111 0008 11111111 0009 11111111 0010 11111111 0011 11111111 0012 XIITITIT 0013 11111111 0014 111 11 0015 111111110 4 End code is a nonprintable EXT Address Code is 4 L 4 or 8 data bits appear between the decimal digits space and the carriage return noe Note Data without a start or end code may be input to or output from the programmer by use of the alternate data translation format code 13 5 8 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats POF Programmer Object File Format Code 14 The POF Programmer Object File format provides a highly compact data format to enable translation of high bit count logic devices efficiently This format currently applies to MAX devices such as the Altera 5032 The information contained in the file is grou
257. mber of devices attempted the number of devices that programmed successfully the number of devices that failed non blank test or illegal bit check the number of devices that failed to verify the number of devices that could not be programmed because they contained bits that required more programming pulses than were specified and for logic devices only the number of devices that failed structured vector test ZIF Socket An acronym for Zero Insertion Force A socket in which the device can be dropped in and engaged via a lever 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 15 D 16 3980 3900 2900 User Manual A Abort on Empty Socket default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 25 ac receptacle 1 4 Accessory package 1 8 Algorithm Source default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 21 Algorithm type Programming Parameters 4 21 selecting 4 5 Algorithm System Disk 1 4 duplicating 1 4 inserting 2 10 Antistatic wrist strap connecting to 2 13 minimum resistance 2 13 A 1 AutoBaud 2 15 running 2 15 3 7 User Menu Port 2 15 B Back panel 1 4 Base 1 8 conductive pad 2 29 installing 2 11 MatchBooks 1 8 PPI 2 24 Baud rates editing serial port configuration 4 25 Blank Check default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 overview 4 42 Program Logic Device 4 11 Program Memory Device 4 14 Blank Device Checks 4 42 Block Size Complement Data 4 51 Fill Memory 4 52 Move Data 4 52 Swap Da
258. mcheck for a memory device 1 Select and socket a memory device 2 Enter the parameters described below 3 Press ENTER The programmer calculates and displays the 8 digit sumcheck 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 39 Commands The following parameters appear on this screen 4 40 Sumcheck Entire RAM Besides calculating the device and set sumchecks this option specifies that the sumcheck operation calculate the sumcheck of the entire RAM Memory Begin Address Specifies the first address in hex of the first byte of data to be sumchecked beginning RAM address The default address is 0 User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size of the data block to be sumchecked This value usually equals the device size or a multiple of device size for sumchecking a set Entering 0 resets User Data Size to the device size for sumchecking RAM Data Word Width Sets the word width in bits of the data to be sumchecked For 8 bit or larger devices the minimum word width is equal to the device word width and the maximum is 64 For 4 bit devices valid choices are 4 8 16 and 32 The Data Word Width should match the word width of the data bus in the target system for the device being programmed Total Set Size Specifies how many virtual devices are in the set to be sumchecked Either enter a number between 1 and 99 or change one of these parameters and the programmer will calculate the Total Set Size Memory Begin Address User Data Size
259. me for the file you want to rename CAUTION If you do not want to rename the file do not press Enter To rename the file press ENTER If you do not want to rename the file press F2 to return to the File Operations menu More Commands File Operations Copy File Use the Copy command to copy a file or a group of files To copy a file or group of files follow these steps 1 2 Insert the disk with the file you want to copy into the disk drive When you select the Copy File command the dialog window fills with the directory listing The programmer displays up to 28 files at one time If there are more than 28 files press CTRL N to display the next page of files Press CTRL P to display the first page of files If you do not see the file you want to copy press F2 insert another disk and go back to step 1 Move the cursor to the From field Enter the name of the source file Move the cursor to the To field and enter the name of the destination file Move the cursor to the Single Drive File Copy to Different Disk field W To copy the file to a different disk set this parameter to Y The programmer prompts you to insert the source disk or destination disk at the appropriate times This operation results in RAM being used as a temporary storage buffer and alters the contents of RAM W To copy one file at a time to the same disk set this parameter to N Make sure the destination file has a different filename than the source fi
260. meters for test vector editing as described below Press ENTER The screen displays any test vectors for the selected device If the source data does not match the device type selected a message appears indicating the file is not initialized Type C to initialize it You can enter either data or commands as you edit You may type only certain test conditions and use only certain keyboard commands in the vector editor The editor commands are described after the parameter list The parameters are described below Source R D Specifies the source of the test vectors to be edited Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D Disk Filename Specifies the name of the disk file containing the test vector data to edit This option appears only if you select Disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions for example 16r8 dat Edit Begin Vector Specifies the first test vector you want to edit Move the cursor to the Edit Begin Vector field and enter the vector number which must be less than or equal to the last vector in RAM or the disk file This field defaults to 1 Test Conditions The test conditions and the allowed commands are listed below Vector Symbol Description 0 1 2 9 Drives the specified input pin low Drives the specified input pin high Super voltages defined by the device s manufacturer Buried register preload 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Vector Symbol Descriptio
261. mmer Menus 3 5 Programmer Main Menu 1 ee nnn 3 5 Moving Around llle 3 6 Selecting a Menu Item 1 2 2 ee 3 6 Using Key Functions leer hr 3 7 Selecting Online Help llle 3 7 REVIEW sca es koe Roe x xo Rb m a Rae eR Re wae ORO AGE Rowe RE ED eS 3 8 Session 3 Selecting a Device ee ee 3 9 Select a Manufacturer llle 3 9 Select a Device Part Number 0000 llle 3 10 Accessing Device specific Online Information 3 10 REVIEW e C TT x rre 3 10 Session 4 Selecting a Keep Current Algorithm 3 11 Insert the Keep Current Algorithm Disk sese 3 11 Select the Keep Current Option 0200002 eee 3 11 Select the Keep Current Algorithm llli 0 eee 3 12 Keep Current Algorithms and Software Updates 3 13 Session 5 Loading Data from a Device llle 3 14 Select the Device leer ns 3 14 Insert the Master Device llle 3 14 Set the Parameters leer 3 15 Load the Data eller hrs 3 16 REVIEW ca cs onde xw x kk e RUE XE EUR oso e URES koe eoe we le ox 3 16 Session 6 Loading Data from a Disk llle 3 17 REVIEW ues Ga haha RUE RON Male Wa haga wa we ER dne ELK c Oe E e e 3 18 Session 7 Selecting a Translation Format eens 3 19 REVIEW 2h odo kon RES xe x eA wate kta ed US ARE AP RO NOR hats e RR ec 3 19 Session 8 Loading Data f
262. more than 44 pins 2900 or 84 pins 3900 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 7 Messages OPERATION COMPLETE Sumcheck hhhhhhhh Set Sumcheck ssssssss The Set Program Load or Verify operation is complete hhhhhhhh is the sumcheck of data that was just programmed into the last set member ssssssss is the sumcheck of all the set members that have been programmed Options installed Hit Return after changing your terminal settings This message appears on the Serial Port Configuration screen after you change serial port parameters and press ENTER The programmer suspends screen output until you press ENTER again Be sure to configure the terminal to match the new settings for the serial port Parameter Entered The parameter you entered was accepted Parameter Field Full Hit return or arrows to enter CTRL Z to abort You tried to enter too many characters into a parameter field Press ENTER F1 or F2 to enter the parameter Partial or no transfer performed Data sum hhhhhh See page 6 19 Power Down The programmer experienced a power down condition Pre format check The programmer is checking to see if the disk you want to format is a System disk Go to the self test screen and re execute the test s that shows status of F Fail If the test s fails while the device socket is empty the programmer may require service Contact Data I O Customer Support Purging filename ext This message is displayed when you are using the
263. mpty then turn on the programmer The MSM is partitioned into four logical drives with the following specifications Max No Drive Storage of Files Data Type C 31 MB 512 User data D 31 MB 512 User data H 7 MB 320 System data I 10 MB 320 System data Drives C and D are reserved for user data and drives H and I are reserved for system use Although drives H and I can be written to and read from we STRONGLY suggest you use only C and D to store your data Periodically copy the data on the C and D drives to use as a backup if needed Drives C and D can be used for same file operations that can be performed using the floppy drive except for these two file operations W Format Disk Format only C and D Formatting H or I will render your programmer inoperative until you restore them from the floppy disks Duplicate Disk Drives C D H and I cannot be duplicated using this command 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2 31 2 32 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 Getting Started Before you start the Sessions in this chapter read chapters 1 and 2 and make sure the programmer is connected and working correctly The Sessions will help you learn the basics of programmer operation For more information about commands refer to Chapter 4 The following Sessions are included For TaskLink Users 1 Programming a Device auaa aaa rns 3 2 For HiTerm Users 2 Navigating Through the Programmer Menus llle sss 3 5 3 Selecting a Device
264. n C A xt 10 r Drives the specified input with a sequence of logic states in this case low high and low high clock Single transition that drives specified input low using a fast slew rate Specifies that a specific input or output pin is to be tri stated Verifies that the specified output pin is high Drives the specified input with a sequence of logic states in this case high low and high low clock Verifies that the specified output pin is low Specifies that a particular input or output pin is floating tri stated The programmer s F and N conditions perform the same function Identifies a preload vector and runs a preload algorithm It is allowed on the clock pin ONLY otherwise it is treated as an X A single transition that drives the specified input high using fast slew rate equivalent to C without returning to the low state If more than 16 Ds or Us are used in any one test vector the extra Ds or Us are ignored during test Ignores the state of an output pin A logic level specified by a JEDEC file is applied Default value is X field value 1 or O Verifies the specified input or output pin has high impedance The programmer will toggle the pin using a small current during this test Note C K U and D are clock functions that allow setup time Vector Editor Commands Command Keystrokes Description Jump to CTRL B Moves the cursor to a specific vector A highlighted Vector field appears jus
265. n vent Conductive Pad The conductive pad see Figure 2 20 is a key element in the MatchBook technology To help keep yields high and prolong the life of the pad keep it free of dirt and other contamination We recommend you inspect and clean it at least every 1000 device insertions or once a month whichever comes first Figure 2 20 Conductive Pad CONDUCTIVE PAD DO NOT REMOVE 2801 1 The life of the pad also depends on the pin count and package type of the device you are using Different tolerances may result in different life cycles for the pad An increase in device insertion errors or continuity errors or a sudden drop in programming yields may indicate the pad needs to be replaced Note You may notice an indentation in the middle of the pad after a number of insertions The indentation is normal and does not degrade the performance of the MatchBook It is also normal for the pad to show signs of discoloration as it is used Cleaning the Pad Blow air over the pad to clean it If you use compressed air direct the air stream from the front or back of the Base not from the side CAUTION To avoid lifting the pad off the circuit board do not blow air from the side of the pad To further clean the pad apply a small amount of isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab and with a rolling motion gently wipe off the pad Make sure the pad is free of any cotton filaments left over after cleaning CAUTION Do not use petroleum or
266. nd algorithm files on the Mass Storage Module MSM hard drive Refer to the User Notes accompanying the updated software for the complete update procedure 1 2 Select the Mass Storage command After following the appropriate update steps in the User Notes shipped with the updated system software set the following fields to update the MSM Use the arrow keys to move between fields and press Space to toggle the entry in the field Install the new version of software Type Y to install the new version of system software on drive H and I The programmer must have been booted up with the new Boot disk Maintain the Previous Configuration If you select Y the programmer will update the floppy disk with the configuration parameters then load them onto the MSM If you select N the factory default configuration will be installed Factory default settings are always accessible through the Main Menu Configure System Restore screen 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands 3 Press ENTER to start the installation Follow any instructions on the screen CAUTION Do not remove disks from the programmer during this operation unless you are prompted to do so When installation is complete OPERATION IS COMPLETE is displayed Device Checks More Commands Device Checks The commands on the Device Checks menu allow you to check devices you want to program and to check data in user memory Commands available on this menu include m
267. nd find the file number of the file you want to restore 3 Enter the file number of the configuration file you want to restore and press ENTER The programmer loads the system parameters and displays System parameters restored Note When you restore a configuration the device algorithm selected when the configuration file was saved if any will also be restored When you return to a screen the cursor will be where you left it Restoring parameters to factory defaults or powerup defaults returns the cursor to its original position Restoring parameters to user defined defaults has no effect on cursor positions 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 19 Commands Edit Parameters More Commands Configure System Edit Parameters 4 20 Use the commands on the Edit menu to change system parameters including settings for Programming Serial I O Communication and Interface screens Select Edit from the Configure System menu to display the Edit Parameter menu Default settings are shown on page 4 3 The following system parameters can be saved and restored with the More Commands Configure System Save and More Commands Configure System Restore commands Serial Port Parameters Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Enable CTS DTR Programming Parameters Source Destination Reject Option Logic Verification Verify Passes Verify Data Format Checksum Calculation Algorithm Type Data Word Width User Data Size Memory Begin Add
268. nformation or to order Keep Current Subscription Service contact Data I O Customer Support Repair Service After the warranty period expires repair services are available at Data I O Service Centers worldwide Single instance repairs and fixed price annual agreements that cover all parts and labor needed to correct normal malfunctions are also available The annual agreements include semiannual performance certification For more information or to order a Repair Service Agreement contact Data I O Customer Support End User Registration and Address Change If the end user for this product or your address has changed since the Registration Card was mailed please notify Data I O Customer Support to ensure that you receive information about product enhancements Be sure to include the product serial number if available 3980 3900 2900 User Manual xiii xiv 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 1 Introduction Product Descriptions The 2900 3900 and 3980 Programming Systems are precision tools for programming and verifying virtually all programmable device technologies and packages 2900 Programming System The 2900 has 44 universal analog and digital pin drivers The standard DIP base supports DIP packages to 48 pins The optional PPI Base and adapters extend support to devices in other package styles 3900 Programming System The 3900 has 88 universal pin drivers capable of supporting devices of all pin sizes The optional PLCC bas
269. ng or verifying It can also refer to other available commands such as Device Check and Electronic Erase Device Word Width The number of bits in the data word of the device DIP An acronym for Dual In line Package a type of device package Dialog Window The largest window on the screen The dialog window displays different information and system parameters depending on the selected command 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 3 Download Data A file operation that moves a data file from a host computer to the programmer s RAM or disk Download Echoing Displays the data being downloaded Download Host Command A command that is sent from the programmer to the host during a download The command tells the host to begin sending data to the programmer DUART An acronym for Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter E MICRO An acronym for Programmable Microcontroller a type of device technology EPROM An acronym for Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Usually refers to UV erasable memories EEPROM An acronym for Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory The device can be either completely or partially electrically erased in circuit or on the programmer Electronic ID The combination of bytes that identify the device number and manufacturer of a programmable device Enhanced Security Fuse Capability Found on EMICROs the Enhanced Security Fuse Capability allows security fuse data to be stored in a dat
270. ng table lists the conditions that can be specified for device pins When using structured test vectors to check your logic design do NOT use 101 or 010 transitions as tests for clock pins use C K U or D instead Test Conditions Drive input low Drive input high Drive input to supervoltage 2 9 Buried register preload not supported Drive input low high low Drive input low fast slew Float input or output Test output high Drive input high low high Verifies that the specified output pin is low Power pins and outputs not tested Preload registers Drive input high fast slew Output not tested input default level Test input or output for high impedance NRO wo NX Cuzr ATmTmUOOU Note C K U and D are clocking functions that allow for setup time The C K U and D driving signals are presented after the other inputs are stable The L H and Z tests are performed after all inputs have stabilized including C K U and D Test vectors are numbered by following the V character with a number The vectors are applied in numerical order If the same numbered vector is specified more than one time the data in the last vector replaces any data contained in previous vectors with that number The following example uses the V field to specify functional test information for a device V0001 C01010101NHLLLHHLHLN V0002 C01011111NHLLHLLLHLN V0003 C10010111NZZZZZZZZZN V0004 C01010100NFLHHLFFLLN 3980 3900 29
271. ng the Duplicate Disk or Copy File operation Remove the source disk insert the destination disk the disk where you want the data to go then press ENTER Be sure to use a formatted disk if you insert an unformatted disk the programmer stops and displays Sector not found If this occurs perform the Format Disk operation and restart the Duplicate Disk or Copy File operation Insert master device Hit return to continue This message appears during the Quick copy operation Place the master device into the device socket lock it into place and press ENTER The programmer will load RAM with data from the master device Insert source disk Hit return to continue This message appears during the Duplicate Disk operation Remove the destination disk from the disk drive insert the source disk then press ENTER Invalid device ID See page 6 15 Job file playback ended The job file playback ended You may continue with the operation where the job file left off Job file save aborted Keystrokes not recorded You tried to end a job file recording but either the system disk is not in the drive or the programmer cannot read the disk If you press CTRL Z after seeing that message the above message will appear Keystroke recording ended Select job file for saving This message appears after you have pressed Esc CTRL J a second time to end recording keystrokes for a job file Specify a job file number by typing a number between 0 and 9 Then ty
272. not do any data translating If a logic device is selected the fuse data are output by fuse number and the vectors are output by vector number If a memory device is selected the data are output by address in hex format Output Memory Data to Serial Port More Commands Transfer Data Serial Output Output Memory Data When a memory device has been selected the Serial Output command is output as a specified memory block to one of the programmer s serial ports 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 67 Commands 4 68 The parameters for this command are listed below Source R D Specifies the source for the data Press SPACE to toggle between R RAM and D Disk Filename Specifies the disk file to use as the Source This option appears only if you specify Disk as the Source The filename must follow standard DOS conventions An example of a valid filename is 27128a dat Destination R T Specifies the destination for the data Press SPACE to toggle between R Remote port and T Terminal port Number Of Lines Between Form Feeds Specifies the number of printed text lines per page Default is 0 no form feed Memory Begin Address Specifies the first address in hex of the first byte of data to be retrieved and sent out the serial port If the source is RAM it is a beginning RAM address If the source is Disk it is a beginning disk file address The default address is 0 User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes
273. not function properly unless you select NO parity and 8 bit data ASCII Binary Format Codes 01 02 and 03 or 05 06 and 07 In these formats bytes are recorded in ASCII codes with binary digits represented by Ns and Ps Ls and Hs or 1s and Os respectively See Figure 5 1 The ASCII Binary formats do not have addresses Figure 5 1 shows sample data bytes coded in each of the three ASCII Binary formats Incoming bytes are stored sequentially in RAM starting at the first RAM address Bytes are sandwiched between B and F characters and are separated by spaces Figure 5 1 ASCII Binary Format example P A FORMAT 01 OR 05 f BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPFYBPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF BPPPPPPPPF 3 Bopp EM HIM ES BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF BHHHHHHHHF 3
274. nsertthe disk you want the Custom Menu files to be written to then press ENTER If you get the message File ERROR Cannot allocate file space delete some files on your target disk to make more room for the CM files or insert a different disk that has enough space for the files After the programmer copies the files it displays a list of devices if algorithm type K was selected in step 2 or a list of device manufacturers if algorithm type D or E was selected in step 2 Select a device or manufacturer by typing the number next to it then press ENTER If the device or device manufacturer you want is not listed type CTRL N to see the next page of devices or manufacturers 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 35 Commands 4 36 Add 7 10 If you selected a manufacturer in step 6 a list of devices produced by the selected manufacturer is displayed Type the number next to the device you wish to add to your Custom Menu then press ENTER to add the device CTRL N to see the next page of devices If prompted insert the Algorithm System disk that contains the algorithm you wish to add If the correct disk is not inserted the programmer will prompt you for the disk to insert when it is needed If you get the message Cannot access file_name sys the programmer could not find a system file on the disk inserted into the programmer s drive Insert the Algorithm System disk that contains the file For instance if the programme
275. nstrument control code a 1 digit number that signals or controls data transfers can be used to provide peripherals with flow control beyond that provided by software handshaking The instrument control code is sent immediately preceding the 2 digit format code in computer remote control The three instrument control codes and their functions are described below Code Input Function Output Function 0 Send X OFF to stop incoming Data transmission is halted on receipt of an Handshake transmission Send X ON to X OFF character Transmission resumes on Off resume transmission receipt of an X ON character 1 Transmit an X ON character when Transmit a PUNCH ON character prior to data Handshake ready to receive data transmit X transmission Data transmission is halted on On OFF if the receiver buffer is full receipt of an X OFF character and resumes transmit an X ON if the receiver on receipt of an X ON character A PUNCH buffer is empty transmit an X OFF OFF character is sent when the transmission after all the data is received is completed 2 Send X OFF to stop the incoming Transmit data only after receiving an X ON X ON transmission Send X ON to character Data transmission will be halted X OFF resume transmission upon receipt of an X OFF character transmission will resume upon receipt of an X ON character Note X ON character is a CTRL Q or 11 hex X OFF character is a CTRL S or 13 hex PUNCH ON character is a CTRL R or 12
276. ntains the sumcheck for all of User RAM and is generated in the Sumcheck device check screen This calculation is done regardless of whether user data are in RAM or on disk Using Keep Current algorithm in filename KCx This message appears when the replaced Keep Current algorithm is used during a normal device selection operation where filename KCx is the Keep Current algorithm file Vector out of range The vector you tried to select does not exist for the selected device Select a vector that is within the limits of the device or select a different device This message may appear while you are using the vector editor Waiting for self test completion This powerup message shows up only if you are changing the terminal selection before the power up self test has been completed WARNING System disk in drive Hit return to continue Z to abort This message appears during any file operation that displaces disk data Any information currently on the disk will be erased and is not retrievable Press ENTER continue with the operation Press CTRL Z to cancel the operation 6 10 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages Device Insertion Error When Using Elastomeric Pad Probable Cause Solution Device inserted improperly Ensure that the device is properly justified in the socket or properly oriented in the MatchBook WARNING Do not press on the lid of the MatchBook to improve continuity It compresses the pad scratches and dents
277. number of U field cells is otherwise unknown W The number of cells specified in the U field is not included in the QF number of fuses field W The U field cells are not included in the C fuse checksum field W The U field reads left to right to be consistent with the L fuse list and E fields The syntax for the U field is as follows lt User Data Fuse List U binary digit s The character U begins the U field and is followed by one binary digit for each U fuse Each binary digit indicates one of two possible states zero specifying a low resistance link or one specifying a high resistance link for each fuse 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats For example QF24 L0000 101011000000000000000000 E10100111 CO11A U10110110 Electrical Data E field The E field allows special feature fuses that do not affect the logic function of the device to be specified in JEDEC files The following guidelines apply to the E field W The E field cell must be explicitly provided if the E field is present W The F default fuse state field does not affect E fuses W There can only be one E field in a JEDEC file W The E field fuses must be listed in the order they appear in the device W The E field must be listed before the C checksum field If the U field is used the E field must come before the U user data field W The E field is specified using binary numbers since the full number o
278. o duplicate into the disk drive CAUTION Do NOT use the Algorithm System disk or the Boot disk as the destination disk because the original contents of the destination disk will be lost 2 To duplicate the disk move the cursor to the Are You Sure field and press Y The source disk and destination disk parameters are currently fixed at A CAUTION Duplicating a disk erases the contents of the destination disk Also this operation uses RAM as a temporary storage buffer and alters the contents of RAM 3 Move the cursor to the Do you want to verify disk field and enable the disk verification procedure To disable the verification and speed up the process press N To enable the verification press Y Note Although disk duplication takes longer if the verification option is turned on we suggest that you turn verification on while duplicating an important disk such as the Algorithm System disk or the Boot Files disk 4 Finally press ENTER to begin the disk duplication During the duplication you are prompted when to swap disks Note The verification parameter returns to Y and the Are you sure parameter returns to N after each disk duplication operation Format Disk More Commands File Operations Format Disk Use this command to prepare a data disk for use A disk must be formatted before it can be used To format a disk follow these steps 1 Insert the disk to be formatted into the disk drive 2 When you are re
279. ock cleaning 2 30 Special parameter fields 4 7 Specifications environmental 1 6 functional 1 6 physical 1 6 safety 1 7 Starting Vector Number Output Logic Data 4 68 Status indicators 1 3 Status window 3 5 Stop Bits Edit Serial Port Configuraiton 4 26 Sumcheck Display logic device 4 39 memory device 4 39 set of devices 4 40 Sumcheck Entire RAM Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Sumcheck calculating 4 39 Swap Data 4 52 Swap Programmer Memory 4 52 System Disk duplicating 1 4 inserting 2 10 System memory standard 1 6 T TaskLink 1 8 programing a device session 3 2 Terminal connecting to 2 6 Terminal emulation software HiTerm 2 2 2 4 Terminal LED 1 3 Terminal port 1 4 Terminal type 4 31 compatible 2 6 current settings 2 16 default setting 4 4 selecting new 2 16 supported 1 6 To Memory Address Move Data 4 52 Total Set Size Index 8 Illegal Bit Check Memory Device 4 42 Load Memory Device 4 9 Program Memory Device 4 12 Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Verify Memory Device 4 16 Transfer Data 4 61 Translate DIP LCC option default setting 4 3 Translation format selecting 3 19 Transmit Pacing default setting 4 4 4 29 Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Transparent Mode entering 4 70 exiting 4 70 Transparent mode 2 6 entering 3 7 Troubleshooting 2 15 TSOP device 1 8 2 26 U Underblow Overblow 4 43 Underwriters Laboratories 1 7 Updates early updates 1 8
280. ode Powerup User RAM Test Program Security Fuse RAM Device Selection Reject option commercial or single Remote Off Code Remote On Code Remote Serial Port Configuration Security Fuse Data 0 or 1 Serial Set Auto Increment Flag Simple complex Parameter screen Terminal Serial Port Configuration Terminal Type Transmit Pacing User Menu Port User Data Size Upload Wait Upload Destination download Source Upload Record Size Verify Data Format Verify Passes No no default No Yes No No Commercial 0 0 9600 baud 1 stop bit 8 data bits no parity active CTS DTR 0 No Simple 9600 baud 1 stop bit 8 data bits no parity active CTS DTR VT 100 0 T 0 0 seconds Remote 16 Hex 2 This parameter is not restored when the Restore Configuration operation is performed It is however used at powerup if it is saved as a powerup parameter 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Select Device Before you can perform any device related operations with the programmer you must select the device you are using Before You Select a Device Before you select a device select the Algorithm Type that matches the device you want to use See Algorithm Type on page 4 21 for more information 1 3 From the Main Menu select More commands Configure system Edit Programming Press F1 to return to the Main Menu from any submenu Select one of the following algorithm types D D
281. ode and return to the programmer interface You may have to press CTRL R to redraw the screen If the sample data file is in your current directory type the following Download Host Command cat sample dat substitute the appropriate filename if you are using a different file then press ENTER The message bar displays Parameter Entered The Download Host Command is a command that the programmer sends to the host to initiate the download Because you are on a UNIX based host you use the CAT command as the Download Host Command Press ENTER to begin the download The action symbol rotates while the data is being downloaded When the download is finished the message bar displays Data transfer complete Data sum xxxxxxxx Where XXXXXXXX indicates the sumcheck of the data transferred The sumcheck for memory devices is an eight digit hexadecimal summation of the downloaded data If you change one byte of information in the data file the sumcheck will also change The sumcheck is a good method of verifying that the data you downloaded matches the data on your host Later when you program this data into a device the programmer will generate another sumcheck If the two match the data programmed is the same as the data downloaded If the two sumchecks are different the data programmed is not the same as the data downloaded In this Session you learned how to download data to the programmer from a host connected to the Remote port on th
282. of RAM From the Program menu select Select Process An X in the selection box indicates that process will be performed When the appropriate processes are selected click OK From the Program menu select Process Devices In the Pass Limit field enter the number of devices you want to program To program an unlimited number of devices leave this value set to O The optional Session ID tracks who programmed what devices See the Session Data Logging topic in Help for more information You will be prompted when to insert the device to be programmed See page 2 19 During processing the number of successfully programmed devices and total number of attempts is displayed The Last Device box displays Pass on a green background or a message that describes a failure on a red background At the end of the programming session the Session Statistics Display screen is displayed ram rzrxtccwen Me TT an E Gael Lz AT ie aparigh Ses E b ET g r arm ES e E a a a a 7 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 2 Navigating Through the Programmer Menus This Session describes the programmer menus and the online Help Programmer Main Menu Power up the programmer After you select the terminal type the Main Menu is displayed See Figure 3 1 The Main Menu as are most programmer screens is divided into five areas status window message bar command window dialog
283. om a personal computer for streamlined and enhanced programming operations TaskLink features automatic programming file configuration full screen editing error logging a windowed interface extensive online context sensitive Help and full mouse support MatchBooks The MatchBook Device Carriers and their accompanying Bases allow you to program surface mount devices such as PLCCs SOICs and LCCs without the mechanical problems and expense of sockets PPI Base and Adapters The PPI Base and adapters support a wide variety of packages including SOIC TSOP QFP and BGA MSM Upgrade A Mass Storage Module MSM upgrade kit which provides 80 MB of RAM on an internal module is available for existing 3900 programmers The MSM optimizes programmer performance by providing storage for system software and programming algorithms which enables fast boot up and eliminates the need to access files from the 3 2 disk drive Accessory Package The Accessory Package contains an RS 232C cable and a gender changer RAM Upgrade Installing this upgrade kit increases the RAM in your 2900 to 8 MB 1 8 3980 3900 2900 User Manual This chapter describes how to set up the programmer and get it working with your equipment Before you read this chapter read Chapter 1 Introduction Hardware configuration and software installation are described in the following steps 1 Choose Your Configuration and Connect the Equipment Connect to a PC and
284. on 00 00 00 00 F5 38 0002 00000000000000 00 J 00 00 AO0 01 000 2C 00 00 00 00 04 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 joo 33 39 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Section nn 4 100 00 00 00 28 00 20 00 28 00 28 Length of ASBTXT 0 00 00 00 04 28 00 00 00 nan n aN NN AN AN nn 0431 2 The first 75 bytes of the data file module is the data file header The header information is generated and used by the development system and is not used by the programmer although some characters must fill those bytes The rest of the data file module consists of one partition The partition begins with a 20 byte table of contents The table of contents specifies the locations of ABSTXT absolute text DEBTXT debug text the last location of this partition and the location of the next partition The OMF286 format consists of only one partition so this field will be zeros The rest of the partition consists of sections The actual data is located in the sections The first 3 bytes in each section specify the real address of the text The next 2 bytes state the length of the text The remainder of the section is the text or data Following the final section of the final partition is a 1 byte checksum representing the complement of the sum of all the bytes in the file including the header The sum of the checksum byte and the calculated checksum for the file should equal zero The programmer ignores this checksum 5 42 3980
285. one within the device s range Booting non system disk Insert system disk Type ESC and CTRL W to reboot The programmer detected a disk other than the Algorithm System disk installed during powerup Insert the Algorithm System disk Bus err The programmer experienced an error that it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer off and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support Bytes copied nnnnnn The Copy File operation is in progress nnnnnn is the number of bytes copied Cannot access system disk A non system disk is installed Insert the Algorithm System disk Calculating sumcheck The RAM sumcheck is being calculated Computer Remote Control enter Control Z to exit The programmer is in remote control mode and all programmer commands are now read from the remote port To return to terminal mode type CTRL Z Constant over current fault An overcurrent condition exists and the programmer is unable to clear the condition The overcurrent could be caused by a hardware failure in the programmer Reboot the system If the condition persists contact Data I O Customer Support Constructing Job File Directory The job files are now being read in order to put together a job file directory Once the directory is complete you can select one of the files for playback Copying file1 ext to file2 ext Bytes copied xxxx This message appears during a Copy operation if you are using the wildcard designation xxx
286. only a few devices the Program Signature is a user definable field that allows the user to program data into the program signature array For example the Program Signature could contain the revision level or modification date of the data in the remainder of the device Programmable Integrated Circuit One of the four basic categories of ASICs the other three being gate arrays standard cells and full custom devices PICs are ICs that are user configurable PLDs and PGAs are examples of programmable integrated circuits 3980 3900 2900 User Manual D 9 QFP An acronym for Quad Flat Pack a type of device package A square or rectangular device with leads on all four edges leads can be either straight or gull wing BQFP Bumper Quad Flat Pack is a QFP with bumpers on the corners to prevent damage to leads CQFP is a Ceramic QFP or a QFP with carrier Long Lead Carrier QFP is an ACTEL product with long leads attached to a carrier grid for handling ease PQFP Plastic carrier QFP is a QFP with a plastic protective carrier for handling ease QFPCAR is a QFP in a carrier TQFP is a thin QFP QUIP An acronym for Quad Inline Package a type of device package Similar to DIP but with staggered long amp short leads leads on long sides Reboot The process of re initializing the programmer After rebooting the programmer is in the same state as if it had just been turned on Registered Devices Devices that contain registers rather than bein
287. or The Yield Tally screen provides statistics for the following categories B Device Name Manufacturer s name and part number Statistics for the last sixteen device types are kept WB Total Count The number of individual devices of the same type that the programmer attempted The number of devices successfully programmed m Illegal Bit The number of devices that failed because they did not pass non blank test or Illegal Bit Check m Verify Fail The number of devices that failed because they did not verify m Struct Fail The number of logic devices of the same type that failed the logic structured vector test B Device Not Programmable The number of devices that could not be programmed because they contained bits that required more programming pulses than were specified If you stop the non blank test without programming the device the illegal bit count increases by one If you continue the test the illegal bit count stays the same while the yield tally records the result of the programming operation To erase the entire set of statistics press CTRL E To go to the previous menu press F2 To go to the Main Menu press F1 For the total number of errors which is not recorded add the values in the error columns 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 69 Commands Transparent Mode Transparent mode can be entered from all programmer screens except Editor screens Under over blow screen Yield Tally screen Help screens CRC mode
288. or Data Word Width The programmer uses the following equation to calculate the Total Set Size USER DATA SIZE DATA WORD WIDTH DEVICE WIDTH TOTAL SET SIZE DEVICE BLOCK SIZE Next Operation Begins At A read only field that specifies the address where the next sumcheck will start This value is calculated from the Data Word Width Device Block Size Memory Begin Address and device width For Member X of Y X specifies which device in the set is being sumchecked Y which is a read only field indicates how many devices are in the set s Values for X 0 range from 1 to Y Individual Sumcheck A read only field that displays the individual sumcheck for device X Set Sumcheck A read only field that displays the sumcheck for the entire set of Y devices 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Compare Electronic ID More Commands Device Checks Sumcheck Display Compare Electronic ID To help prevent accidental damage to a device this command compares the electronic ID of a device with the electronic ID specified in the selected algorithm To compare the electronic ID of a device with the ID stored in the selected algorithm follow these steps 1 Select and socket a device that supports electronic ID testing Note You cannot use an electronic ID to automatically select the proper algorithm to program a device You also cannot use this feature on devices that do not support electronic ID testing 2 Press ENTER
289. ordering 1 8 Updating Custom Menu algorithms 4 38 Upgrade MSM 1 8 RAM 1 8 Upload Data 4 62 Upload Host command 4 63 Upload Data Size Upload Data 4 63 Upload Destination default setting 4 4 Upload End of file Delimiter Edit Communication Parameters 4 28 4 29 Upload Host Command default setting 4 3 Edit Communication Parameters 4 29 Upload Record Size default setting 4 4 Upload Wait default setting 4 4 Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 User Data Size Compare Data 4 65 3980 3900 2900 User Manual default setting 4 4 Download Data 4 62 Edit Programming Parameters 4 22 Illegal Bit Size Memory Device 4 42 Input from Disk 4 66 Load File 4 54 Load Memory Device 4 9 Output to Disk 4 67 Program Memory Device 4 12 Save File 4 55 Sumcheck Memory Device 4 40 Verify Memory Device 4 16 User Menu Port B 2 AutoBaud 2 15 changing 2 17 default setting 4 4 Edit Communication Parameters 4 28 high speed download 2 17 User RAM test 4 60 Utility disk 1 5 V Vector Edit 4 46 Verify Data Format 3980 3900 2900 User Manual default setting 4 4 Edit Programming Parameters 4 21 Verify Device 4 15 against serial port data 4 64 logic device 4 15 memory device 4 15 4 16 Verify Passes default setting 4 4 Edit Programming Parameters 4 21 Program Logic Device 4 11 Program Memory Device 4 14 Verify Logic Device 4 15 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Verifying a device session 3 29 View directory
290. orithm At this point you should be looking at the Keep Current Part List which is shown in Figure 3 8 Selecting a Keep Current algorithm is similar to selecting a standard device algorithm you must find the item in the menu and enter the number that corresponds to the item In this case you are looking for a Keep Current algorithm you downloaded from the Keep Current BBS The Keep Current Part List screen lists both the device manufacturer and the device part number The devices are listed in the order they are found on the disk If you do not see the algorithm you are looking for make sure the disk with the Keep Current algorithm is inserted into the programmer If you have more than 10 algorithms on one disk the algorithm you are looking for could be on the next screen of algorithms Press CTRL N to display the next page of algorithms Page through the screens until you find the algorithm you are looking for If you page too far press CTRL P to return to the first page of Keep Current algorithms After you find the algorithm type the number next to it shown in parentheses then press ENTER The programmer loads the algorithm for the selected device The action symbol rotates while the programmer is loading the algorithm 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started After the algorithm is loaded the Main Menu is displayed and the status window shows the selected device Keep Current Algorithms and Software Updates Each K
291. orithm for the Cruft 1263 With Keep Current algorithms you get immediate device support rather than having to wait for the next release of system software 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 13 Getting Started Session 5 Loading Data from a Device Session 5 describes how to load device data from a previously programmed device a master device The device used for this session is an AMD 27256 DIP EPROM You can use a different memory device by substituting your device manufacturer and part number If you do not have a master device and you still want to follow the steps in the Session you can use a blank device Although the data loaded into the programmer will be blank you can follow the procedures Before you begin this Session do the following 1 Complete Sessions 2 and 3 to learn to use the programmer s interface and select a device 2 Install the DIP Base in the programmer see page 2 11 Find an AMD 27256 device or another memory device that has been programmed with data If you do not have a master device we suggest you go to the next Session which shows you how to load data from the programmer s disk drive When you have completed this Session skip the next three Sessions and continue with Session 9 Select the Device Choose Select Device from the Main Menu then select AMD from the Manufacturer list and 27256 from the list of part numbers If you are not using the AMD 27256 select the appropriate settings
292. orm a blank check on the device to determine whether the device OTP device contains contains data If so your OTP device had previously been programmed data and most likely cannot be over programmed with different data or fuse pattern Program another device Faulty device s Program at least one more device labeled with the same date code If it programs successfully your original device was probably faulty If other devices with the same date code also fail attempt to program devices labeled with different date codes If these devices program successfully the devices from the original date code are probably faulty Note You may wish to contact the device manufacturer and report your findings Improper algorithm If this error occurs only on devices with recent date codes the devices applied by programmer may require a modified programming algorithm due to recent change in manufacturer specifications Note You may wish to contact the device manufacturer to determine whether the programming specifications for the device have changed Improper algorithm This error if it occurs on devices with old to recent date codes may applied by programmer indicate an algorithm related problem in your programmer software due to possible bug in programmer software 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 17 Messages Probable Cause Solution Workaround On your programmer s Device List find the earliest version of programmer softwa
293. ou can enter it from this screen If you do not know the format number go to the Format Select screen find the format you want and enter the number from that screen Entering the format number from the Format Select screen changes the Translation Format parameter on this screen I O Addr Offset Enter the beginning address of the upload file This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected This value is added to the address of the data in memory relative to the Memory Begin Address of 0 and output as the I O address A value of FFFFFFFF sets the I O Offset to 0 Memory Begin Address Specifies the first address in hex from where the first byte of data is retrieved This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected If the source is RAM it is a beginning RAM address If the source is Disk it is a beginning disk file address The default address is 0 User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block to be uploaded This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected Enter the value of the number of bytes to upload Entering O directs the programmer to upload the entire contents of the programmer s RAM Or if Disk is specified as the Source entering O directs the programmer to upload the entire disk file Upload Host Command Enter the appropriate host command line up to 58 characters to direct the host to accept the uploaded data The programmer generates a r
294. ou see either the Non default screen or the All Parameters screen Press F4 to toggle between the two Set the parameters then press ENTER to begin the Load operation When the programmer is finished loading the data from the device it displays the sumcheck 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Getting Started Session 6 Loading Data from a Disk This Session describes how to load binary device data into the programmer from the programmer s floppy disk drive You can use the sample data file sample bin included on the Boot files System files disk for this Session Before starting this Session complete Session 2 and be familiar with the programmer s user interface Use the Load File command when the data file to be loaded contains a binary image of the data you want to program into a device The Save File command creates a binary image file by copying the data in the programmer s RAM directly to a disk file The Load File command loads the binary data file directly into memory Note The Transfer Data command transfers formatted data files between either the programmer and another machine like a PC or programmer RAM and the programmer disk drive Note Do not use the Load File and Save File commands with formatted data files Use the Input from Disk and Output to Disk commands to load and save formatted data files 1 Select File Operations from the More Commands menu The File menu is displayed see Figure 3 12 Figure 3 12 File
295. out if they have changed the ID on the device If they have please notify Data I O Customer Support Faulty device s If disabling the Compare elec ID parameter causes an operation such as load program or verify to fail try the operation on other devices with the same date code If the operation is successful on these devices the original device may be defective Note If a high percentage of parts fails the operation you may wish to contact the device manufacturer and report your findings Possible bug in programmer software If disabling the Compare elec ID parameter causes the operation to fail on a high percentage of parts across several date codes there may be a software bug in the programming algorithm associated with the part Workaround On the programmer s Device List find the earliest version of programmer software that supports the device boot your programmer with this version and repeat the operation If the operation is successful you ve found a temporary workaround Note Contact Data I O Customer Support and report your findings Additional Information Most memory devices are uniquely identified by their silicon signatures electronic IDs At times device manufacturers change the electronic IDs of devices that have undergone changes in the manufacturing process Typically the electronic ID is altered to promote automatic device selection and usually does not reflect a change in the device programmin
296. ow the steps below 1 2 Locate the programmer so that the fan on the bottom is not obstructed Put on the wrist strap and plug it into the ground connector on the programmer s back panel WARNING To help prevent electric shock the antistatic wrist strap must contain a 1MQ minimum to 10MQ maximum isolating resistor Connect one end of the ac line cord to the ac receptacle on the programmer s back panel and the other end to a properly grounded ac outlet WARNING To ensure proper grounding and to avoid the hazard of electrical shock connect the programmer ONLY to a properly grounded ac outlet The programmer contains a switching power supply that configures itself to operate on the proper voltage The power supply accepts voltages ranging from 90 to 264 Vac and frequencies ranging from 48 to 63 Hz Make sure that a Base is installed in the programmer and the device socket is empty CAUTION Leaving a device in the socket during powerup will cause powerup self test failures and could damage the device Turn on the PC workstation or terminal If you will be controlling the programmer from a PC or workstation make sure that the terminal emulation software such as TaskLink or HiTerm is running If you will be controlling the programmer from a terminal make sure it is in the proper emulation mode such as VT 100 3980 Make sure the programmer disk drive is empty then turn on the power switch on the rear panel 2
297. p Current Option The device selection process is a two step process first the programmer displays a list of the available Keep Current algorithms then you select the algorithm From the Main Menu press F1 to return to the Main Menu choose the Select Device command Either press S or move the cursor to the Select Device menu item and press ENTER The Manufacturer List screen is displayed Figure 3 7 Device Manufacturer Selection Screen FILENAME RAM AVAIL 128 OF 128KB REU X XX YYY Z Z MANUFACTURER PART H5 I 0 FORMAT o ORLLLL LULLLLLLLLLDLLALLLLLLL LLLL LLLLALAL ALLE AELIAN MANUFACTURER LIST Page 1 of Z 1 KEEP CURRENT 14 Catalyst 27 IDT 40 Mitsubishi 2 AMD C15 Custom C28 ISSI 41 Motorola 32 AMD Archive 16 Cypress C29 Intel 42 NEC 4 AMD XPGM 17 Cupress XPGM 30 Intel XPGM 43 National 5 AMI 18 Dallas 31 Lattice 44 Natnl XPGM 6 AT amp T 19 Exel 32 Lattice XPGM 45 Neu Media 7 Actel ZB Fairchild 339 MMI LOGIC 46 Oki 8 Alliance Z1 Fujitsu 34 MMI PROM C47 Omni Wave 9 Altera Z2 Goldstar 35 Macronix 48 PLUS Logic 10 Altera XPGM 23 Harris 36 Microchip 49 PLX 11 Asahi Kasei 24 Hitachi 37 Micron Tech 50 Panasonic 1z Atmel Z5 Hyundai 385 Mikroelek 515 Philips 13 Rtmel XPGM Z6 ICT 39 Mit Plastics 52 Quick Logic Manufacturer Kl Device Type iy Mode NEME N Next page P Preu page PF1 Main menu PFZ Preu menu PF3 or Help
298. pe in a job file description Keystroke recording for job file has begun After you press ESC CTRL J once this message will appear You are now in the job file record mode every keystroke that you make will be recorded Type Esc CTRL J a second time to end the session Loading data from file Data are being loaded into User RAM from a disk s data file Loading device algorithm When you restore a set of system parameters that include a specific device this message is displayed while the programming algorithm is being loaded 6 6 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages Loading device menu data The programmer is loading the device and manufacturer selection files Loading from disk The programmer is reading system information or routines from the disk Loading programming parameters When you restore a set of system parameters from the Configuration file directory this message will appear while the programming parameters are being loaded Loop count nnnn Hit CTRL Z to abort this test A self test is running in the continuous mode The loop count nnnn is the number of times the selected test has been repeated Memory parity error at hhhhhh The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the problem persists record the location at which the error occurs represented by hhhhhh and contact Data I O Customer Support No disk in drive There is no disk in the disk
299. ped into packets Each packet contains a tag identifying what sort of data the package contains plus the data itself This system of packeting information allows for future definitions as required The POF is composed of a header and a list of packets The packets have variable lengths and structures but the first six bytes of every packet always adhere to the following structure struct PACKET_HEAD short tag tag number type of packet long length number of bytes in rest of packet A POF is read by the program examining each packet and if the tag value is recognized then the packet is used If a tag value is not recognized the packet is ignored Any packet except the terminator packet may appear multiple times within a POF Packets do not need to occur in numerical tag sequence The POF reader software is responsible for the interpretation and action taken as a result of any redundant data in the file including the detection of error conditions The POF format currently uses the following packet types Note In the following packet type descriptions one of the terms Used Skipped or Read will appear after the tag and name Used The information in this packet is used by the programmer Skipped This information is not used by the programmer Read This information is read by the programmer but has no direct application Creator ID tag 1 Used This packet contains a version ID string from the pro
300. plement To complement data stored in memory follow these steps 1 Specify the parameters described below 2 Press ENTER to begin the complement function 3 The programmer displays Done when the operation is completed The parameters are described below m Memory Address The memory address at which the complement operation begins The value entered may be any 1 to 6 digit hex address The address cannot be greater than the User RAM size Block Size The number of bytes in hex that is complemented Move the cursor to the block size window and enter the block size 1 to 6 hex digits The block size added to the memory address cannot exceed the user memory size 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 51 Commands 4 52 Data Copy More Commands Edit Data Data Copy The Data Copy command copies a block of data from one location to another To copy data stored in memory follow these steps 1 Specify the parameters described below 2 Press ENTER to begin the Data Copy function The programmer displays Done when the operation is completed The parameters are described below From Memory Address The first memory address of the data block you want to move data from Enter a 1 to 6 digit hex address that does not exceed user RAM size To Memory Address The first address of the data block you want to move data to Enter a 1 to 6 digit hex address that does not exceed the user RAM size W Block Size The size
301. pload operations Note You do not need to send any information in this field if you do not wish to a blank field consisting of the terminating asterisk is a valid design specification field The Transmission Checksum Field lt xmit checksum gt hex digit 4 The transmission checksum is the last value sent in a JEDEC transmission The full JEDEC format requires the transmission checksum The checksum is a 16 bit value sent as a 4 digit hex number and is the sum of all the ASCII characters transmitted between and including the STX and ETX The parity bit is excluded in the calculation of the transmission checksum Some computer systems do not allow you to control what characters are sent especially at the end of a line You should set up the equipment so that it will accept a dummy value of 0000 as a valid checksum This zero checksum is a way of disabling the transmission checksum while still keeping within the JEDEC format rules 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 29 Translation Formats JEDEC Full Format Code 91 Vector Number 5 30 The full JEDEC format consists of a start of text character STX various fields an end of text character ETX and a transmission checksum A sample JEDEC transmission sent in the full format is shown in Figure 5 18 Each of the fields is described on the following pages Figure 5 18 JEDEC Full Format example
302. port If the data location is RAM it is a beginning RAM address If the data location is Disk it is a beginning disk file address This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected The default address is 0 WB User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block to be downloaded and compared from the Source to the data location This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected Normally you should enter a zero here so all the data is compared After the compare operation is complete a value equal to the number of bytes compared is set here If a value less than the size of the data received is entered only the number of bytes equal to that value are actually compared m Download Host Command Enter the appropriate host command line here to download the data This line may be up to 58 characters long The programmer generates a return character to terminate the line when transmitted to the host To clear a previously entered command press SPACE then ENTER Format Select More Commands Transfer Data Format Select The Format Select command selects the translation format to use Translation formats a form of transmission protocol are used when data is uploaded or downloaded between the programmer and a host computer Chapter 5 lists and describes the formats supported by the programmer If your host computer does not generate code into one of the listed formats edit it to match one o
303. protocols between the programmer and the RS 232 serial equipment connected to the programmer such as a terminal or host computer WB Configure the Remote and Terminal ports to be compatible with your terminal or host computer W Edit save or restore a set of programming features for the device type you want to program WB Access Keep Current algorithm files WB Access Custom Menu algorithm files m Change Mass Storage Module settings These commands are described on the following pages Carrying a Configuration File Forward When you update to a new version of system software you can choose to carry forward the current system configurations including powerup defaults and other user defined system parameter settings stored in the sysparm sys file The User Notes accompanying the software update describe how to carry the configuration files forward for your particular setup Restore System Parameters More Commands Configure System Restore Restore System Parameters System Parameters are all the parameters on the Programming Serial I O Communication and Interface screens With the Restore command you can restore a system configuration a set of previously saved system parameters To restore a system configuration follow these steps 1 Select Restore from the Configure System Parameters menu 2 The programmer displays a list of the configuration files that were saved on the Algorithm System disk Look at this list of files a
304. r Panel Screws BACK PANEL SCREWS j POWER E i 3e Rc L SWITCH 2 PT ae lo 9 AC RECEPTACLE ECNNEESOR REMOTE PORT TERMINAL PORT 0532 3 Note Some early 2900s may have a third screw represented by the dotted circle in Figure A 1 that must be removed Position the programmer so the front round half is facing you 6 Remove the three screws shown in Figure A 2 and set them aside Note On some early 2900s you must carefully fold back the black foam to access the three screws Remove the top cover by lifting it straight up Set the top cover aside Locate the waveform board inside the programmer The rectangular waveform board is located in the back half of the programmer and is shown in Figure A 3 A 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Performance Verification Figure A 2 Removing the Top Cover Screws SCREWS 0727 3 WAVEFORM BOARD 78 PIN CONNECTOR BLOCK Oooooosoooooo0o00
305. r could not access the file mem_alg sys which contains memory device algorithms insert the Memory algorithms disk Select additional devices from the current screen or press F2 to return to the manufacturer list if you were using that list Repeat steps 6 through 8 as necessary When you are done press F2 once or twice until you are prompted to insert the Custom Menu disk Insert the Custom Menu disk then press ENTER to save your changes to disk To add additional devices to your Custom Menu use the Add command described below More Commands Configure System Customer Menu Algorithms Add This command allows you to add devices to a Custom Menu To add devices to a Custom Menu follow these steps 1 Select Add The programmer prompts with Source Disk Algorithm Type D E K Algorithm Media F M only on 3980 Destination Disk Custom Menu Algorithm Disk where D is default algorithms E is extended algorithms K is Keep Current algorithms F is floppy disk and M is Mass Storage Module 3980 only Select the algorithm media and algorithm source of the device you want to add to your Custom Device List In the Custom Menu algorithm disk field select the disk drive where the Custom Menu is located If prompted insert the Algorithm System disk that contains the algorithms from which you want to choose then press ENTER to continue Follow the directions on the screen inserting disks if prompted CAUTION This operat
306. r definable fields that determine what the programmer does Parameters either qualify or quantify the programmer s actions Qualifying parameters such as Source and Destination control the type of operation to perform Quantifying parameters such as Block Size or I O Translation Format give the programmer a range or variable to use in an operation Seven parameters are shown in Figure 3 16 including Source Memory Begin Address and Download Host Command Follow the steps below if you need to change a parameter 1 Move the cursor to the field you need to change 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 23 Getting Started Type the new value and move the cursor to another field If the parameter is acceptable the programmer displays Parameter Entered in the message bar which is located below the status window If you enter an incorrect parameter the programmer beeps and displays an error message Continue until the displayed parameters match your configuration Download the File Review 3 24 Press Esc CTRL T to enter Transparent mode Change to the directory containing the file you will download for a UNIX based host use the CD command Note The commands in this Session are for UNIX based hosts Substitute the appropriate commands if you are using a different host such as a VMS based machine If you need more information consult the system s documentation or your system administrator Press Esc CTRL T to leave Transparent m
307. racter Address Field data address and byte count FI f l D Cod um 100000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1000 100010FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1010 100020FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1020 Data Records 100030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1030 100040FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF1040 0000050005 M End of File Record ll Record Count Sumcheck LEGEND O Nonprinting Carriage Return line feed and nulls determined by null count 0081 2 The checksum which follows each data record is a 2 byte binary summation of the preceding bytes in the record including the address and byte count in hexadecimal notation 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Motorola EXORciser Format Code 82 Motorola EXORciser data files may begin with an optional sign on record which is initiated by the start characters SO Valid data records start with an 8 character prefix and end with a 2 character suffix Figure 5 10 shows a series of valid Motorola data records Figure 5 10 Motorola EXORciser Format example Optional Sign On Record SO Sign On Characters I Byte Count 3 S00B00004441544120492F4FF3 og r Sumcheck of record gt d Start Character S1130000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEFFFC O S1130010FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEC S1130020FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDC S1130030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFCC S1130040FFFFFFFFF
308. ram operation but additional verify operations can provide useful information about any errors Verify Pass A verify pass is a trip through a device at a specified Vcc to see if the device programmed properly The pass is usually done once at 5V The pass can also be done twice with the first pass at 5 5V and the second pass at 4 5V Waveforms Images of the programming pulses that program a device Waveforms are usually created by programmer manufacturers and submitted to device manufacturers as part of the approval process and to record the correct programming spec for a specific device Wildcard Used when entering filenames a wild card represents one or more characters in a filename For example 27 dat represents both 27512 dat and 27128 dat D 14 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Workstation A PC or other micro computer used for local control of the programmer You must use terminal emulation software such as Data I O s HiTerm to allow the programmer and the PC or other micro to communicate The programmer is designed to be compatible with all popular design workstations including both DOS and UNIX based workstations Yield The percentage of successfully programmed devices Yield Tally The yield tally function keeps track of the programming statistics for the last 16 types of devices programmed The following statistics are kept for each device type the manufacturer name and part number the family pinout code the nu
309. rase a device that cannot be electronically erased Electronic bulk erase not supported by device is displayed Note You cannot access this screen if you have selected a device that cannot be electronically erased a bipolar PROM for example A blank check is run after a bulk erase operation if the blank check switch is enabled and if the selected device supports blank check Under Over Blow Logic Devices Only More Commands Device Check Under amp Overblow The under over blow feature compares the fuse map of a logic device with the fuse map in RAM or in a disk file An underblow condition means that the device fuse is intact but the data in memory indicates that it should have been blown An overblow means that the device fuse is blown but should have remained intact The under overblow feature is not supported for POF devices To use the under overblow feature follow these steps 1 2 3 Select and socket a logic device Enter the parameters described below Press ENTER to begin the test The under over blow screen is displayed If the data source does not have proper fuse data for the specified device type a message indicates that the file is not initialized Type C to initialize the file The data is displayed on the screen in a format similar to that of the fuse editor except for the following exceptions e Additional character symbols are used to display overblown B and underblown U data e Unlike the fu
310. re that supports the device boot your programmer with this version and attempt the operation again If the operation is successful you ve found a temporary workaround Note Contact Data I O and report your findings Additional Information An illegal bit error indicates that at least one location in the device contains data programmed state while its corresponding location in RAM has no data unprogrammed state For example the unprogrammed state of a PROM is 0 while its programmed state is 1 If a particular 8 bit PROM s memory location contains 09 hex 00001001 binary and the corresponding memory location in RAM contains FO hex 11110000 binary then an illegal bit error occurs because the programmer is not able to unprogram the first and fourth least significant bits VO Timeout Error Probable Cause Solution Wrong download Your host machine PC DOS Sun VAX etc will transfer a file upon command sent to host receipt of the proper command Under HiTerm for example the Download Host Command must begin with tr or transfer followed by the appropriate drive letter path and filename Refer to your programmer s User Manual the HiTerm User Manual or your host machine s documentation for more information Wrong I O translation The format of the file being transferred must match the description in format code selected the programmer s User Manual If it doesn t enter the proper I O translation format number and tr
311. ress Device Begin Address Device Block Size Illegal Bit Check High Speed Logic Drivers Blank Check Compare Elec ID Enable Yield Tally Erase EE Device Odd Even Byte Swap Continuity Check Serial Vector Test Compensated Vector Test Display Device Footnote Abort on Empty Socket RAM Device Selection Interface Parameters Power On CRC Mode Enable Terminal Beeps Remote On Code Remote Off Code Main Menu Job Files Power Up User RAM Test Communication Parameters Source destination I O Translation Format I O Addr Offset I O Timeout Upload Wait Transmit Pacing Download Echoing Output Record Size Number Of Nulls Instrument Control Code Fill Memory Option Fill Data High Speed Download User Menu Port JEDEC I O Translate DIP LCC Vectors Upload Use End of file Delimiter Upload End of file Delimiter Download Use End of file Delimiter Download End of file Delimiter Upload Host Command Download Host Command 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Programming Parameters More Commands Configure System Edit Programming Parameters Use the Edit Programming Parameters screen to specify programming options to enter memory block parameters and to enable disable different tests If you want to use the settings in a future programming session save them in a configuration file Use the Save command part of the Configure System menu to save the settings for later use The programming parameters and settings are des
312. roduct serial number if available W Detailed description of the problem you are experiencing m Error messages if any W Device manufacturer and part number if device related Telephone Call the appropriate Data I O Customer Support number listed above When you call please be at your programmer or computer have the product manual nearby and be ready to provide the information listed above Fax Fax the information listed above with your name telephone number and address to the appropriate Data I O Customer Support fax number listed at the front of the Preface E mail To reach Data I O through e mail send a message including your name telephone number e mail address and the information listed above to techhelp data io com Bulletin Board Service The Data I O Bulletin Board System BBS enables you to W Obtain a wide range of information on Data I O products including current product descriptions new revision information technical support information application notes and other miscellaneous information W Access device support information Request support for a particular device m Leave messages for the BBS system operator Customer Support personnel or other customers m Download many DOS and Windows utilities Multiple lines are available all supporting US Robotics V 34 modems Online Help files provide more information about the BBS and its capabilities BBS numbers are as follows Japan 81 3 3779 22
313. rom a PC Using Hiferm 3 20 Prepare the Programmer llle 3 20 Download the File leer nn 3 21 REVIEW s ea bs 40 Rew eco Reg mox Rok E Reb Eo Moe m R Eom vom eee ed 3 21 Session 9 Loading Data from a Host llle 3 22 Prepare the Programmer llle 3 23 Download the File eee rns 3 24 ReVI W 4 a each dawn hae UE A Rcx NR Da ex EUR SS RUE xe ECKE Rod n 3 24 Session 10 Editing Data 0 a ee 3 25 REVIEW o cinaran ee Nea EMER A RES we Ree we ee de n da A 3 26 Session 11 Programming a Memory Device 00 02s e eae 3 27 Load the Data File leer rn 3 27 Set the Parameters leen 3 27 Program the Device saua saaa 3 28 iv 3980 3900 2900 User Manual REVIEW x xcUx ua ORG GE ERE ba See bas ES d a 4 3 28 Session 12 Verifying a Device llle 3 29 Set the Parameters clle es 3 29 Verify the Device csse es 3 30 REVIEW s Xx ex oie Sawada uxo baw FEE E GE d wee mex ee s 3 30 4 Commands Overwriting User RAM 1 llenan 4 1 Factory Default Settings aaa elles 4 3 Select Device sse eoe osx Sw XO E RO 3 MUR See ww a n 4 5 Before You Select a Device lee 4 5 Selecta Device es 4 5 After You Select a Device saasaa aaa 4 7 QUICK CODY dL Gals soe a ee Ole woe ek ee ee ee ke ed 4 7 Load D Vice uox ee ea ba we ee ee ea ee Xx ms 4 8 Load LogiG DEVICE ci ike cae eee hee wae ee e
314. ror if data in RAM indicates that a specific bit should be in an unprogrammed state but the corresponding bit in the device is in a programmed state The device cannot be programmed if the programmer detects an illegal bit Blank Check Y N Enables default or disables the Blank Check test which checks a device for programmed bits Enable Yield Tally Y N When enabled directs the programmer to keep a running tally of the programming yields for the last sixteen types of devices programmed These totals show how many devices passed and failed and what specific errors if any have occurred The defaults is N See Yield Tally on page 4 69 for more information Logic Verification A F V Specifies the type of logic verification to be performed after programming Press SPACE to step through the following three choices All A Performs both fuse and vector verification This is the default Fuse Verification F Checks the fuse pattern programmed into the device with the pattern in the programmer s memory Vector Verification V Tests the device using structured test vectors stored in memory The programmer does not support vector testing for logic devices with more than 44 pins 2900 or 84 pins 3900 Verify Passes 0 1 2 Selects the number of times to test the device O Do not to test the device 1 Test the device once at the device manufacturer s nominal Vcc 2 Verify the device at the device manufactur
315. rted Session 7 Selecting a Translation Format This Session introduces you to translation formats and shows you how to select a translation format The next Session shows you how to load a data file through the programmer s Terminal port Translation formats represent different methods of encoding device data in a data file which could contain the fuse pattern and test vectors for a logic device or the data for a memory device Translation Formats are also described in Chapter 5 Starting at the Main Menu press MTF to get to the Translation Format screen shown in Figure 3 14 If you get lost return to the Main Menu and start over Press F1 to get to the Main Menu Figure 3 14 Translation Format Selection Screen Review N I 0 TRANSLATION FORMAT 909 5 Level BNPF W O STX 36 ASCII Oct Z7 With SOH 91 JEDEC full 88 5 Level BNPF With STX 31 ASCII Oct Z With STX 92 JEDEC kernel 14 Altera POF 32 ASCII Oct Apostrophe 81 MOS Technology Uf ASCII B1 F W O STX 37 ASCII Oct SMS 8Z Motorola Exorcise 3 ASCII B1 F With STX 35 ASCII Oct SP With SOH 87 Motorola Exormax 6 ASCII BHLF W O STX 38 ASCII Oct SP With STX 95 Motorola S3 902 ASCII BHLF With STX 18 Binary 70 RCA Cosmac 95 ASCII BNPF W O STX 11 DEC Binary 85 Sig Absolute Obj 1 ASCII BNPF With STX 16 Absolute Binary 13 Spectrum W O STX 56 ASCII Hex Z With SOH 88 Fairchild Fairbug 12 Spectrum With STX 51 ASCII Hex Z With STX 89 HP 64000 Absolute 94 Tek Hex Extend
316. s the available commands no online Help is available for this screen the right side of the screen displays the ASCII translation of the hexadecimal bytes on the left portion of the screen and the top line of the screen displays the address location of the cursor in hexadecimal and the addressing mode 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 25 Getting Started Review 3 26 10 11 Read the message in the sample data file As you can see there are some errors that need correcting The cursor starts in the upper left corner of the hex display Move the cursor around and watch the counter change to reflect your current location Press TAB to move the cursor to the ASCII side of the screen To edit hex data you would move to the hex column With the cursor in the ASCII field move the cursor to the second r in prrgramming Type o to correct the spelling Move the cursor to date and change it to read data The previous two corrections were done in overtype mode the typed characters replaced the previous characters The next correction will be done in insert mode Turn on insert mode by pressing CTRL T The insert indicator is displayed on the bottom of the screen indicating that every character you type will be inserted at the cursor and will push all following characters to the right Move the cursor on top of the period below the word loaded and type the 3900 If you are satisfied with your edits press F2 to save them
317. sage 6 13 Device programming error error message 6 14 Device support 1 1 1 5 Devices configuring 4 44 inserting DIP 2 19 inserting PLCC or LCC into a MatchBook 2 21 inserting QFP 2 27 inserting SDIP 2 28 inserting SOIC 2 27 inserting TSOP 2 26 programming 3 27 selecting 4 5 verifying 3 29 Dialog window 3 5 Disk drive location 1 3 Disks PC 1 5 programmer 1 4 write protection 2 10 Display Device Footnote 3980 3900 2900 User Manual default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 25 DOS Duplicate Disk command 4 56 Download Keep Current algorithm C 4 Download Data 4 61 Download Echoing Edit Communication Parameters 4 27 Download End of file Delimiter Edit Communication Parameters 4 29 Download Host Command Compare Data 4 65 default setting 4 3 4 62 Download Data 4 62 Edit Communication Parameters 4 29 Downloading data from a host session 3 22 Downloading data from a PC session 3 20 Duplicate Disk 4 56 after first use 1 4 E Edit Address Offset Edit Memory 4 49 Edit Begin Address Edit Memory 4 49 Edit Begin Vector Edit Test Vectors 4 46 Edit Communication Parameters 4 29 Edit Data 4 45 logic device 4 45 memory devices 4 49 Edit Data Word Width Edit Memory Data 4 49 Edit Fuse Map 4 45 restoring data 4 46 Edit Memory Data Editor Commands 4 50 Edit Programmer Memory 4 49 Edit Vector commands 4 47 overview 4 46 restoring edits 4 48
318. se editor no data can be edited The fuse number corresponding to the cursor s location appears at the top of the screen To move the cursor use the arrow keys The editor commands are described later in this chapter Under Overblow Commands Command Keystrokes Description Next Block CTRL N Displays next page of under overblow data Prev Block CTRL P Displays previous page of under overblow data Jump to CTRL B Moves cursor to a specific fuse A highlighted area Fuse appears just after the B Jump to Fuse prompt at the bottom of the screen Type the fuse number to jump to and press ENTER 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 43 Commands Command Keystrokes Description Search Pattern Exit CTRL F Searches for one of four character symbols in the under overblow data You can search for X intact fuse blown fuse B overblown fuse U underblown fuse After you select the search character the search begins at the cursor s location continuing until it finds a match or reaches the end of the fuse map F2 Exits the Under Overblow screen and returns the programmer to the Device Checks menu Device Configure 4 44 More Commands Device Checks Device Configure The Device Configure command only for devices supporting sector configuration displays the Sector Configuration screen where you can set switches for erasing programming and protecting sectors on devices These settings are used during Program
319. see the hardware information for that device including the base adapter and minimum algorithm version needed to correctly program the device For more information view the readme txt file on the Device List Disk using any standard text editor 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 1 5 Introduction Specifications Note Unless otherwise noted the specifications apply to all three programmers Power Requirements Operating Voltages Frequency Range Power Consumption Input Current 90V ac to 264V ac 50 to 60 Hz 150 VA maximum 1 5A maximum Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 801 2 8 kV Functional RAM Floppy Disk Format Controller Terminal Support Communication Standard SmartPort Data Transfer Rate Physical and Environmental 9 53h x 28 58w x 41 28d cm Dimensions 2900 4 MB standard after 8 97 8 MB optional 3900 amp 3980 8 MB standard Quad density dual sided 3 5 inch disk with 135 tracks per inch 1 44 MB formatted Motorola 68000 16 bit microprocessor Interfaces with ANSI 3 64 compatible terminals IBM PCs and compatibles using a terminal emulator and many popular ASCII terminals see list on page 2 6 RS 232C Automatic DTE DCE port configuration 110 to 19 2 K baud up to 115 2 K baud using HiTerm or TaskLink 3 75h x 11 25w x 16 25d inches Weight 2900 Operating 3 86 kg 8 5 Ib Shipping 6 14 kg 13 5 Ib 3900 Operating 5 00 kg 11 0 Ib Shipping 7 26 kg 16 0 Ib 3980 Op
320. set to 8 The Transfer Address is not used by the 2900 3900 Data records follow the Start of file record Each begins with 2 byte counts the first expresses the number of 16 bit bytes in the record not including the checksum and itself the second expresses the number of 8 bit data bytes in the record Next comes a 32 bit address which specifies the storage location of the following data byte Data bytes follow after the last data byte is a checksum of every byte in the record except the first byte which is the word count The End of file record consists of a one byte word count which is always zero Leader and trailer nulls normally 50 each are suppressed in this translation format Format 89 does not function properly unless you select NO parity and 8 bit data Texas Instruments SDSMAC Format Code 90 Data files in the SDSMAC format consist of a start of file record data records and an end of file record See Figure 5 17 Figure 5 17 TI SDSMAC Format example Filename Byte Count r Tag Character Tag Character r Checksum Tag Character ri Ir WR Tag Characters 00050 7FDDAF F1 F1 90000BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7FA400F Q 90010BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3FFF 90020BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3FEF Data 90030BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3FDE Records 90040BFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFFBFFFF7F3FCFE Jl Lo
321. slation formats are described in this chapter Format Code Page ASCII BNPF 01 05 5 3 ASCII BHLF 02 06 5 3 ASCII B10F 03 07 5 3 Texas Instruments SDSMAC 320 04 5 4 5 level BNPF 08 09 5 5 Formatted Binary 10 5 6 DEC Binary 11 5 7 Spectrum 12 13 5 8 POF 14 5 9 Absolute Binary 16 5 11 LOF 17 5 12 ASCII Octal Space 30 35 5 14 ASCII Octal Percent 31 36 5 14 ASCII Octal 5 14 Apostrophe 32 5 14 ASCII Octal SMS 37 5 14 ASCII Hex Space 50 55 5 14 ASCII Hex Percent 51 56 5 14 ASCII Hex Apostrophe 52 5 14 ASCII Hex SMS 57 5 14 ASCII Hex Comma 53 58 5 14 RCA Cosmac 70 5 16 Fairchild Fairbug 80 5 17 MOS Technology 81 5 18 Motorola EXORcisor 82 5 19 Intel Intellec 8 MDS 83 5 20 Signetics Absolut Object 85 5 20 Tektronix Hexadecimal 86 5 21 Motorola EXORmax 87 5 22 Intel MCS 86 Hex Object 88 5 23 Hewlett Packard 64000 Absolute 89 5 25 Texas Instruments SDSMAC 90 5 26 JEDEC Format Full 91 5 27 and 5 30 JEDEC Format Kernel 92 5 27 and 5 37 Tektronix Hexadecimal Extended 94 5 37 Motorola 32 bit S3 Record 95 5 39 Hewlett Packard UNIX Format 96 5 40 Intel OMF 386 97 5 41 Intel OMF 286 98 5 42 Intel Hex 32 99 5 44 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 1 Translation Formats This alternate code is used to transfer data without the STX start code and the ETX end code This alternate code is used to transfer data using the SOH start code instead of the usual STX Instrument Control Codes The i
322. smission is begun with the start code a nonprintable STX character or optionally SOH Data blocks follow each one prefaced by an address for the first data byte in the block The end of transmission is signaled by the end code a nonprintable ETX character Directly following the end code is a sumcheck of the transferred data ASCII Octal SMS and ASCII Hex SMS use SOM CTRL R as a start code and EOM CTRL T as an end code 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 15 Translation Formats RCA Cosmac Format Code 70 Data in this format begins with a start record consisting of the start character M or M an address field and a space See Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 RCA Cosmac Format example IM or M Start Characters Start Record D Addises InonoIz ae al M0OOO00 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE 1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEF Data Records FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF l L End of File Record FF 2 Hex Characters 1 Byte Bytes per record is variable End of Record Character End of Record Character if followed by expressed address LEGEND CD Nonprinting line feed carriage return and nulls 2 Nonprinting carriage return 0079 2 The start character M is sent to the programmer by a development system followed by the starting address and a data stream which conforms to the data input format
323. somewhere in the middle of the file More About I O Address Offset In general the following formula represents where in programmer RAM data will be transferred Physical RAM address File Address I O Offset Address Begin RAM Address The default I O Address Offset FFFFFFFF does not represent a numerical hex value It is simply a flag to indicate that the first address in your file will be used as the I O Address Offset By default the programmer interprets the first file address as the I O Address Offset and subtracts that value from all of the remaining addresses in the file Consequently the data contained in address locations lower than the first address will be lost 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 19 Messages Incompatible User Data File for Device Selected Probable Cause Solution The wrong device is selected in the Select the correct device in the programmer menu programmer The wrong device is selected in the Recompile the source file with the correct device selected development tool in the development tool The user has transferred the JED file Use the More Transfer data Input from Disk command and from the drive on the programmer program the device from RAM using More File Operations Load file command Note The More File Operations Load File command is a transfer for an absolute binary format The programmer must receive a JEDEC format for logic devices The user is attempting to program the
324. ss in hex where the first byte of data is stored from the source port This field appears only when a non JEDEC format is selected If the destination is RAM it is a beginning RAM address if the destination is disk it is a beginning disk file address The default is O User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block to be downloaded This field appears only when a non JEDEC format has been selected The default is 0 which directs the programmer to receive all the data in the file After the download is complete a value equal to the number of bytes received is set here If a value less than the size of the data received is entered only the number of bytes equal to that value are actually stored Download Host Command Enter the appropriate host command line here to download the data This line may be up to 58 characters long The programmer generates a return character to terminate the line when transmitted to the host To clear a previously entered command enter a blank command by pressing SPACE If you are using HiTerm use the tr filename command where filename is the name of the file to download For more information see the HiTerm User Manual For an example of using HiTerm to download data from a PC see Session 8 in Chapter 3 More Commands Transfer Data Upload Data Use the Upload Data command to specify uploading parameters and to execute the upload operation Uploading moves a data file from t
325. stall a PPI adapter in the PPI Base CAUTIONS Do not touch the exposed SPA pins on the PPI base with anything but a cleaning cloth Contamination of the pins could lessen programming reliability Do not disassemble the PPI base doing so could cause the pins to drop out To avoid damage to the device do not install it in the adapter until the adapter is securely installed in the Base 1 Install the PPI Base in the programmer see page 2 11 Note If the adapter socket has a high profile see the next section 2 Raise the removable base door until it rests in the upright position 3 Position the adapter so the retaining latch end faces toward the latches near the front of the Base Slide the rear of the adapter into the back of the Base The alignment holes in the front corners of the adapter should slide onto the plastic guide pins 4 Lower the base door over the PPI adapter 5 Press down on the door until the latches snap into place over the door Make sure that both latches are securely in place C C 1 2 3 BASE DOOR SPA PINS GUIDE PIN Q 1 of 2 RETAINING LATCH ADAPTER L LATCHES 2412 3 2 24 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 2413 2 High Profile PPI Adapters To install PPI adapters with sockets that sit high on the circuit board follow these steps 1 Remove the door from the PPI B
326. t Exit Editor F2 Toggle Hex TAB ASCII Modes Complement Data Toggles the state between Insert and Overtype If the Insert field is displayed in reverse video the editor is in Insert mode If the Insert field is displayed in normal video the editor is in Overtype mode In Insert mode data are inserted at the current cursor position and all data after that are moved up into higher memory or file addresses If editing a RAM file data at the end of RAM are lost If editing a disk file the file gets larger The insert is not complete until the last hexadecimal character 8 or 16 bit is entered The cursor moves by byte for 8 bit data or by word for 16 bit data In Overtype mode data entered replaces the current data When not in insert mode the arrow keys move the cursor by character For 8 bit data the data are entered in bytes and for 16 bit data the data are entered in words Exits the memory editor and returns the programmer to the Edit menu Toggles the mode for data entry When in hex mode data are entered on the left side of the screen and the only valid entries are hex characters When in ASCII mode data are entered on the right side of the screen and any printable ASCII character can be entered ASCII mode is not allowed when in 4 bit mode More Commands Edit Data Complement Complement Memory The Complement command converts each bit of data within the specified data block to its opposite value one s com
327. t gt 3980 3900 2900 User Manual C Keep Current Subscription The Keep Current subscription service keeps your programmer up to date with the latest features and device support You gain immediate access to new and improved programming algorithms via the Keep Current Library accessible through the Internet or via the Data I O BBS Semiconductor companies constantly introduce new devices and issue specification changes for existing devices Incorporating these changes swiftly into your programming system ensures that you obtain the highest programming yields and best device reliability possible Periodic update kits incorporate all changes since the previous update The Keep Current device support files are located on the Data I O Bulletin Board System on the Data I O Web page and through anonymous FTP Computer Requirements To access and download the Keep Current files you need the following W Ability to create 3 5 inch DOS disks 720KB if you are using a UniSite 1 44MB for all other programmers W The ability to connect to the Keep Current Library through the Internet or a modem capable of handling 2400 or greater 3980 3900 2900 User Manual C 1 Keep Current Subscription Procedure Overview 1 Gather Device Information i 2 Connect to Keep Current i Web Bee Page v 3 Find Device Algorithm v 4 Download Algorithm l 5 Use Algorithm
328. t Remote port Data source destination RAM Security fuse data 0 or 1 0 Program security fuse No Reject option commercial or single Commercial Logic verification option All Number of verify passes 0 1 or 2 2 Fill RAM before downloading No Illegal bit check option No Blank check option No Enable yield tally option No EE bulk erase option No Odd even byte swap for 16 bit option No JEDEC I O translate DIP LCC option Yes Continuity check option Yes Compare electronic signature Yes Host command Blank I O address offset 0 I O format Instrument control code 0 1 2 I O timeout Upload wait Number of nulls MOS technology format 81 0 30 seconds 0 seconds 255 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Computer Remote Control Description Setting Serial set auto increment mode No Programming mode single device Total set size 1 Upload EOF delimiter flag Disabled Download EOF delimiter flag Disabled If you exit remote mode using the Z command the programmer s parameters are set to what they were before you entered remote mode If you exit using CTRL Z the programmer s parameters are NOT changed CRC Commands CRC commands are simplified commands for the programmer that are designed to be received from a controlling computer Because the commands are so simplified they can be cryptic at times CRC Command Summary You send CRC commands to the programmer by typing the command and then pressing the ENTER key When
329. t after the B Jump to Vector prompt at the bottom of the screen Enter the vector number to jump to and press ENTER Delete CTRL D Deletes the current vector where the cursor is Vector located Insert CTRL I Inserts a default vector which consists of a vector of Default all Xs the character that expresses the ignore input and output test condition Use the default vector for creating new test vectors To create a new test vector insert a default vector and change that vector to contain the test conditions that you specify the legal test conditions are listed in the previous table When you enter this command the default vector is placed in front of the vector highlighted by the cursor Next Block CTRL N Displays the next block of vectors Prev Block CTRL P Displays the previous block of vectors 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 47 Commands Command Keystrokes Description Restore CTRL U Block Save CTRL W Vector Repeat CTRL V Saved Exit Editor F2 Fill Fuse Map Restores the current page of vector data to its original state before editing this page began Only the data visible on the screen is affected by this command which is effective only if there have been no paging commands since changes were made Saves the current vector at the cursor to a temporary buffer Inserts the vector that was last saved using the Ctrl W command When you execute this command the saved vector is placed in front of
330. t cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support Addr err The programmer has experienced an error that it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer off and reboot the system Address out of range The address you tried to select is beyond the selected device s range Select an address that is within the limits of the device or select a different device This message appears while you are in the memory editor fuse editor or using the under overblow feature Altera POF translator must be selected for POF devices You selected an Altera POF device and tried to run a data transfer operation such as a download but you did select the POF data translation format Select the POF Format as the data translation format and retry the operation ASCII entry not allowed in 4 bit mode This message appears in the memory editor when the programmer tries to go into ASCII entry mode when a 4 bit device is selected Reselect the device or edit in hex mode only 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 1 Messages Beginning of file This message appears when you are viewing the first block of data using the memory editor vector editor fuse editor or the under overblow feature and press CTRL P previous page Begin address too large The beginning address you selected in the memory editor is too large and is beyond the limits of the selected device Change the begin address to
331. t file is not used by the programmer 04 Extended Linear Address Record This record specifies bits 16 31 of the destination address for the data records that follow It is added to the offset to determine the absolute destination address and can appear randomly anywhere within the object file The address field for this record must contain ASCII zeros Hex 30s 05 Start Linear Address Record This record which specifies bits 16 31 of the execution start address for the object file is not used by the programmer 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 5 45 Translation Formats Highest I O Addresses The following table shows the highest I O addresses accepted for each data translation format 5 46 Format Highest Address Number Format Name hex bytes 01 03 ASCII BNPF BHLF and B10F N A 04 Texas Instruments SDSMAC 320 1FFFF FFFF words 05 07 ASCII BNPF BHLF and B10F N A 11 DEC Binary N A 12 13 Spectrum 270F 16 Absolute Binary N A 17 LOF N A 30 32 ASCII Octal Space Percent and 3FFFF 777777 octal Apostrophe 35 37 ASCII Octal Space Percent and SMS 3FFFF 777777 octal 50 52 ASCII Hex Space Percent and FFFF Apostrophe 55 58 ASCII Hex Space Percent SMS FFFF and Comma 70 RCA Cosmac FFFF 80 Fairchild Fairbug FFFF 81 MOS Technology FFFF 82 Motorola EXORciser FFFF 83 Intel Intellec 8 MDS FFFF 85 Signetics Absolute Object FFFF 86 Tektronix Hexadecimal FFFF 87 Motorola EXORmax FFFFFF 8
332. t of up to 10 files at a time is displayed If there are more than 10 files press CTRL N to display the next page of files or CTRL P to display the first page of files To view files on another disk press F2 insert the disk then return to the beginning of this step Replace Restore More Commands Configure System Keep Current Replace Restore This command displays the Replace Restore screen where you can toggle the Keep Current algorithms between replaced and restored status If a device is marked replaced during device selection the Keep Current algorithm is used instead of its corresponding algorithm from the alg sys file 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Devices previously marked as replaced can be restored so that the alg sys algorithm is used during device selection To toggle algorithm s between replaced and restored status do the following 1 Delete Insert the disk with the KCx files you want to replace or restore into the programmer disk drive Select the Replace Restore command The programmer first checks to see if alg sys and kcmarker sys files are loaded into RAM If they have not been loaded the programmer searches for the Algorithm System disk If the disk is not found the following message is displayed Cannot access system file Insert system disk Insert the appropriate algorithm disk and try again 3980 Users Copy the Keep Current algorithm to drive I using the More Com
333. t up the programmer for remote control operation Includes information on entering and exiting CRC mode m CRC Summary Lists the available CRC commands If you are using CRC commands you must use a driver program to send the CRC commands and receive the programmer s responses You can either write your own software driver or use an already created driver such as the terminal exe program included with Windows System Setup The programmer receives CRC commands and sends responses to the host computer through an RS 232C port using a 25 pin D connector in two possible configurations either DTE or DCE Only the Remote port supports CRC operation The pin designations for the Remote port are shown on page 2 8 Included in that section is a table of pin definitions that describes the function of each pin for the two serial port configurations To ensure correct operation of the Remote port with the host computer set the parameters for the Remote port according to the host computer requirements 3980 3900 2900 User Manual B 1 Computer Remote Control Entering CRC Mode CRC mode can be entered automatically at powerup or by using the Remote Control menu Note Before you enter CRC mode with a new version of software you must use the Update command to update the system software Refer to the description of the Update command in the Commands chapter By Menu Commands To enter CRC mode using the Remote Control menu do the fol
334. ta 4 53 Boot disk 1 4 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Booting the programmer 2 13 2 31 3 7 Bulletin Board Service 1 8 C Cables building your own 2 8 electromagnetic interference 2 4 2 5 2 6 shielding 2 4 2 5 2 6 Calculate Sumcheck 4 39 logic device 4 39 Calibration verifying performance A 1 Canadian Standards Association 1 7 Cancelling an operation 3 7 Certificate of Compliance 1 7 Checksum Calculation Edit Programming Parameters 4 22 Clear Vectors 4 48 Command window 3 5 Commands running 3 7 Communication parameters changing 4 26 Compare Data 4 64 Compare Electronic ID 4 41 default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 23 Load Memory Device 4 10 Program Memory Device 4 14 Verify Memory Device 4 17 Compatible terminals list 4 31 Compensated Vector Test Edit Programming Parameters 4 24 Complement Data 4 51 Computer remote control command summary B 5 default settings B 4 entering 4 59 entering CRC Mode B 2 exiting 4 59 B 3 halting an operation B 4 powerup CRC mode B 2 system setup B 1 Conductive pad care 2 29 Configuration choosing 2 1 Configure System 4 19 Index 1 Configuring devices 4 44 peripherals 2 5 2 7 programmer 2 1 Connections checking 2 15 Contents of package 1 2 Continuity Check default setting 4 3 Edit Programming Parameters 4 24 Copy Data File 4 56 Cross programming overview 4 6 Cursor control 3 6 Custom Menu
335. tall th Base xus x xoxo Lon ex N X npe OR ae XDR EU 2 11 4 Turn On the Programmer llle 2 13 5 Check Self test Results llle 2 14 6 Power 0n Screemr aes Rm Pa RR Ro ewe eee Y Y XU 2 16 7 Set Up High Speed Download optional ee eee 2 17 Setting Up High Speed Download with TaskLink 2 17 Setting Up High Speed Download with HiTerm 2 17 8 Install Devices llle ns 2 19 Inserting a DIP Device into a DIPBase lesen 2 19 Installing a MatchBook into a Base l 00000 ee eee 2 20 Inserting a PLCC or LCC Device into a MatchBook 2 21 Inserting an SOIC Device into a MatchBook 2 22 Inserting a PGA Device into a PGA Base 3900 3980 2 23 Installing a PPI Adapter into the PPI Base 2 24 3980 3900 2900 User Manual lii High Profile PPI Adapters 0 000 eee ee ee 2 25 Inserting Devices in a PPI Adapter 000 2 0000s 2 26 9 Preventive Maintenance es 2 29 Cleaning the F n sme ca za 2 804003 Oke ego E dox RR a x 2 29 Conductive Pad eee hrs 2 29 SPA Block and Base lle rn 2 30 10 What To Do Next Time llle rh 2 31 Using the MSM 3980 eee 2 31 3 Getting Started Outline of the Programming Operation llle 3 1 Session 1 Programming a Device Using TaskLink 3 2 Session 2 Navigating Through the Progra
336. ter 1 1F Selects the two digit hexadecimal number of the ASCII character you want to use as the end of file character in uploading data to a host computer Select any value between 01 and 1F m Download Use End of file Delimiter Y N When enabled signals the programmer that the transmission of a particular file is complete During a download operation characters after the last record and before the end of the file would be ignored If you wish to use this feature you must select this option and you must provide the two digit hexadecimal number of the ASCII character you want to use as the end of file character Any value between 01 and 1F may be selected m Download End of file Delimiter 1 1F Selects the two digit hexadecimal number of the ASCII character you want to use as the end of file character in downloading from a host computer Any value between 01 and 1F may be selected m Upload Host Command Type the command up to 58 characters you want to use to tell the host system what to do with the data to be uploaded You can use host operating system commands on this line For example with UNIX you would enter an upload command such as cat 27128 hex The programmer appends an Enter to the command m Download Host Command Type the command you want to send to the host system to initiate a file transfer download to the programmer The command may be up to 58 characters long You can use host operating system commands on this line For
337. the generic device can take on the function of many subset devices The term generic PLD is used to identify the superset device such as a 16V8 generic PLD which can be configured as a 16R4 16R8 or a 16L8 The generic PLD and the subset devices it can support are not restricted to the same manufacturer For example a 16V8 generic PLD from manufacturer A can be programmed using a fuse pattern originally designed for a 16L8 from manufacturer B The cross programming feature allows you to avoid recompiling source code for the generic PLD if the appropriate fuse pattern is available for a subset part Follow these steps to cross program a device 1 Select a manufacturer with an XPGM extension then press ENTER A list of all devices that can be replaced by the generic PLD of the selected manufacturer is displayed 2 From the Part Menu for Manufacturer screen select the appropriate device such as 16V8 as 16L8 if a 16L8 fuse map has been loaded and a 16V8 generic PLD is to be programmed Then press ENTER 3 Load the fuse map of the subset PLD into User Memory by using either a Load From Device operation or a Download of a JEDEC file 4 From the Main Menu select the Program Devices screen 16V8 as 16L8 will be displayed in the PART field at the top of the screen 5 Insert the 16V8 and press ENTER The 16V8 is programmed as a 16L8 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands After You Select a Device After you select a device any
338. the base and bends the pins on the device Faulty device s Check the device for bent or damaged pins leads Repeat the operation with similar devices from the same manufacturer and from other manufacturers If the operation proves successful with similar devices then the suspect part is probably defective If the device has been in circuit or in a test or burn in socket it may have bent pins If so it is not likely that the device will be able to be programmed with an elastomeric base A PPI adapter with a discrete socket may be required to successfully program the device Pad is dirty or worn Examine the pad for debris and wear Clean or replace the pad as necessary Refer to documentation for cleaning and replacement instructions A raised or discolored pad is not necessarily bad Examine it carefully prior to changing it Base is dirty or worn Separate the compression ring from the base and examine the base with a magnifying glass or microscope If any gold has worn off or there are scratches or dents in the gold traces replace the base Possible defect in programmer software associated with continuity check If this error occurs during an attempt to load the device via Load Device from the Main Menu disable the Continuity Check parameter change from Y to N in the Programming Parameters screen via More Configure system Edit Programming options from the Main Menu If the device is loaded successfully
339. the correct LEDs are lit go to Power on Screen on page 2 16 If the corresponding LEDs are not lit read the next section Programmer Did Not Pass Self test 2 14 If the correct LEDs are not lit refer to the illumination patterns shown below to determine the results of the self test Power Terminal Remote Self Test Description Off X X On Bad power supply On Blinking Blinking Blinking Power supply problem check voltage selector On Blinking Off On Bad CPU or EPROM On Off Blinking On Bad system RAM On Blinking Blinking On Bad serial port DUART X X X Blinking Bad LCA Note X don t care condition In general if one or more front panel indicators is blinking after the self test there may be a faulty circuit board in the programmer Contact Data I O Customer Support for more information If the Remote LED and or Terminal LED should be lit and they are not check the connections between the programmer and the connected equipment as described in the next section 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Checking the Connections Sometimes problems are caused by unconnected cables Turn off the programmer and check the following W Power cords Are all power cords plugged into a live outlet and into the equipment W Cables Is each cable between the programmer and a peripheral correctly connected to the proper port WB Terminal Is the terminal plugged in and turned on Are the display controls adjusted to allow viewing Is
340. the devices of the set are programmed one at a time instead of all at once Serial Test Vector Application The process of applying test vectors in a serial fashion one input at a time Serial Vector Test A device test that applies test vector input states serially starting with pin one and stepping through the remaining pins This test is a diagnostic tool designed to help debug and classify test vector failures Specifically this test is designed to isolate test vectors that are sequence dependent Set Programming A type of programming in which a large data file is partitioned and programmed into multiple memory devices SIMM An Acronym for Single Inline Memory Module a type of device package A rectangular device with leads on one long edge SmartPort A feature of the programmer that automatically detects and adjusts the programmer to the presence of DCE DTE protocol SOIC An acronym for Small Outline Integrated Circuit a type of device package A rectangular device with gull wing leads on the long sides SOP is Small Outline Package SO is Small Outline Source The place from which something is being sent usually data It can be sent to RAM a disk file or one of the programmer s serial ports SSOP An acronym for Shrink Small Outline Package a type of device package An SOP with more leads at higher and finer pitch Also called TSOP II Status Window The top three lines of the screen The following information is d
341. the following file 02 0000 02 1230 BA 10 0045 00 55AA FF BC Solution Step 1 Find the record address for the byte The first data byte is 55 Its record address is 0045 from above Step 2 Find the offset address The offset address is 1230 from above Step 3 Shift the offset address one place left then add it to the record address like this 1230 Offset address upper 16 bits 0045 Record address lower 16 bits 12345 20 bit address The address for the first data byte is 12345 Note Always specify the address offset when using this format even when the offset is zero During output translation the firmware will force the record size to 16 decimal if the record size is specified greater than 16 There is no such limitation for record sizes specified less than 16 03 Start Record This record type is not sent during output by Data I O translator firmware 5 24 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Translation Formats Hewlett Packard 64000 Absolute Format Code 89 Hewlett Packard Absolute is a binary format with control and data checking characters See Figure 5 16 Figure 5 16 HP 64000 Absolute Format example HIGH LOW ORDER ORDER END OF FILE gt End of File record consists only of a word count of 0 RECORD e eo Checksum 0 06 eo c gt of e e 0 ae 12 10 e THEE e e e e Third Byte 32 bit address e o e e e e e e fl MSB is sent in this e e e
342. the programmer receives a CRC command the command is executed and a response is sent back followed by a carriage return If the response is an F an error occurred If the response is a the programmer did not understand the command If the response is a gt the normal CRC prompt the command executed properly Some commands respond with both a value and the prompt For example the programmer might return 00284295 gt when you send the Calculate Sumcheck command In this case the 00284295 is the sumcheck and the gt indicates that the command executed properly The I O and C commands perform any data transfer prior to sending the response Each command in the CRC command set is summarized in the following tables For a more detailed explanation of CRC commands refer to the UniSystem Computer Remote Control Application Note 983 0490 available from Customer Support The command tables are broken up into standard and extended CRC commands Standard CRC commands are commonly used commands such as Load Program and Verify Extended CRC commands are more specific device related commands such as Set Security Fuse Fill Fuse Map and Set Vector Test Options Note While in CRC mode the programmer recognizes only uppercase characters Except where noted the commands use the following notation conventions W lower case alphabetic characters indicate arguments that must be specified W h represents a hexadecimal digit W n represents a
343. the terminal an approved terminal type See the list on page 2 6 B Communication Are the communication parameters set correctly Is the cable connected to the proper port m Host Is the host plugged in and turned on Is the terminal emulation software installed configured and running properly Are the display controls on the monitor adjusted to allow viewing W Disk Is the Boot disk inserted properly W Base Is a Base installed correctly Is the device socket empty A base must be installed and the socket must be empty After you check everything described above reboot the programmer using one of these methods a powerup self test is performed in either case W Turn off the programmer wait a few seconds then it on turn again W Press Esc CTRL W If the Power on screen shown in Figure 2 8 is displayed the programmer was booted successfully Continue with Power on Screen on page 2 16 If the Power on screen is not displayed or if you see random characters the programmer is not communicating properly with your controlling terminal workstation The baud rates of the programmer and the controlling equipment may not match Follow the procedure in the next section to run the AutoBaud function to sync up the baud rates AutoBaud and Baud Rates AutoBaud determines the baud rate of the equipment connected to the programmer s Terminal A port and sets the programmer s baud rate to match Note AutoBaud is enab
344. thm Type D E K C Selects the type of device algorithms D Selects algorithms from those on the Algorithm disk If you select D then choose Select Device the standard Manufacturer List is displayed E Selects algorithms from the alg ext file which contains extended algorithms used by Data I O for device approvals special device algorithm updates and the Archived Devices disk If you choose E then Select Device a list containing only the manufacturers in the alg ext file is displayed If the programmer cannot find the alg ext file it displays Cannot access system file Insert System disk 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 21 Commands K Selects algorithms from the Keep Current algorithms on the disk in the disk drive If you select K then Select Device the Keep Current Part List is displayed Keep Current algorithms are downloaded from Data I O s Keep Current BBS and provide immediate support for new device algorithms and updated device algorithms For more information see the Keep Current chapter C Selects algorithms from the Custom Menu algorithms on the disks in the disk drives If you select C then Select Device the Custom Menu List is displayed Note See Save System Parameters on page 4 31 to learn how to save your Algorithm Type and other parameter changes as powerup defaults W Algorithm Media File F M The 3980 provides two algorithm media options Floppy Disk F and Mass Storage Module M The device s
345. tions in this chapter for more information Note The User Data Size field does not appear on the Load File screen However this parameter is still updated to reflect the size of the file loaded for use in other screens The parameters are described below WB Filename Specifies the name of the disk file to load The filename must follow standard DOS conventions An example of a valid filename is 27c256 dat or 1618 dat Memory Begin Address Specifies the first address in memory to load data into This option appears only if you selected a memory device The default address is O If a logic device is selected the fuse map and vectors from the disk are loaded More Commands File Operations Save File This command allows you to save the data in RAM to a disk file formatted in RAM Image Binary Do not use this command to save a file on a PC or a file server See the Upload Data command for information on transferring files to a PC or a file server from the programmer Note A saved file is stored in RAM Image Binary format To store a file in some other format use the Transfer Data Output to Disk command To save data in RAM to disk follow these steps 1 2 Insert the disk you want to save the data to in the disk drive Select Save File A directory of the disk in the disk drive is displayed If you do not want to save your file to this disk press F2 to return to the File Operations menu Insert the disk you want to save the dat
346. tions must be met 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 27 Commands e An IBM compatible PC must be connected to the programmer Remote port e Data I O s HiTerm software must be installed and running on the PC e The data you are downloading must be stored in a data format supported by HiTerm for high speed downloads The HiTerm User Manual lists the supported formats e You must use HiTerm s TR command when you download data to the programmer See the HiTerm User Manual for more information Setting this parameter to Y causes the User Menu Port parameter to be set to R Remote port See Setting up High Speed Download on page 2 17 m User Menu Port R T Specifies which of the programmer s two ports should be used to send user menu information and receive commands You see user menu information and commands when you operate the programmer from a workstation or a terminal This parameter is usually set to T Terminal port To use the 115 2K baud high speed download option use this parameter to redirect the user menu information from the Terminal port to the Remote port To redirect the user menu information set this parameter to the port you want connected to the controlling PC press Enter then move the cable to the port specified on the programmer Note When switching ports make sure the communication settings of the terminal PC and the port you switch to are the same Also make sure you switch between compatible terminals for e
347. tomatically set to the device size and usually does not need to be changed It is also set to a smaller value if the Device Begin Address is not zero You can change this parameter Entering zero sets the Device Block Size equal to the device size Set Auto increment When enabled directs the programmer in serial set programming mode to the starting memory address of the next block in the set to be programmed For example if you have four 1K x 8 devices to program from a 4K x 8 block of data using the auto increment option directs the programmer to point to the first address of the next 1K block after each device has been programmed For single device operations this feature should be disabled and the Next Device parameter should be set to 1 Note Items with an asterisk are visible on the screen only if the selected device supports the feature Illegal Bit Check Y N Enables or disables the illegal bit test This test compares data in a device against data in the programmer s RAM to determine if the device has already programmed locations of incorrect polarity 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 13 Commands For example the programmer returns an illegal bit error in the following situation data in RAM indicates a specific bit should be in an unprogrammed state while the corresponding bit in the device is in a programmed state The device cannot be programmed if the programmer detects an illegal bit This parameter is enabled by d
348. tput requirements are identical both have 8 byte records and identical control characters Figure 5 8 shows a Fairbug data file A file begins with a 5 character prefix and ends with a 1 character suffix The start of file character is an S followed by the address of the first data byte Each data byte is represented by 2 hexadecimal characters The programmer will ignore all characters received prior to the first S Note Address specification is optional in this format a record with no address directly follows the previous record Each data record begins with an X and always contains 8 data bytes A 1 digit hexadecimal checksum follows the data in each data record The checksum represents in hexadecimal notation the sum of the binary equivalents of the 16 digits in the record the half carry from the fourth bit is ignored The programmer ignores any character except for address characters and the asterisk character which terminates the data transfer between a checksum and the start character of the next data record This space can be used for comments Figure 5 8 Fairchild Fairbug example S Start Character 0000 Address Field Start Record S0000 XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC FF 2 Hex Char rs 1 B XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC ex Characters 1 y XFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC C Checksum 1 di
349. ttern and replace it with another pattern 1 Press CTRL E The cursor moves to the Exchange field at the bottom of the screen 2 Type the pattern to search for a hex value up to 8 digits then press ENTER The cursor moves to the With field bottom of screen 3 Type the pattern you want inserted in place of the existing pattern then press ENTER If the pattern cannot be found a message is displayed and the cursor remains in place When exchange data is entered in 4 bit mode the upper nibble of data is blank so only up to four characters can be entered in the field Next Block CTRL N Displays the next block of memory data Prev Block CTRL P Displays the previous block of memory data Restore Block CTRL U Returns the current page of data to its original state before editing began The page is restored only if there had been no paging commands Search CTRL F Allows you to search for a particular hex pattern of up Pattern to 8 digits 1 Press CTRL F The cursor moves to the Search field at the bottom of the screen 2 Type in the pattern to search for any hex value up to 8 digits followed by ENTER If the pattern cannot be found a message is displayed and the cursor remains in its original position When searching for data in 4 bit mode the upper nibble of data is blank so only up to four characters can be entered in the search field 4 50 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Start Stop CTRL T Inser
350. ve P and V fields is that vector 1 will apply 111000 to pins 1 through 6 and HLHH to pins 14 through 17 Pins 7 through 13 and 18 through 20 will not be tested JEDEC U and E Fields As of Version 2 5 the programmer supports the optional JEDEC U user data and E electrical data fields The U and E fields are described below Note Implementation of the JEDEC U and E fields is not part of the JEDEC 3C JESD3 C standard User Data U Field 5 34 The U field allows user data fuses that do not affect the logical or electrical functionality of the device to be specified in JEDEC files For instance the U field can be used to specify the User Data Signature fuse available in some types of PLD devices because this fuse contains information only it has no logical or electrical functionality Note To have the JEDEC U field processed correctly you must select the device before downloading the JEDEC file The following guidelines apply to the U field The U field must be included for devices with U fuses Each U field cell must be explicitly provided if the U field is present The F default fuse state field does not affect U fuses There can only be one U field in a JEDEC file The U field fuses must be listed in the order they appear in the device The U field must be listed after the L field and E fields if used and before the V test vector field if used The U field is specified using binary numbers since the full
351. ve from the Configure System Parameters menu The screen displays the Save System Parameters menu 9 Type 1 ENTER to select the Powerup Defaults file as the one where system parameters will be saved 10 Press ENTER again so that the selection will be saved to the disk The next time you power up the programmer it will enter CRC mode automatically Interface Modes You can operate the programmer in one of two interface modes Terminal and CRC In Terminal mode you use screens and menus to interact with the programmer In CRC mode you send single line commands to the programmer and the programmer responds with single line prompts responses and error codes Note Terminal mode operations may be run from either the Terminal port or the Remote port CRC mode operations must be run from the Remote port CRC will not work on the Terminal port Depending on the equipment you have connected to the programmer and on the settings of the User Menu Port and Power on CRC parameters you can select which mode is available on which port The User Menu Port parameter is found on the More Commands Configure System Edit Communication Parameters screen Factory defaults for the programmer are Terminal mode commands sent through the Terminal port and CRC mode commands sent through the Remote port The factory default for power up state is Terminal mode Exiting CRC Mode Press CTRL Z to exit CRC from an ASCII terminal on the Terminal port From a
352. version numbers older than the current system software on the installed disk 10 files are displayed at one time Press CTRL N to display the next page of files press CTRL P to display the previous page If you do not see the files you want to purge press F2 insert another disk and return to the beginning of this step In the Are you sure field press Y CAUTION If you do not want to purge files do not press Enter To purge files displayed on the screen press ENTER If you do not want to purge files press F2 to go to the File Operations menu If no more KCx files are left on the disk the Keep Current Configuration menu is displayed Custom Menu Algs 4 34 More Commands Configure System Custom Menu Algorithms The commands in the Custom Menu Algs menu allow you to create Custom Menus containing the devices you use most often Instead of scrolling through screens of devices you rarely use you can select from the shorter custom list The following commands are available on this menu Create Add View Delete Update Note For information on how to select a device from a Custom Menu refer to Select Device on page 4 5 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands Create More Commands Configure System Custom Menu Algs Create This command displays the Create screen where you can create a new Custom Menu by following these steps 1 Select Create The programmer prompts you for the following Source Disk
353. vice us mk EROR a Ege ee So ee x 4 10 Verify Device 2 va cuc o RR ERAT UK RR E RR EE eee Y X Yos 4 15 More Commands saasaa aaa a hh hn 4 18 Configure System llle es 4 19 Device Cheeks 3 x Rae khoa E UE ee xao ux Ode eee 4 39 Edit Data 22 29 46 kbs eS EMR aw eee ee eee Se eas 4 45 File Operations sora sei e o RR Siem e tee REY Ba ae Ba re 4 53 JOD FILS ccv 4 58 Remote Control cues BAR Ue Y ee Rea ee A ee XS XO x 4 59 Self Test aoi m see gode Reid inre ees aan ee e RR eee a Do PR SUR 4 60 Transfer Data ccce hrs 4 61 MIL ECLLGPEPPC cT 4 69 Overwriting User RAM The following operations use User RAM as a temporary storage buffer and overwrite existing data Duplicate Disk Copy File Serial Output from Disk File Download Data to Disk File Self test User RAM Upload Data from Disk File Output Data to Disk from Disk File Input Data from Disk to Disk File Compare Data to Disk File Create and Add Custom Menu Algorithms 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 1 Commands Figure 4 1 Command Tree page numbers are in italics Select Device 4 5 Quick Copy 4 7 Load Device 4 8 Program Device 4 10 More Commands 4 18 Keep Current Part Number Manufact List Configure Part Number List Restore 4 19 Programming 4 21 Serial I O 4 25 Communication 4 26 Edit Parameters 4 20 System 4 19 Device Checks
354. vice supports the feature Compare Electronic ID When enabled compares the electronic signature of the device against the electronic signature of the selected algorithm Odd Even Byte Swap Y N When enabled allows the Most Significant Bytes MSB and the Least Significant Bytes LSB of 16 bit words to be swapped when data is verified between a 16 bit device and memory When disabled data is verified with the MSB at an odd address When enabled the MSB is at an even address Verify Passes 0 1 2 Selects the number of times to test the device O do not to test the device 1 test the device once at the device manufacturer s nominal Vcc 2 verify the device at the device manufacturer s recommended high and low Vcc levels This is the default 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 4 17 Commands More Commands In general the commands found under the More Commands menu perform functions other than loading programming and verifying devices This is a multi level menu with some commands nested three levels deep The items on the top level of the More Commands menu are described below Configure System Contains commands that perform the update operation and those that edit save and restore the programmer s communications interface serial I O and programming parameters See page 4 3 for a list of these items From this menu you can also select a new terminal type and access Keep Current algorithm files You could use thes
355. werup defaults configuration file number 1 match the factory defaults configuration file number 0 when the unit is shipped from Data I O Parameter Factory Default Setting Abort on Empty Socket Algorithm Type Blank Check Continuity Check Compare Electronic ID Data Source destination Data Word Width Device Begin Address Device Block Size Display Device Footnote Enable Download Echo Enable Special Data Enable Terminal Beep Enable Yield Tally option EE Bulk Erase option EOF Delimiter Flag download EOF Delimiter Flag upload File Delimiter Character download File Delimiter Character upload Filename Fill RAM Before Downloading Fill RAM with Data 00 to FF High speed Logic Drivers Host Command Download Host Command Upload Illegal Bit Check Instrument Control Code 0 1 2 I O Address Offset I O Translation Format I O Timeout JEDEC I O Translate DIP LCC option Logic Verification all fuse vector Main Menu Job Files Manufacturer Memory Begin Address Number of lines between form feeds Number of nulls 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Yes D Yes Yes Yes RAM 8 0 1000 Y No No Yes No No No No 1A Ctrl4 Z 1A Ctri Z Blank No 00 Yes Blank Blank Yes 0 FFFFFFFF O no default 30 seconds Yes All No Blank no default 0 0 0 4 3 Parameter Commands Factory Default Setting Odd Even Byte Swap Part Number Power On CRC M
356. wildcard designation to purge more than one file at once for example type 27 dat to delete both the files 27512 dat and 27256 dat Reading user data file size The programmer is reading the data file size from disk Recording system state parameters This message is displayed after you select a file number for a set of system parameters to be saved It remains displayed until the programmer is finished recording the parameters Restoring system state variables The programmer is reading the recorded system variables from the selected file RTC err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support 6 8 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages RTE init err The programmer experienced an error it cannot recover from Turn off the programmer and reboot the system If the error recurs contact Data I O Customer Support Saving data to file Data are being written to a file on disk Saving parameters The programmer is saving the selected variables onto the disk Saving job file The programmer is saving a job file Search pattern not found You specified a data pattern for a file that does not contain that pattern This message appears while the programmer is in the memory editor or in the under overblow display Security fuse violation Hit return to continue Z to abort You tried to program an EE device with the se
357. window and reminder bar Figure 3 1 Main Menu Status Window md FILENAME FILE JED RAM AVAIL Z2176KB REU XXX Y YY MANUFACTURER TI PART 20L8A I 0 FORMAT JEDEC full Message Bar E MAIN MENU Select device Quick copy Command Load device i Window Program device Verify device More commands Dialog Window Reminder Bar W Fl Main menu F3 or Help F4 Order information Status Window The status window which occupies the top three lines of the screen displays important system information such as m Name of the data file FILE JED in Figure 3 1 W Amount of User RAM 2176KB W Version number of the Algorithm System disk X XX and Y YY W Device manufacturer and part number TI and 20L8A W Data translation format JEDEC full selected Message Bar The message bar displays system and error messages Also located in the message bar is the action symbol which rotates during an operation to indicate that the programmer is busy Command Window The command window displays the menu name in uppercase letters and the available commands in upper and lowercase letters below the menu name Dialog Window The dialog window the largest area on the screen displays different information and system parameters depending on the selected command Reminder Bar The reminder bar describes the function keys that are available 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 3 5 Getting Started Mov
358. without insertion errors try to program the device If the device programs successfully you ve found a reasonable workaround Note Contact Data I O Customer Support and report your findings Continuity problem with device programmer interface If following the steps described in the previous section causes the device to fail programming a subtle continuity problem may exist Workaround Refer to your programmer s Device List and note the earliest version of the device that is supported by your programmer Boot your programmer with any previous software version that supports the device and attempt the operation again If the operation is successful with the earlier software then you ve found a temporary workaround Note Contact Data I O Customer Support and report your findings 3980 3900 2900 User Manual 6 11 Messages Additional Information The Device insertion error message can only be caused by a failure of the continuity check The continuity check is activated prior to device programming During the continuity check the programmer applies low level current to each pin on the device to determine whether it is making good contact with the programming fixture After you disable the continuity test we suggest you load a device rather than program one A load operation is less apt to harm the device because no programming voltages are applied Attempts to program a device that is not making proper contact may result in
359. word width of 16 bits on the Program memory device screen it requires two devices to store each 16 bit word 1 directs the programmer to program the first device in the set with even numbered addresses of the memory block 2 directs the programmer to use odd numbered addresses Total Set Size Specifies how many virtual devices are in the set for device operations For example if you are programming 16 bit wide data into two 8 bit wide devices your virtual device still equals one one 16 bit virtual device You can enter any number between 1 and 99 Automatic Set Size calculation is attempted when you change any of the following parameters Device width Device Block Size or User Data Size Total Set Size is defined by the following equation USER DATA SIZE DATA WORD WIDTH TOTAL SET SIZE DEVICE BLOCK SIZE DEVICE WIDTH User Data Size Specifies the hexadecimal size in bytes of the data block to program into a device Normally this value is equal to the device size or to a multiple of the device size for set programming Entering 0 sets the User Data Size to the device size User Data Size works with Total Set Size to determine the total amount of bytes to program into a set of devices Next Operation Begins At This read only parameter shows what address in user memory contains the next data byte to be programmed This value is calculated from the Data Word Width Device Block Size Memory Begin Address device width and
360. x is the number of bytes copied into the destination file Copying sectors ssss ssss 120 Reading source disk The Disk Copy command is running The number of sectors copied in each pass is displayed 2880 sectors are on each disk The following message Copying sectors ssss ssss Writing destination disk is displayed while the programmer writes data to the destination disk Copying sectors ssss ssss 120 Writing destination disk Data is being copied during the Disk Copy routine 6 2 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Messages Could not initialize default system parameters from disk When the programmer was booting up the default and programming system parameters could not be loaded Reboot the programmer with a different system disk or contact Data I O Customer Support Data transfer complete This message appears after a data transfer with an external source was successfully completed Data transfer complete Data Sum ssssssss This message is displayed after a data transfer The data sum represents the calculated sumcheck for the data bytes transferred Data transfer complete Data Sum ssss Xmit ssss This message is displayed after a data transfer of a JEDEC file The data sum represents the calculated checksum for the data bytes in the fusemap section of the data transferred The Xmit sum represents the calculated checksum for all the bytes transferred Data transfer complete Data Sum ssss POF CRC ssss This messa
361. xample you cannot switch from an ANSI 3 64 compatible terminal to a VT 100 compatible terminal Setting the High Speed Download parameter to Y causes this parameter to be set to R Remote port WB JEDEC I O Translate DIP LCC Vectors Y N When enabled translates test vectors for a device from its DIP package to its PLCC LCC package If this feature is selected the programmer alters the test vectors during I O translation allowing for the different pinouts of the two package types During downloading vectors are converted from DIP to PLCC LCC during uploading vectors are converted from PLCC LCC to DIP Use this feature if you have created test vectors for a DIP device but actually want to program the PLCC LCC version of the same device WB Upload Use End of file Delimiter Y N When enabled inserts an end of file character following an uploaded file This delimiter character signals the host system that the upload is complete During an upload an end of file character is transmitted to the host To invoke this feature you must select this option and provide the two digit hexadecimal number of the ASCII character you want to use as the end of file character Select any value between 01 and 1F Note Use this feature only if you are using a format with an end of text character It cannot for example be used for files stored in a binary data translation format 4 28 3980 3900 2900 User Manual Commands m Upload End of file Delimi
362. xt block in the set to be loaded For example if you have four 1K x 8 devices to load into a 4K x 8 block of memory using the auto increment option directs the programmer to the first memory address of the next 1K block after each device is loaded For single device operations disable this feature and set the Next Device parameter to 1 Note Items with an asterisk are visible on the screen only if the selected device supports the feature Compare Electronic ID Y N Compares the electronic ID of the socketed device against the electronic ID of the selected algorithm Odd Even Byte Swap Y N When enabled allows the Most Significant Bytes MSB and the least significant bytes LSB of 16 bit words to be swapped when data is loaded from a 16 bit device When this parameter is disabled the data from a 16 bit device is loaded into User RAM with the MSB stored at an odd memory address When enabled the MSB is stored at an even memory address Program Device The Program Device command allows you to copy data from RAM Depending on whether you select a logic or memory device either the Program Logic Device screen or the Program Memory Device screen is displayed when you select this command Before you can program a device you must load the programming data into RAM which is described on page 4 8 Program Logic Device Main Menu Program Device Program Logic Parameters List To program a logic device follow these steps
363. ys the default and current terminal types and the available terminal types Select a terminal type enter the number corresponding to that terminal type and press ENTER You have changed the terminal type for this current session 4 The programmer then prompts you with Save terminal type as power on default Y N N 5 If you do not want to change the default terminal press N ENTER To change the default terminal type press Y ENTER The programmer saves the new terminal type to disk The new terminal type is now part of the powerup parameters 6 The screen clears and the programmer returns to the Configure System Parameters menu Resume normal operation Programmer ID More Commands Configure System Programmer ID Displays the programmer s system ID Keep Current 4 32 More Commands Configure System Keep Current Keep Current menu commands allow you to access Keep Current algorithm files KCx To learn how to select a Keep Current device see page 4 5 Commands on this menu include the following WB View W Replace Restore W Delete W Purge More Commands Configure System Keep Current View View displays information on all KCx files on the installed disk Compatibility between system software and Keep Current algorithms is not checked To view Keep Current algorithm files follow these steps 1 Insert the disk with the KCx files you want to view into the disk drive 2 Select the View command A lis

Programming Systems User Manual - FTP Site

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents